UNM2000

Network Convergence
Management System V2R11

Operation Guide
Version: A

Code: MN000004543

FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

May 2020
Thank you for choosing our products.

We appreciate your business. Your satisfaction is our goal.

We will provide you with comprehensive technical support
and after-sales service. Please contact your local sales
representative, service representative or distributor for any
help needed at the contact information shown below.

Fiberhome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: No. 67, Guanggu Chuangye Jie, Wuhan, Hubei, China

Zip code: 430073
Tel: +6 03 7960 0860/0884 (for Malaysia)
+91 98 9985 5448 (for South Asia)
+593 4 501 4529 (for South America)
Fax: +86 27 8717 8521
Website: http://www.fiberhome.com
Legal Notice

are trademarks of FiberHome Telecommunication Technologies Co., Ltd.

(Hereinafter referred to as FiberHome)
All brand names and product names used in this document are used for
identification purposes only and are trademarks or registered trademarks
of their respective holders.

All rights reserved

No part of this document (including the electronic version) may be

reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written permission from FiberHome.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice.
 Preface

Version

Version Description

Initial version, corresponding to the software version

A
UNM2000 V2R11.

Related Documentation
Document Main Content Phase to Use
UNM2000 Network Convergence Introduces the product positioning,
Network
Management System V2R11 features, basic functions, network and
planning
Product Description application, and technical specification.

UNM2000 Network Convergence

Introduces the installation flow and
Management System V2R11 Network
methods of the UNM2000 on the
Installation Guide (Based on deployment
Windows operating system.
Windows)

UNM2000 Network Convergence Introduces the operation methods, main

Network
Management System V2R11 windows and precautions of the
maintenance
Operation Guide management functions.

PON Network Traffic and Quality

Introduces the installation flow and Network
Analysis System V2R11
methods of the product. deployment
Installation Guide
PON Network Traffic and Quality Introduces the operation methods, main
Network
Analysis System V2R11 GUIs and indicators of the management
maintenance
Operation Guide functions.

Intended Readers

This manual is intended for the following readers:

u Network planning engineers

u Network monitoring engineers

u On-site maintenance engineers

I
Terminology Conventions

Terminology Convention
FiberHome UNM2000 Network Convergence Management
UNM2000
System

Symbol Conventions

Symbol Convention Description

Warning Important features or operation guide.

Possible injury to persons or systems, or cause traffic

Caution
interruption or loss.

Warning May cause severe bodily injuries.

➔ Jump Jumps to another step.

Cascading
→ Connects multi-level menu options.
menu
Bidirectional
↔ The service signal is bidirectional.
service
Unidirectional
→ The service signal is unidirectional.
service

II
 Precautions

To ensure normal running of the UNM2000, you must understand the following
security precautions before performing operations.

Hardware

The following introduces precautions for hardware security.

Precaution Possible Risk

The network management computer should be
placed away from direct sunlight,
The computer may work abnormally,
electromagnetic interference, heat source,
affecting the normal running of the
humidity and dust, and with at least 8 cm
UNM2000.
distance from other objects in order to keep
good ventilation.

Unexpected power failure may cause

Configure UPS power supply for the UNM2000
hardware damage, system failure, data loss,
computer.
and other issues of the UNM2000 computer.

The UNM2000 computer case, UPS power

Electronic components may be damaged
supply and switch (or hub) should be connected
due to lightning, or electrostatic.
to protection earth ground.

The UNM2000 computer cannot be used for

purposes other than network management. Use
Virus attack risks exist.
of unidentified memory devices should be
prohibited.

Operating System

The following introduces precautions for operating system security.

Precaution Possible Risk

If the operating system version is
Operating systems incompatible with the
incompatible with the UNM2000 version, the
UNM2000 version are prohibited.
UNM2000 may not properly operate.

To shut down the network management

The operating system may not properly start
computer, exit the operation system normally
up.
and then shut off the power supply.

III
 Precaution Possible Risk
u The network management system may
Unnecessary and unidentified third-party run slowly due to excessive
applications are prohibited. consumption of system resources.
u Virus attack risks exist.
The system protocol, host name, and IP
address cannot be modified without The UNM2000 may not properly operate.
permissions.

Irrelevant services and insecure services must

Attack risks exist.
not be enabled.
The UNM2000 system files may be blocked
Non-authorized anti-virus software such as 360
by mistake, resulting in UNM2000
is prohibited.
anomalies.

IV
Database

The following introduces precautions for database security.

Precaution Possible Risk

Databases incompatible with the UNM2000
The UNM2000 may not properly operate.
version are prohibited.

You are not permitted to log in to the database

The data in the database may be disordered,
using tools and directly add, delete, or modify
affecting normal running of the UNM2000.
data in the database.

EMS

The following introduces precautions for UNM2000 security.

Precaution Possible Risk

Files of the UNM2000 cannot be deleted
The UNM2000 may not properly operate.
without permissions.

Permissions are assigned by levels.

Passwords are issued to maintenance owners Operations beyond authority may occur.
only.

You are not permitted to perform service

configuration or expansion during service
Services may be interrupted.
busy hours via the network management
system.

You are not permitted to perform hybrid The data of the NEs and the UNM2000 may
management on the network through both be inconsistent. As a result, data may be lost
UNM2000 and CLI. during service delivery.

You are not permitted to change the License The license file may be invalid, affecting the
file in any form. UNM2000 operation.

You need to pay attention to the prompt

information when executing dangerous Services may be interrupted.
operations.

V
Contents

Preface...................................................................................................................I

Precautions ..........................................................................................................III

1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000 ..................................................................1

1.1 Login and Logout ..............................................................................2

1.1.1 Logging into the UNM2000 via Web Browser.......................2

1.1.2 Login by Client....................................................................3

1.2 Viewing the UNM2000 Version..........................................................5

1.3 GUI Introduction ...............................................................................5

1.3.1 System GUI ........................................................................5

1.3.2 Shortcut Icons.....................................................................6
1.3.3 Common Shortcut Keys ......................................................9

1.4 Setting UNM2000 System Parameters ............................................10

1.4.1 Setting Display of the Browse Tree....................................10

1.4.2 Setting the Topology Display ............................................. 11
1.4.3 Setting the Font ................................................................13
1.4.4 Setting the Skin ................................................................14
1.4.5 Setting the GUI Display.....................................................15
1.4.6 Setting the NE Manager....................................................16
1.4.7 Setting Ping Parameters ...................................................16
1.4.8 Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server ...............................18
1.4.9 Setting the Default Opening Page for NE Manager ............18
1.4.10 Setting the Personalization Switch ....................................19
1.4.11 Setting Display of the Performance Value ..........................20
1.4.12 Setting the Time Mode ......................................................21
1.4.13 Setting the XFTP Server ...................................................22
1.4.14 Configuring Automatic Link Setup Between PON NEs .......25
1.4.15 Setting Export Files...........................................................26
1.4.16 Limiting the Number of ONUs Connected to the PON Port .27
1.4.17 Setting the License Expiration Prompt ...............................28

1.5 Setting the Default Workspace ........................................................29

 1.6 Viewing the Machine ID ..................................................................29

1.7 Updating the License ......................................................................30

1.8 Modifying the User Password..........................................................31

1.9 Locking the Terminal .......................................................................32

1.10 Logging Out Users..........................................................................32

1.11 Viewing the Message Platform ........................................................33

1.12 Managing the Toolbar .....................................................................34

2 Security Management ...................................................................................36

2.1 Overview of the UNM2000 User Security.........................................37

2.2 User Security Policy Management...................................................42

2.2.1 Setting the User Login Mode .............................................42

2.2.2 Setting the Access Control List..........................................43
2.2.3 Setting the Account Policy.................................................46
2.2.4 Setting the Password Policy..............................................49

2.3 Authority Management....................................................................57

2.3.1 Authority Management Introduction ...................................57

2.3.2 Authority Allocation Principle .............................................58
2.3.3 Authority Management Scenarios......................................64
2.3.4 Authorization Planning Suggestion....................................65

2.4 Initial User Authorization .................................................................67

2.4.1 Flowchart of Creating Users ..............................................67

2.4.2 Creating a Customized Object Set.....................................68
2.4.3 Customizing Operation Sets..............................................70
2.4.4 Customizing and Authorizing User Groups ........................72
2.4.5 Creating and Authorizing Users.........................................74

2.5 Migrating Operation Sets ................................................................78

2.5.1 Exporting Operation Sets ..................................................78

2.5.2 Modifying Operation Sets in a Batch Manner .....................78
2.5.3 Importing Operation Sets ..................................................79

2.6 Adjusting Users' Authority ...............................................................79

2.6.1 Adjusting Authority in Case of Network Changes ...............80

2.6.2 Adjusting Authority in Case of Responsibility Changes ......82

2.7 Querying Authority ..........................................................................83

 2.7.1 Viewing the Management Domain of the User or User
Group ...............................................................................83
2.7.2 Viewing the Operation Authority of the User or User Group 85
2.7.3 Viewing the User Group to Which a User Belongs .............85
2.7.4 Viewing Users / User Groups to Whom an Operation Set Is
Assigned ..........................................................................86
2.7.5 Viewing Operations Included in an Operation Set ..............87
2.7.6 Viewing Objects in an Object Set.......................................88

2.8 Authorization Operation FAQs.........................................................89

2.8.1 How to Identify User Authority ...........................................89

2.8.2 How to Allocate Authority Beyond the User Group .............91

2.9 Authorization Examples ..................................................................91

2.9.1 Authorization Planning Example........................................91

2.9.2 Authorizing Users ...........................................................101
2.9.3 Adjusting Users' Authority - Management Scope
Changes.........................................................................105
2.9.4 Adjusting Users' Authority - Operation Authority Changes 107
2.9.5 Adjusting Users' Authority - Position Changes .................108

2.10 User Security Management...........................................................109

2.10.1 Locking the Terminal .......................................................109

2.10.2 Logging Out Users.......................................................... 110
2.10.3 Modifying the User Password.......................................... 110
2.10.4 Reminding Users to Modify Password upon Expiration .... 111
2.10.5 Resetting a User Password............................................. 112
2.10.6 Managing Security of Service Passwords........................ 113
2.10.7 Unlocking a UNM2000 User............................................ 115
2.10.8 Locking a User Group ..................................................... 115
2.10.9 Unlocking a User Group.................................................. 116
2.10.10Monitoring User Sessions ............................................... 117
2.10.11Logging Out Users.......................................................... 118
2.10.12Sending Messages to Online Users................................. 119
2.10.13Monitoring User Activity Information ................................120

3 Configuration Management .........................................................................122

3.1 NE Communication Route Management........................................123

3.1.1 NE Management Program...............................................123

 3.1.2 Partition Policy Management...........................................127

3.2 SNMP Parameter Template...........................................................129

3.2.1 Creating and Using an SNMP Parameter Template .........129

3.2.2 Modifying / Deleting an SNMP Parameter Template.........132

3.3 ONU Capability Set Template........................................................133

3.3.1 Creating an ONU Capability Set Template .......................133

3.3.2 Modifying an ONU Capability Set Template .....................135

3.4 Managing Global Templates..........................................................136

3.4.1 Viewing Global Templates ...............................................136

3.4.2 Adding a Global Template ...............................................137
3.4.3 Modifying a Global Template ...........................................139
3.4.4 Binding / Unbinding a Global Template ............................140
3.4.5 Deleting a Global Template .............................................142

3.5 Managing Global Configurations ...................................................143

3.5.1 Viewing the Global Configurations...................................144

3.5.2 Adding the Global Configurations ....................................144
3.5.3 Modifying the Global Configurations ................................145
3.5.4 Issuing the Global Configurations to a Device..................146
3.5.5 Deleting the Global Configurations ..................................147

3.6 Signaling Tracing ..........................................................................148

3.7 Configuration Synchronization ......................................................149

3.8 Network Access Status Management ............................................150

3.9 Pinging NEs..................................................................................151

3.10 Telneting NEs ...............................................................................151

3.11 WEB Configuration .......................................................................152

3.12 The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server................................152

3.13 Migrating the PON Configuration...................................................153

3.14 Synchronizing the Device Capabilities...........................................154

3.15 Synchronizing the Device Version Information ...............................154

4 Topology Management................................................................................156

4.1 Topology Creation Flow.................................................................157

4.2 Creating a Global Logical Domain .................................................158

4.3 Creating NEs ................................................................................159

4.3.1 Creating an Access NE ...................................................159

4.3.2 Creating a Switch NE ......................................................161
4.3.3 Creating Other NEs.........................................................163
4.3.4 Automatic Discovery of NEs............................................165

4.4 Creating Extended Subracks.........................................................170

4.5 Adding Cards................................................................................171

4.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically ............................................172

4.5.2 Adding Cards Manually ...................................................173

4.6 Replacing Cards ...........................................................................173

4.7 Creating a Link .............................................................................174

4.8 Editing an NE................................................................................175

4.8.1 Setting NE Attributes.......................................................175

4.8.2 Editing Icons...................................................................177
4.8.3 Setting the Displayed Content of the Icon ........................178
4.8.4 Tagging an NE ................................................................178
4.8.5 Querying a Label ............................................................179

4.9 Editing a Fiber Connection ............................................................179

4.9.1 Modifying the Connection Line Properties........................179

4.9.2 Setting the Display Mode of the Connection Line .............180
4.9.3 Viewing Links Between OLT NEs ....................................180
4.9.4 Viewing Links Between ONU NEs ...................................182

4.10 Browsing the Topology View .........................................................183

4.10.1 Customizing Views .........................................................184

4.10.2 Checking the Physical Topology View .............................185
4.10.3 Viewing the Sub-topology View .......................................186
4.10.4 Browsing the Bird-eye View ............................................189
4.10.5 Viewing Hot-spot Regions ...............................................189
4.10.6 Searching Objects ..........................................................191
4.10.7 Setting the Topology .......................................................192
4.10.8 Filtering the Topology......................................................193
4.10.9 Sorting the Object Tree ...................................................194
4.10.10Setting the Background Image ........................................194

4.11 Deleting the Topology ...................................................................195

 4.11.1 Deleting a Global Logical Domain ...................................195
4.11.2 Deleting NEs ..................................................................196
4.11.3 Deleting Shelves.............................................................197
4.11.4 Deleting a Card...............................................................197

4.12 Failure Cases ...............................................................................198

4.12.1 Causing Database Service Crash by Card Upgrade ........198

5 NE Management.........................................................................................199

5.1 NE Manager GUI ..........................................................................200

5.2 Configuring Local Services............................................................201

5.3 Viewing the ONU List ....................................................................201

5.4 Managing ONUs ...........................................................................204

5.4.1 Copying / Pasting Port Service Configurations.................204

5.4.2 Deauthorizing ONUs .......................................................204
5.4.3 Adding Users..................................................................205
5.4.4 Labeling ONUs ...............................................................207
5.4.5 Resetting ONUs..............................................................207
5.4.6 Adjusting ONU Service Types .........................................208
5.4.7 Replacing ONUs.............................................................208
5.4.8 Querying End-to-End Services ........................................209

5.5 Authorizing Cards .........................................................................210

5.6 Authorizing ONUs ......................................................................... 211

5.6.1 Configuring the ONU Whitelist......................................... 211

5.6.2 Managing ONU Authentication Modes.............................212
5.6.3 Managing PON Port Authentication Modes......................214
5.6.4 Replacing the ONU Logical Identifier ...............................215
5.6.5 Viewing the Authorized ONU Information.........................216
5.6.6 Detecting ONUs by PON Port Automatically ....................217

5.7 Synchronizing ONUs Manually......................................................218

5.8 Synchronizing ONU Port Description Manually ..............................218

5.9 Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port ............................................219

5.9.1 Viewing Rule Tasks.........................................................219

5.9.2 Creating Rule Tasks........................................................220
5.9.3 Executing Rule Tasks......................................................220

5.10 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs ......................................................221

 5.11 Manual ONU Authorization............................................................221

5.12 Modifying SVLANs / CVLANs in a Batch Manner ...........................222

5.13 OTDR Link Management ..............................................................223

5.14 System Maintenance ....................................................................225

5.14.1 Upgrading the System Software ......................................225

5.14.2 Backing Up the System Software ....................................226
5.14.3 Exporting a Configuration File .........................................227
5.14.4 Importing a Configuration File .........................................228
5.14.5 Comparing Configuration Files ........................................229
5.14.6 Upgrading an ONU .........................................................231

5.15 Operation and Maintenance Management .....................................232

5.16 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks .....................................232

5.16.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks...........................232

5.16.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task.......................234

5.17 Configuring NEs in Batches ..........................................................235

5.17.1 Calibrating Time in Batches.............................................235

5.17.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches ....................................236
5.17.3 Saving Configurations to Flash in Batches.......................238

6 Alarm Management ....................................................................................240

6.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................241

6.2 Setting Remote Notification of Alarms ...........................................245

6.2.1 Remote Notification Panorama of Alarms ........................245

6.2.2 Commissioning Alarm Notification by Emails ...................246
6.2.3 Commissioning Alarm Notification Through the GSM
Modem ...........................................................................248
6.2.4 Commissioning Message Notification Through the SMS
Gateway .........................................................................251
6.2.5 Setting the Alarm Notification Format ..............................254
6.2.6 Setting the Sending Delay of the Remote Alarm
Notification .....................................................................255
6.2.7 Setting Remote Notification Rules of the Alarm................256
6.2.8 Sending Remote Notification of Alarms ...........................258

6.3 Setting Alarm Rules ......................................................................259

6.3.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Rules....................................259

 6.3.2 Managing Alarm Shielding Rules.....................................262

6.4 Managing the Alarm Project Status ...............................................268

6.4.1 Managing Project Status Tasks .......................................268

6.4.2 Managing Project Status of NEs......................................270

6.5 Setting Alarm Related Parameters ................................................271

6.5.1 Setting the Audible Alarms ..............................................271

6.5.2 Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm...............................272
6.5.3 Setting the Alarm Color ...................................................273
6.5.4 Setting the Display Modes of New Alarms / Events ..........274
6.5.5 Setting Other Items of the Local Alarms...........................275
6.5.6 Setting the Definition of the Alarm History........................275
6.5.7 Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules..............276
6.5.8 Setting Automatic Alarm Synchronization ........................277
6.5.9 Converting Events to Alarms ...........................................278

6.6 Managing Alarm / Event Templates ...............................................279

6.6.1 Alarm Template...............................................................279

6.6.2 Event Template...............................................................285

6.7 Managing Alarm Configurations ....................................................287

6.7.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Templates .............................287

6.7.2 Binding Alarm Reporting Templates.................................288

6.8 Synchronizing Alarms ...................................................................289

6.8.1 Synchronizing Alarms Manually ......................................289

6.8.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches ....................................290

6.9 Monitoring Network Alarms ...........................................................291

6.9.1 Viewing Current Alarms ..................................................292

6.9.2 Viewing Alarm History .....................................................294
6.9.3 Viewing Related Alarms ..................................................297
6.9.4 Viewing Alarm Details .....................................................298
6.9.5 Viewing Alarm Logs ........................................................299
6.9.6 Viewing Alarm Log Statistics ...........................................302
6.9.7 Viewing Alarm Statistics..................................................304
6.9.8 Viewing Reported Alarms................................................306
6.9.9 Querying Reported Events ..............................................307

6.10 Handling Alarms ...........................................................................309

 6.10.1 Confirming Alarms ..........................................................309
6.10.2 Clearing Alarms Manually ............................................... 311
6.10.3 Confirming and Clearing Alarms...................................... 311
6.10.4 Clearing Alarms From the Device ....................................312
6.10.5 Disabling the Event-to-Alarm Conversion ........................312
6.10.6 Locating Alarms..............................................................313
6.10.7 Shielding Alarms.............................................................313
6.10.8 Modifying Alarm Levels ...................................................314
6.10.9 Editing Alarm Remarks ...................................................315
6.10.10Exporting the Alarm Information ......................................315
6.10.11Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience ...........................316
6.10.12Managing Maintenance Experience ................................317

6.11 Customizing Alarms......................................................................318

6.11.1 Customizing Alarm Names..............................................318

6.11.2 Re-Defining Alarm Names...............................................319
6.11.3 Customizing Alarm Levels...............................................320
6.11.4 Customizing Special Alarms............................................321

6.12 Managing the Alarm / Event Data ..................................................325

6.12.1 Setting the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving.......................326

6.12.2 Setting the Manual Alarm / Event Saving .........................328

6.13 Gathering Statistics of Device Failures ..........................................329

7 Performance Management..........................................................................331

7.1 Basic Concepts.............................................................................332

7.2 Setting Performance-related Parameters.......................................333

7.2.1 Setting Display of the Performance Value ........................333

7.2.2 Setting the Performance Collection Sever .......................334
7.2.3 Setting the PAS Saving ...................................................334

7.3 Managing Performance Query Templates......................................335

7.3.1 Viewing Performance Templates .....................................336

7.3.2 Creating a Performance Query Template.........................336
7.3.3 Modifying a Performance Query Template .......................340

7.4 Managing Performance Configurations .........................................340

7.4.1 Managing Performance Threshold Templates..................341

7.4.2 Binding Performance Threshold Templates .....................342
 7.5 Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a Batch
Manner.........................................................................................342

7.6 Monitoring Performance Data........................................................343

7.6.1 Viewing Current Performance .........................................344

7.6.2 Viewing Performance History ..........................................345
7.6.3 Viewing the Performance Comparison.............................346
7.6.4 Viewing Real-Time Performance .....................................347
7.6.5 Viewing the Performance History Trend...........................349

7.7 Managing Performance Collection.................................................350

7.7.1 Managing Performance Indicator Sets.............................351

7.7.2 Managing Performance Threshold Sets...........................353
7.7.3 Managing Performance Collection Tasks.........................356

7.8 Managing Performance Data ........................................................360

7.8.1 Analysis of PON traffic statistics ......................................361

7.8.2 Enabling / disabling FTP Report ......................................361
7.8.3 Top Ranking Statistics.....................................................363

7.9 Managing Statistics Export Tasks ..................................................364

7.9.1 Traffic Analysis Export Tasks...........................................364

7.9.2 TopN Traffic Ranking Export Tasks..................................365
7.9.3 15-Minute Performance Export Tasks..............................366
7.9.4 Export Tasks of Equipment Traffic and 15-Minute
Performance of Health Degree ........................................367
7.9.5 Optical Module Information Export Tasks.........................368

8 Log Management........................................................................................370

8.1 Log Management Policy................................................................371

8.2 Log Type ......................................................................................372

8.2.1 System Logs...................................................................372

8.2.2 Operation Logs ...............................................................373
8.2.3 Security Logs..................................................................374
8.2.4 Northbound Interface Command Logs .............................375

8.3 Log Statistics ................................................................................378

8.4 Managing System Logs ................................................................380

8.4.1 Managing System Log Templates....................................380

8.4.2 Querying System Logs....................................................381
 8.5 Managing Operation Logs .............................................................383

8.5.1 Managing Operation Log Templates ................................383

8.5.2 Querying Operation Logs ................................................385

8.6 Managing Security Logs................................................................388

8.6.1 Managing Security Log Templates...................................388

8.6.2 Querying Security Logs...................................................390

8.7 Managing Northbound Interface Command Logs...........................391

8.7.1 Managing TL1 Command Log Templates ........................392

8.7.2 Querying TL1 Command Logs ........................................393
8.7.3 Collecting Statistics of TL1 Command Logs.....................394
8.7.4 Managing Web Service Command Log Templates...........396
8.7.5 Querying Web Service Command Logs...........................398
8.7.6 Querying Web Service Command Logs...........................399
8.7.7 Querying Socket Operation Log Templates......................402
8.7.8 Querying Socket Operation Logs.....................................403
8.7.9 Managing Alarm List Log Templates................................404
8.7.10 Querying Alarm List Logs ................................................405

8.8 Managing Log Data.......................................................................407

8.8.1 Managing the Log Forwarding Server..............................407

8.8.2 Setting the Log Overflow Saving .....................................409
8.8.3 Setting the Manual Log Saving........................................ 411

9 Resource Statistics Management ................................................................413

9.1 Function Overview ........................................................................414

9.2 Setting the Resource Statistics Policy ...........................................423

9.2.1 Setting the Optical Power Statistical Policy / ONU Low

Optical Power Threshold.................................................423
9.2.2 Setting the Rate Limit Scheme for ONU Port Resource
Statistics.........................................................................425

9.3 Managing Statistics Templates ......................................................426

9.3.1 Background Information ..................................................426

9.3.2 Viewing Statistical Templates ..........................................427
9.3.3 Creating Statistical Templates .........................................428
9.3.4 Modifying Statistical Templates .......................................431
9.3.5 Deleting Statistical Templates..........................................432
 9.4 Querying Statistical Reports in Real Time......................................433

9.5 Exporting Statistical Reports at Specified Time ..............................436

9.6 Customizing Resource Statistics Reports ......................................442

9.7 OLT Resource Statistics Report ....................................................446

10 Resource Management...............................................................................449

10.1 Modifying Object Names in a Batch Manner ..................................450

10.1.1 Modifying Logical Domain Names in a Batch Manner ......450

10.1.2 Modifying NE Names in a Batch Manner .........................451
10.1.3 Modifying Port Names in a Batch Manner ........................453
10.1.4 Modifying ONU Names in a Batch Manner.......................454

10.2 Modifying ONU Names by Importing EXCEL .................................456

10.3 Importing the ODN NSM Information .............................................457

10.4 ONU Query Management .............................................................458

10.4.1 Querying ONUs ..............................................................458

10.4.2 Querying ONUs in a Batch Manner .................................459
10.4.3 Viewing the ONU List ......................................................461
10.4.4 ONU Query Example ......................................................464

10.5 Querying the MDU Phone Number ................................................465

10.6 Querying Cards By Serial Number.................................................466

10.7 Querying ONU RMS Error Information...........................................467

10.8 Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs ...................468

10.9 Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner ..........................................468

10.10 Configuring the Gateway Type ......................................................469

10.11 Checking the List of Registered ONUs ..........................................469

10.12 Unauthorized ONU List .................................................................473

10.13 Managing Customized Attributes...................................................474

11 Managing the Operation Maintenance .........................................................477

11.1 Using the Network Management Tool ............................................478

11.1.1 Basic Operations ............................................................478

11.1.2 Managing Processes ......................................................480
11.1.3 Managing Resources ......................................................482
11.1.4 Managing History Data....................................................483
 11.1.5 Managing Logs ...............................................................485
11.1.6 Setting Management Parameters ....................................486
11.1.7 Importing / Exporting the Configuration File .....................488

11.2 Managing Configuration Backup Tasks..........................................494

11.2.1 Managing Software Backup Tasks...................................494

11.2.2 Managing Configuration Export Tasks .............................496
11.2.3 Managing Card Software Backup Tasks ..........................499
11.2.4 Managing MAC Address Table Export Tasks ...................501

11.3 Managing Upgrade Tasks .............................................................504

11.3.1 Managing System Software Upgrade Tasks ....................504

11.3.2 Managing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks .............................506
11.3.3 Managing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks.................509
11.3.4 Managing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks ...................... 511

11.4 Managing Data Synchronization Tasks..........................................513

11.4.1 Managing Software / Hardware Version Upgrade Tasks...513

11.4.2 Managing Configuration Upload Tasks ............................513
11.4.3 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks .......................516
11.4.4 Managing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks .......................518

11.5 Managing Test Tasks ....................................................................520

11.5.1 Managing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks..521

11.5.2 Managing VOIP PING Tasks ...........................................523
11.5.3 Managing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks .............525

11.6 Managing Deployment Tasks ........................................................528

11.6.1 Managing Configuration Script Tasks ..............................528

11.7 Automatic Inspection.....................................................................530

11.7.1 Description of Inspection Items .......................................530

11.7.2 General Operation Flow ..................................................546
11.7.3 Managing Inspection Profiles ..........................................547
11.7.4 Managing Inspection Tasks .............................................549
11.7.5 Managing Inspection Results ..........................................551

11.8 PON Traffic Analysis .....................................................................553

11.9 Failure Isolation ............................................................................557

11.9.1 Managing Failure Detection Templates............................558

11.9.2 Performing Fault Detection..............................................560
 11.10 Managing Device Users ................................................................561

11.10.1Adding Device Users ......................................................562

11.10.2Modifying Device Users' Passwords................................563
11.10.3Deleting Device Users ....................................................564
11.10.4Enabling / Disabling Device Users...................................565
11.10.5Reading the Device User Information ..............................566

12 Application Scenarios .................................................................................568

12.1 Alarm Management ......................................................................569

12.2 Performance Management............................................................571

12.3 Guaranteeing Device Configuration...............................................573

Appendix A Abbreviations ..........................................................................575

1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

The following introduces the basic operations of the UNM2000, including the
following content:

Login and Logout

Viewing the UNM2000 Version

GUI Introduction

Setting UNM2000 System Parameters

Setting the Default Workspace

Viewing the Machine ID

Updating the License

Modifying the User Password

Locking the Terminal

Logging Out Users

Viewing the Message Platform

Managing the Toolbar

Version: A 1
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1.1 Login and Logout

1.1.1 Logging into the UNM2000 via Web Browser

The UNM2000 can be deployed in the B/S architecture. You can log into and
operate on the UNM2000 via Web browser.

Procedure

1. Enter http://IP:port number/unm2000 in the address bar of a browser. IP

refers to the IP address of the UNM2000 server. The port number is 80 by
default. The following login window appears.

Note:

Please use a Chrome browser of the 70.0 version or later.

2. Enter the username and password, and click Login to log into the Web client of
the UNM2000.

The Web client has the same GUI layout and functions as the ordinary client,
as shown below.

2 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.1.2 Login by Client

1.1.2.1 Logging into the UNM2000 Client

After logging into the UNM2000 client, you can perform configuration management
on the device through the GUI of the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

u You have logged into the system as an administrator.

u The services of the UNM2000 server are started.

u The communication between the client and server is normal (You can ping far-
end IP address to check whether the network communication is normal).

u The client IP address is included in the access control list (ACL) of the
UNM2000. For details about ACL, see Setting the Access Control List.

u You have been assigned with the valid user account and the password.

u The UNM2000 client is installed.

Version: A 3
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Double-click the shortcut icon on the desktop.

2. In the Server field of the Log into UNM2000 window, enter an IP address or
select a desired UNM2000 server IP address from the drop-down list.

The default port for logging into the server is 52001. If you want to modify the
port, refer to the following steps and set the Server filed.

1) Click , and in the displayed Server IP Management dialog box,

click Add.

2) In the highlighted row, enter IP Address, Port Number, and Host Name,
and click OK.

3. In the Log into UNM2000 dialog box, enter the valid username and password
and click OK.

Note:

After the UNM2000 is installed, the default login username admin and
password admin are provided. You need to change the password
immediately after logging into the UNM2000 to ensure the network
system security.

1.1.2.2 Logging Out of the UNM2000 Client

The following introduces how to log out of the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

The UNM2000 client is running normally.

Procedure

1. In the UNM2000 window, select System→Exit or click at the top right

corner of the UNM2000 window.

4 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

2. Click Yes in the displayed Confirm to Exit from the System alert box.

1.2 Viewing the UNM2000 Version

You can view the version information of the UNM2000 through the UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 client.

Procedure

1. Select Help→About UNM2000 from the main menu.

2. View the UNM2000 version in the displayed window.

1.3 GUI Introduction

Understanding the GUI of the UNM2000 client helps you quickly locate the access
methods of various operations and improves the operation efficiency.

1.3.1 System GUI

The main GUI of the UNM2000 consists of the object tree pane, toolbar and menu
bar, as shown in Figure 1-1.

Version: A 5
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

(1) Object tree pane (2) Toolbar (3) Menu bar

(4) Alarm statistical panel (5) Display pane (6) Status bar

Figure 1-1 UNM2000 System Main GUI

1.3.2 Shortcut Icons

The following introduces the shortcut icons commonly used in the UNM2000 GUI.

Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

Table 1-1 describes the default shortcut icons on the toolbar.

Table 1-1 Default Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar

Category Icon Name Description

Common Refresh Refreshes the current view.

functional
Searches for and locates a desired
area Search Object
object.

Alarm Prompt Tone Is Enables / disables the alarm sound

On prompt.
Alarm
The alarm sound Enables / disables the alarm sound
prompt is turned off prompt.

6 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 1-1 Default Shortcut Icons on the Toolbar (Continued)

Category Icon Name Description

Current Alarm Query Views the current alarms.

Alarm
Query Reported
Views the reported events.
Event
Perfor- Historical
Views the performance history.
mance Performance Query

NMS User Opens the NMS User Management

Management tab to manage the users.

Opens the Communication Routing

NE Communication
Management tab to manage the NE
Others Route Management
communication routes.
Opens the Parameter Settings
Parameter Settings dialog box to set the system
parameters.

Opens the Legend pane to view the

Legend Legend
system legend.

Dynamically displays the number of

critical alarms; Click this icon to open
Critical
the Current Alarm - All Objects -
Critical tab and view critical alarms.
Dynamically displays the number of
major alarms; Click this icon to open
Major
the Current Alarm - All Objects -
Major tab and view major alarms.

Dynamically displays the number of

Alarm minor alarms; Click this icon to open
Minor
Statistics the Current Alarm - All Objects -
Minor tab and view minor alarms.
Dynamically displays the number of
warning alarms; Click this icon to
Warning open the Current Alarm- All
Objects - Warning tab and view
warning alarms.

Opens the Alarm Statistics dialog

Display Alarm
box, which displays the statistics of
Statistics Window
all current alarms by default.

Version: A 7
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Common Shortcut Icons

Table 1-2 describes other common shortcut icons.

Table 1-2 Other Common Shortcut Icons

Icon Name Description

Searches for a desired object by entering a

Quick Search in
keyword. You can click to set the query
the Browse Tree
criteria.
Advanced
Searches for a desired object.
Search

Save Sorting Saves the object sorting in the browse tree.

Expand Expands the object tree.

Collapse Collapses the object tree.

Create Custom Creates a custom topology view to display only

View the focused objects.

Lock the View Locks the NE icons in the topology view.

Unlock the View Unlocks the NE icons in the topology view.

Create Link Creates a link between two NEs.

Moves the NE icons in the topology view when

Select
the view is unlocked.

Move Canvas Moves the topology view.

Bird-eye view Displays the aerial view of the topology.

Zoom in Zooms in the topology view.

Zoom out Zooms out the topology view.

Zoom to 100% Displays the topology view as its original size.

- Sets the display size of the topology view.

Save picture Saves the current topology as an image.

Save Saves the modified topology.

8 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Table 1-2 Other Common Shortcut Icons (Continued)

Icon Name Description

Displays different topological layers, such as

Topo Layer core layer, convergence layer and access
layer.

Last View Returns to the view or subnet opened just now.

Browses the view or subnet displayed before

Next View
clicking .

Parent View Returns to the upper level of the current view.

Select Different Quickly selects the view or subnet opened

View before.
Scroll
Scrolls to open the left / right window when
Documents
multiple windows are opened.
Left/Right

Quickly selects and opens a certain window

Show Opened
from the list when multiple windows are
Documents List
opened.

Maximizes a certain window and hides the

Maximize
other windows when multiple windows are
Window
opened.

Displays hidden windows when multiple

Restore Window windows are opened. It is a reverse process of
window maximization.

1.3.3 Common Shortcut Keys

Table 1-3 describes the common shortcut keys in the UNM2000.

Table 1-3 Common Shortcut Keys

Shortcut Key Description

F1 Opens the Help.

F5 Refreshes the current view.

Alt+Shift+Enter Selects / Cancels the full-screen mode.
Opens the Search Object dialog box to search for NEs, logical
Ctrl+E
domains or cards.
Ctrl+F Searches for ONUs.

Version: A 9
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 1-3 Common Shortcut Keys (Continued)

Shortcut Key Description

Ctrl+M Views the current alarms.

Ctrl+H Views the alarm history.

Ctrl+P Views the performance history.

Opens the Global Template Management tab to manage global

Ctrl+G
templates and configurations.

Alt+S Opens the System main menu.

Alt+V Opens the View main menu.

Alt+E Opens the Resource main menu.

Alt+G Opens the Configure main menu.

Alt+A Opens the Alarm main menu.

Alt+P Opens the Performance main menu.

Alt+D Opens the Advance main menu.

Alt+U Opens the Security main menu.

Alt+W Opens the Window main menu.

Alt+H Opens the Help main menu.

Ctrl+W Closes the current window.

Shift+Escape Maximizes / restores the current window.

Alt+Shift+D Opens the tab in the current or new window.

Ctrl+Shift+W Closes all tabs except the Main Topology tab.

1.4 Setting UNM2000 System Parameters

The UNM2000 system parameters include the browse tree display mode, time
mode, topology display, ping parameters, Telnet proxy server, GUI display, font
settings, personalized switch settings, default page opening settings and NE
manager settings. The following introduces how to set and use these parameters.

1.4.1 Setting Display of the Browse Tree

The Viewing Tree Setting dialog box is used for setting the display of the main
topology. You can set the icon size, border pixels, and border height as well as the
space between the border and the text.

10 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Viewing Tree Setting in the left

pane to open the Viewing Tree Setting dialog box.

3. Set various parameters as required. You can preview the display style via the
example text during setting.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

1.4.2 Setting the Topology Display

The UNM2000 allows you to set the background display of the main topology. You
can set the display style as required.

Version: A 11
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Topology Setting in the left pane

to open the Topology Setting dialog box.

3. Set the background display mode of the main topology.

4 Select Image Mode and then click Apply→OK to set the background of
the main topology to image mode.

In the image mode, right-click in the blank area of the physical topology
view and select Set Background Image or Use the Default Background
Image from the shortcut menu to set the background image of the physical
topology view.

4 Select Map Mode to set the background of the main topology to map
mode.

a) In the gis map url text box, enter the address of the network map or
the map package in the local EMS.

12 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Note:

The address entered in the gis map url text box should meet the
following requirements:
u For the network map, the address must be the URL of the GIS online
map database.

u For the map package in the local EMS, the address should be that of
the downloaded map folder in the local EMS.

b) Set to show the latitude and longitude lines or prompt the latitude and
longitude by selecting the corresponding check box.

c) Click Apply→OK.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

1.4.3 Setting the Font

You can set the font, size and style of the UNM2000 GUI by Font Setting.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface SettingFont Setting in the left pane to open

the dialog box.

3. Set various parameters as required. You can preview the font during setting.

Version: A 13
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore the system default font to restore the parameters to the default
values.

1.4.4 Setting the Skin

You can set the GUI skin of the UNM2000 client according to your preferences.

Background Information

The UNM2000 client provides the green and gray skins. After a skin color is
selected, the setting takes effect upon the next startup of the client.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Choose Local Settings→Interface Setting→Skin in the left pane to open the

Skin dialog box.

3. Select a skin color from the drop-down list.

14 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

4. Click OK to complete the settings.

Subsequent Operation

Restart the UNM2000 client to validate the skin settings.

1.4.5 Setting the GUI Display

You can customize the display mode of the tables, alarms, performance and events
on the GUI, and set whether to lock the GUI automatically.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Setting→Display in the left pane to open

the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

Version: A 15
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1.4.6 Setting the NE Manager

The UNM2000 client supports setting the quantity of opened NE manager windows
and supports enabling NE manager closing prompt to facilitate the utilization.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client. After logging into the server from
the current client, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Interface Settings→NE Manager Settings in the left

pane to open the NE Manager Settings dialog box.

3. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect
immediately.

Other Operation

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

1.4.7 Setting Ping Parameters

You can set the UNM2000 to continuously ping the NE or transfer the ping packet
via the server so as to confirm whether the communication between the UNM2000
and the NE is normal.

16 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Background Information

u When Consecutive Ping is not selected, the EMS executes the Ping
command at most four times.

u When the client cannot ping the NEs, you can select Forward Ping Packet via
the Server to determine whether the communication between the EMS and
NEs is normal.

u After the Ping parameters of the client are set, the settings take effect
immediately.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Param Settings→Ping Parameter Config in the left

pane to open the Ping Parameter Config dialog box.

3. Set the Ping parameters as required and click Apply. The settings take effect
immediately.

4 If Consecutive Ping is selected, the EMS will send the Ping commands
consecutively to the object after you right-click an object and select Ping
from the shortcut menu.

4 If Forward Ping Packet via the Server is selected, the Ping commands
will be forwarded by the server.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

Version: A 17
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1.4.8 Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server

After setting the parameters related to the Telnet / SSH proxy server, you can use
the proxy server to access the device.

Background Information

The settings of the Telnet / SSH proxy server take effect immediately.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Param Setting→Telnet/SSH Proxy Server to open

the dialog box.

3. Select Enable Telnet/SSH Proxy Server, set the information of the proxy
server according to the actual situation and click Apply. The settings take effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

1.4.9 Setting the Default Opening Page for NE Manager

You can customize the default opening page of the NE manager as desired.

18 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→Default Page Open Setting in the

left pane to open the Default Page Open Setting dialog box.

3. Set the default opening page of the NE manager.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default system configuration.

1.4.10 Setting the Personalization Switch

You can set the personalization switch to top the vendor information in the ONU list.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into the
server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

Version: A 19
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→Personal Style Setting in the left

pane to open the Personal Style Setting dialog box.

3. Select ONU vendor info show setting and click Apply. The setting takes
effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.11 Setting Display of the Performance Value

You can set the unit of the performance value to Bit or Byte by setting display of the
performance value.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→PM Show Unit Setting in the left

pane to open the PM Show Unit Setting dialog box.

20 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

3. Select the unit of the performance value and click Apply. The settings take
effect immediately.

Note:

It is recommended to use the default setting: Show Bit by Byte.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.12 Setting the Time Mode

You can set the time mode of the client end. The UNM2000 displays the time in the
configured time mode (UTC or local time).

Background Information

u UTC time indicates the coordinated universal time.

u This setting takes effect immediately for the current client end. After logging into
the server from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Note:

It is recommended that the client time should be consistent with the

server time to avoid data reporting errors at both ends.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Other Setting→Time Mode in the left pane to open

the Time Mode dialog box.

Version: A 21
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the time display mode of the client end as required. Then click Apply to
apply the settings.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.13 Setting the XFTP Server

You can set the XFTP server and related parameters to implement the data
transmission between the UNM2000 client and the server end.

Background Information

The XFTP server is used in NE software management. The UNM2000 server and
client transmit files (including NE software package and NE configuration data) by
the FTP port.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Configuring the XFTP Server

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→XFTP Server Setting in the left pane to open

the XFTP Server Setting tab.

22 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

3. Click Add to add a blank row in the window. Then set the XFTP server
parameters according to the following table.

Parameter Description

Host Name Name of the host running the XFTP server, which can be customized.

Host IP IP address of the host running the XFTP server.

Click the Protocol Type drop-down menu and select FTP (default),
Protocol name
SFTP or TFTP.
Username User name for logging into the XFTP server.

Password Password for logging into the XFTP server.

Port Number Port number for logging into the XFTP server. It is 21 by default.

Path for saving files on the XFTP server.

The XFTP path is described below:
Path u "/" indicates the root directory; "√" indicates the current directory.
u The path cannot contain drive (for example D:) and illegal
characters (?>|"*:).

4. After completing the settings, click Apply. The added XFTP server appears in
the window.

5. Select the new XFTP server and click Test XFTP. If the prompt XFTP server
connection succeeded appears, the XFTP server can be connected.

Version: A 23
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Configuring an FTP User

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→XFTP Server Setting in the left pane to view

the preset XFTP server.

3. Select FTP User Management to view the FTP user information already set.

4. Click Add to add a blank row in the window and set the FTP user parameters.

5. Enter the information of the new FTP user according to the following table.
Parameter Description

Required. It is a string of 1 to 32 characters, which supports ASCII

User Name codes ranging from 0x21 to 0x7e.
You can add up to 50 FTP users (username and password).

Required. It is a string of 1 to 32 characters, which supports the ASCII

Password code of 0x21-0x7e.
You can add up to 50 FTP users (username and password).

Required. It is a string of 1 to 32 characters, which supports the ASCII

Confirm Password
code of 0x21-0x7e.
Required. It is a string of 10 to 28 characters, which can only contains
letters, numbers and special characters such as ":", "/" and "\".
User Path If a user path entered does not exist in the UNM2000, the UNM2000
will automatically configure the user path to "$UNM_
ROOT/unmftproot".

6. Click OK, and the system displays an alert box prompting Will update FTP
server, continue?. Click Yes.

24 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Other Operations

Select an XFTP server no longer needed and click Delete to delete it.

To modify or delete an FTP user, do as follows:

u To modify an FTP user, click Modify.

Note:

If you want to modify the user path, first disconnect the FTP server and
log in again; otherwise, the changes will not take effect.

u To delete an FTP user, click Delete.

1.4.14 Configuring Automatic Link Setup Between PON NEs

On the UNM2000 client, you can configure automatic link setup between OLTs, and
view the states of physical connections between OLTs in the main topology.

Background

This setting takes effect immediately for the current client. After logging into the
server from the current client, all users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane of the dialog box, select Topo Setting→PON NE Auto Link to
open the PON NE Auto Link window.

3. Select Enable automatic discovery of pon ne physical link. In the drop-

down list of Refresh Time, select a refresh interval at which physical links are
automatically discovered and updated in the main topology.

Version: A 25
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click Apply, and the settings will take effect.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.15 Setting Export Files

You can set the volume size of the export file and export the file by volumes when
the file is too large.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Service Configuration→File Export Setting in the left pane to open

the File Export Setting dialog box.

3. Select the Enable check box.

26 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

4. Select the volume size from the drop-down list and click Apply. The settings
take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.16 Limiting the Number of ONUs Connected to the PON

Port

The UNM2000 supports limiting the number of ONUs connected to the PON port. If
the number of ONUs reaches the upper limit, no more ONUs can be added.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Service Configuration→Limit the number of ONU

under the PON port to open the Limit the number of ONU under the PON
port pane.

3. Click Create to open the Create the number of ONU settings under the PON
port dialog box.

Version: A 27
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Set the maximum number of ONUs connected to the PON port globally or by
the PON port type, and click OK.

Note:

u The maximum number of ONUs connected to the PON port ranges

from 1 to 64.

u If different limits are set on both types, the smaller limit will prevail.

Other Operations

u Select an entry and click Edit to open the Edit the number of ONU settings
under the PON port dialog box. Then edit the limit and click OK.

u Select an entry and click Delete to delete it.

u Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

1.4.17 Setting the License Expiration Prompt

The UNM2000 supports license expiration prompt, prompting you to update the
license in time.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select License Setting→License Expired Tip Setting in the left pane.

3. Set The remaining days of the license according to the system reference
value and click Apply.

Related Operation

Updating the License

28 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

1.5 Setting the Default Workspace

When using the UNM2000 for the first time, you need to set up a workspace
directory for storing the temporary resource files required by the system.

Note:
This directory must be readable and writable with a hard disk space no
smaller than 512M.

Procedure

1. Select System→Default Work Section Settings from the main menu to open
the Default Work Space Config dialog box.

2. Click Select, select the folder where the workspace locates, and then click
Open.

3. Click OK to complete the settings.

1.6 Viewing the Machine ID

You need to obtain the machine ID when applying for the license.

Background Information

The machine ID refers to the serial number of a device. It is a character string that
uniquely identifies a device and ensures that the license is granted to the
designated device.

Version: A 29
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Help→License Management from the main menu to display the

License Management dialog box.

2. Click Machine ID.

1.7 Updating the License

The UNM2000 License file is used for controlling the functions and management
capability of the UNM2000. If the License file is unavailable, you cannot log into the
UNM2000 client.

Prerequisite

u Log into the UNM2000 as an administrator.

u The UNM2000 License file has been obtained.

30 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

Background Information

u License: It is a way of software selling. A license is a permission to obtain the

corresponding authority and license authorization certificate. By obtaining the
license, you obtain the authority to use the software.

u License file: Indicates the license file that controls the features of the software
version. This file is generated based on the contract, encrypted by a special
encryption tool and released electronically or by paper.

Precautions

When updating the license through the Web client, do not drag the license file to the
upload / download alert box.

Procedure

1. Back up the original License.

Create a "backup" folder in the D:\unm2000\platform\etc\license directory

and copy the original license file unm2000_license.lic to this folder.

2. Select Help→License Management in the main menu.

3. In the displayed License Management dialog box, click Update the License.

4. In the Open dialog box, select a corresponding license file and click Open.

5. In the license Comparison dialog box, check the control items of the original
and new license files and then click Confirm to Update License.

6. Click OK in the Message alert box.

7. Click Close in the License Management dialog box.

1.8 Modifying the User Password

To ensure the access security of the UNM2000, it is recommended to modify your

password regularly.

Procedure

1. Select System→Modify Password from the main menu.

Version: A 31
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. In the displayed Modify Password dialog box, enter Old Password, New
Password and Confirm Password.

Note:

The new password must comply with the set password policies. For
setting the password policies, see Setting the Password Policy.

3. Click OK.

1.9 Locking the Terminal

If the UNM2000 client is idle, you can lock the client upon leaving to prevent
unauthorized operations.

Procedure

1. Follow the steps below to lock the client.

4 Lock the terminal manually.

Select System→Lock the Terminal from the main menu, and the The
window is locked dialog box appears.

4 Lock the terminal automatically.

Enable the automatic terminal lock according to Setting the GUI Display. If
no operation is performed after the preset time period, the terminal will be
locked automatically.

1.10 Logging Out Users

Different EMS users have different operation authority. You can log out from the
EMS and then log in as another user to perform different operations.

Procedure

1. Select System→Logout from the main menu.

2. Click OK in the displayed alert box.

32 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

3. In the displayed UNM2000 Login dialog box, enter the corresponding

username and password, and click Login.

1.11 Viewing the Message Platform

You can view the message platform to understand the information prompting the
influence on the UNM2000 running status and the operation return information.

Procedure

1. Select View→Message Platform from the main menu to open the Message
Platform pane.

2. View the prompts or operation return information in the Message Platform

pane at the lower part of the window.

3. In the Message Platform pane, right-click to display a shortcut menu.

4 Select Message Classification to classify messages on the message

platform.

4 Select Lock to lock a selected message.

4 Select Copy to copy a selected message.

4 Select Clear All to clear all messages.

Version: A 33
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Refer to the following table to perform other operations on the message platform.

Button Execution Result

Minimize Message Platform. After you select Dock Window for Message
Platform, the button becomes available.

Close Message Platform.

1.12 Managing the Toolbar

You can set the tools to be displayed on the toolbar and the shortcut button of each
tool, so as to improve the operation efficiency.

Procedure

1. Select View→Toolbars from the main menu.

2. In the Toolbar box, click the functional blocks to be displayed in the main
topology GUI.

3. The "√" icon is shown on the left side of the selected functional block in the
Toolbar box. The selected functional blocks are also displayed on the toolbar in
the main view.

Other Operations

1. Select Customize to open the Customize Toolbars dialog box.

2. Click New Toolbar, enter the new functional block name in the New Toolbar
dialog box, and click OK.

3. Drag a desired item from the available tool area into the toolbar to add the
corresponding shortcut icon, or drag a shortcut icon out of the toolbar to delete
it.

4. After completing the setting, click Close.

34 Version: A
 1 Basic Operations of the UNM2000

The example below illustrates creating the Topology functional block on the
toolbar. In the Customize Toolbars dialog box, you need to drag the Create
Custom View shortcut icon into the Topology functional block.

Version: A 35
2 Security Management

Security management aims to prevent unauthorized users from logging in to the

network and ensure the network data security. Security management includes a
series of security policies such as user security policy management, user authority
management, and network management user management.

Overview of the UNM2000 User Security

User Security Policy Management

Authority Management

Initial User Authorization

Migrating Operation Sets

Adjusting Users' Authority

Querying Authority

Authorization Operation FAQs

Authorization Examples

User Security Management

36 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2.1 Overview of the UNM2000 User Security

The security management of UNM2000 users mainly includes the management of

the account policy, password policy, authority and access control as well as the user
session monitoring.

Security Management Entity

Concept Description

Indicates the objects that can be operated only by the users authorized by the
Security Object "Security Admin Group" users. Only these objects are the managed objects of the
UNM2000, for example, devices, object sets and logical domains.

Indicates the scope of the security objects (including devices, object sets and
logical domains) that can be managed by the users or user groups. The
Management Domain management domain that takes effect finally is the union of the selected devices,
object sets and global logical domains. The user can only operate the security
objects within the corresponding management domain.

Indicates the authority of performing an operation by a user. If the operation

authority is assigned for a user, this user can perform this operation. The operation
Operation Authority authority and management domain are related. You can only perform the
operations corresponding to the operation authority on the NEs in the associated
management domain.

Indicates a set of multiple managed objects. Adding managed objects into object
sets is convenient for allocating NE management authority. If a user (or a user
group) is assigned with the operation authority specific to an object set, the user (or
user group) has the same authority to perform operations on all the objects in the
Object Set object set, without the need to set the management authority for these objects
respectively. You can create object sets according to geographical areas, network
layers and device types.
The default object set Assembly of Objects of the UNM2000 includes all object
managed by the UNM2000. It cannot be modified or deleted.

Indicates a set of multiple operations. Adding operations into operation sets is

convenient for managing users' operation authority. If a user (or a user group) is
assigned with the operation authority specific to an operation set, the user (or user
group) has the same authority to perform all the operations defined in the operation
set, implementing fast authority assignment. You can create operation sets if the
Operation Set default operation sets do not meet the requirements for authority assignment.
The UNM2000 provides the assembly of operations of the NMS Application type,
which cannot be deleted or modified.
u Assembly of Application Operations: Includes all UNM2000 operations except
the security application.
u Assembly of Object Operations: Includes all device operations.

Version: A 37
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Concept Description

The client is one of service attributes and identifies the service user. The client in
network management refers to an assembly of operators who concern specific
services or an assembly of operation and maintenance persons who concern
Client
services in a specific area or of a specific type. For example, a team of persons
who are responsible for service maintenance for an operator can be considered as
a client in an abstract manner.
Indicates a person who uses the UNM2000 client. The uniqueness of the user
name and password determine the operation and management authority of a user.
After a user is added to a user group, the user has the operation rights of that user
group. One user can be added to multiple user groups, and therefore the authority
User of the user is the union of all of those user groups plus the user’s own authority.
The UNM2000 provides a default user named admin, which is the system
administrator. The admin user belongs to the Administrators group and Security
Admin group by default. You cannot modify the authority of admin or add it to other
user groups either.

Indicates a set of network management users who have the same management
authority. By creating a user group on the UNM2000, you can manage a batch of
users with the same authority. This function helps you manage user authority in a
batch manner and thus reduce the management cost.
Default user groups provided by the UNM2000 include administrator group, security
User Group
administrator group, inspector group, operator group, and maintainer group. Except
for the default user group, the UNM2000 supports creation of other user groups and
can assign management domains and operation authority to these user groups.
New user groups include Ordinary User Group and Subdomain Security
Administrator Group.

This group has the only member “Administrators”, and this type of user group
cannot be created. The "Administrators" group has the management domains of all
Administrators
objects in the entire network and all the operation authority except the security
Group
management authority. Its management domains and operation authority cannot be
modified.
This group has the only member “Security Administrator” and this type of user
User Group group cannot be created. The Security Administrator Group has the management
Type domains of all objects in the entire network and security management authority,
Security including: managing users/user groups, managing user accounts and passwords,
Administrator managing user login, and managing user operation sets/object sets/access control
Group lists.
A user in the Security Administrator Group is known as the UNM2000 security
administrator. The security administrator can manage all users except for user
admin and other security administrators.

38 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Concept Description

The Subdomain Security Administrator Group, created by the security administrator

and with its management domain assigned by the security administrator, only has
Subdomain the security management authority, which cannot be modified.
Security Note: In case the network managed by the UNM2000 is large with a relatively high
Administrator quantity of network objects, the security administrator can divide the entire network
Group into several subdomains and specify a subdomain security administrator for each
subdomain. The subdomain security administrator can create users and assign
authority for the users in this subdomain.

The Ordinary User Group is created by the security administrator (user in the
Security Administrator Group) or subdomain security administrator (user in the
Subdomain Security Administrator Group). The management domain and operation
Ordinary User
authority of the users in this group are assigned by the security administrator or
Group
subdomain security administrator (When a subdomain security administrator
assigns authority to other users, he cannot assign authority of Administrators group
or Security Administrator Group).

In addition to the "Administrators" Group and Security Administrator Group, the

UNM2000 also provides three default user groups: Inspector Group, Operator
Group, and Maintainer Group. These user groups are ordinary user groups with the
management domain being the assembly of objects. The operation authority is as
follows:
u Inspector Group: By default, it has the operation authority of the Assembly of
Application Inspectors and Network Inspector Set. The member in this
group can only view, query, count, and export data rather than configure or
create data.
Other Default u Operator Group: By default, it has the operation authority of the Assembly of
User Groups Application Operators and Network Operator Set. The member in this group
not only has the operation authority of the inspector group, but also can
configure, create and delete data, for example, creating NEs, deleting cards,
and reading / writing port configurations.
u Maintainer Group: By default, it has the operation authority of the Assembly of
Application Maintainers and Network Maintainer Set. The member in this
group not only has the authority of inspector group and operator group, but
also can configure and download the EMS and device function related data, for
example, setting scheduled tasks, activating or deleting services and resetting
the card.

Version: A 39
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Authorization and Domain Division

The authority and domain division function of the UNM2000 is implemented by

dividing management domains and operation authority. With the authority division
(operation authority) management function, you can divide the UNM2000 authority
into different functional domains, and with the domain division (management domain)
management function, you can divide NEs into different network domains.
Assigning the users with the authority combination of different functional domains
and network domains effectively controls user management authority.

With the authorization and domain division, you can implement the following:

u Managers with different responsibilities (or posts / O&M departments) in the

same domain have different available operation privileges.

u Managers with different responsibilities (or posts / O&M departments) in

different domains have different manageable objects and different available
operation privileges.

The authorization mode supported by the UNM2000 is flexible. The following two
modes are recommended to authorize users:

u Add a user into the default user group: This user has the authority of the user
group, which is applicable to the common operation and maintenance scenario.

u Add a user into a new user group: When the authority of the default user group
does not meet the requirement for the new user, you can create a user group
and assign the appropriate authority for it to implement authorization and
domain division management.

Note:

u You can also bind a user with a user group for authorization.
Authorizing the user group can conveniently authorize all the users
in this group (at the same position).

u You are not advised to adapt the default user group's authority for
user authentication.

40 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Account Policy and Password Policy

Concept Description

The account policy specifies the minimum length of the username and the security
Account Policy policy for user login, locking and unlocking. The account policy enhances the
security of the accounts.

The password policy specifies the complexity, update period and length limit of the
Password Policy password. The password policy requires users to set passwords not too simple and
modify their passwords regularly.

Client Access Control

Concept Description

In this mode, only one admin user can log into the UNM2000
through the client, and all other users are forced to log out. This
Setting the user login Single-User Mode
login mode is commonly used for the admin user to assign authority,
mode
which prevents interference caused by other user's operations.

Multi-User Mode Multiple users can log into the system simultaneously.

The address access control is a secure access control mechanism,

allowing users to log into the UNM2000 only from the specified IP
address (client). The UNM2000 provides the following two ways of
address access control:
u System Address Access Control
It is specific to the whole UNM2000 system. By setting the
system access control list, you can have the users log in to the
Address Access Control
UNM2000 server only from the client on the specified IP
network segment.
u User Address Access Control
It is specific to a certain user. By setting the user access control
list, you can have the corresponding user log in to the
UNM2000 server only from the client on the specified IP
network segment.

When the number of online users exceeds the upper limit

Force Idle Client to Get Offline prescribed by the license and the client idle time exceeds the preset
threshold, the server will force the idle client to get offline.

To ensure secure running of the network, you can lock the client if
Locking the Client you do not operate the UNM2000 client for a long time. After the
client is locked, the UNM2000 still runs normally.

Version: A 41
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Monitoring Users

User monitoring indicates monitoring the resource access activities of users,

including session monitoring and operation monitoring.

u Session monitoring: The session monitoring enables you to view the basic
information (including the username, IP address, port number, online time and
user type) of the system online users.

u Operation monitoring: By viewing the operation logs, you can view the users'
operation object, time and specific operation.

The users with the same authority as the security administrator can force other
users to log out so as to prevent illegal and insecure operations and ensure system
security.

2.2 User Security Policy Management

User security policies are access control rules defined for managing users. During
initial installation, you need to plan and configure necessary security policies and
then adjust the policies according to management requirements.

The UNM2000 supports multiple security policies such as user login mode, access
control list, account policy, and password policy, to improve the security of the
UNM2000 and prevent unauthorized operations.

2.2.1 Setting the User Login Mode

The UNM2000 supports the single-user login mode and multi-user login mode.
Typically, the UNM2000 runs in the multi-user mode. When maintaining the
UNM2000 server (for example, adjusting the user authority), you can set the
UNM2000 to the single-user login mode to avoid operation interference caused by
other users.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

42 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Background Information

u Single-user mode: In this mode, only one admin user can log into the UNM2000
via the client end, and all other online users are forced to exit.

u Multiple-user mode: In this mode, multiple users are allowed to log in

simultaneously. This mode is used for monitoring the network routinely.

Note:

When the UNM2000 is switched to the single-user mode, only one admin
user can log into the UNM2000 via the client end, and all other online
users will be forced to exit. To ensure that other users use the UNM2000
normally, switch the UNM2000 to the multi-user login mode after
completing the maintenance in single-user mode.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→User Login Mode in the left pane to open the
User Login Mode pane.

3. Select Single User Mode or Multi-user Mode and click Apply to apply the
selected mode to the current UNM2000.

2.2.2 Setting the Access Control List

The access control list is classified into system access control list and user access
control list.

2.2.2.1 Setting the System Access Control List

You can set the system access control list so that the UNM2000 users can only log
into the server from the client on the specified IP segment. The system access
control list is applicable to all users.

Version: A 43
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Background Information

u By setting the access control list, you can have the UNM2000 users log in to
the UNM2000 server from only the client on the specified IP network segment.

u The access control list of the user is a subset of the system access control list
and is effective only to the user.

Note:

u When the computer running the client has multiple network cards,
add the IP addresses of all the network cards to the access control
list.

u When the network in which the client is running includes the intranet
and extranet, add the intranet and extranet IP addresses to the
access control list.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select User Security Strategy→Access Control List to open
the Access Control List pane.

3. Click Add, Modify or Delete to add, modify or delete the data in the list, and
then click Apply to apply the settings.

44 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Setting System ACL Operation

1. Click Add in the Access Control List pane.

Adding the system access control
2. Enter the start and end IP addresses in the Set IP Address Range dialog
list
box, and click OK.
1. Select an IP address range in the Access Control List pane, and click
Editing the system access control Edit.
list 2. Edit the start and end IP addresses in the Set IP Address Range dialog
box, and click OK.
Deleting the system access control
Select an IP address range in the Access Control List pane, and click Delete.
list

2.2.2.2 Setting the Access Control List of the User

The administrator can set the access control list of a user, so that the user can log in
to the server through a client only on the specified IP network segment.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Background Information

u By setting the access control list, you can have the UNM2000 users log in to
the UNM2000 server from only the client on the specified IP network segment.

u The access control list of the user is a subset of the system access control list
and is effective only to the user.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to open the
NMS User Management tab.

2. Expand User in the left pane of the NMS User Management tab, and select a
desired user.

3. Select Access Control List in the right pane of the NMS User Management
tab. Set the policies by referring to the table below.

Version: A 45
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Option Operation Setting Result

If you select this policy, the access

Use All Access Control Select Use All Access Control Lists in the
control list of the user is consistent
Lists in the System System and click Apply.
with the system access control list.

1. Select Use the Following Specified

By setting the access control list, the
Use the Following Access Control List.
user can log in to the UNM2000
Specified Access Control 2. Click Add, Modify, or Delete to set an IP
server from only the client on the
List network segment for the user.
specified IP network segment.
3. Click Apply.

2.2.3 Setting the Account Policy

You can set the minimum length of the username and user login / unlocking policies
to enhance the access security of the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

Background Information

u After installing the UNM2000 for the first time, it is recommended that you set
the account policy immediately and then adjust it as required during
maintenance.

u The new account policy will not be applied to the accounts already set.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→Account Policy in the left pane to open the
Account Policy pane.

46 Version: A
 2 Security Management

3. Set the parameters related to the account policy according to Table 2-1.

Table 2-1 Account Policy Parameters

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 1 - 32.
Default value: 6
Indicates the minimum Principle: The larger the
Minimum Length of Username
length of the username. value, the more secure the
password. The
recommended value is 6.
Value range: 1 - 1440.
Default value: 30
Principle: The greater the
value, the more secure the
account. The recommended
Indicates the time after
value is 30 regarding
Auto Unlock Time (minutes) which the user account will
account security and
be automatically unlocked.
restoration.
If Permanent Lock is
selected, the locked user will
not be automatically
unlocked.

Version: A 47
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-1 Account Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 0 - 9999.
Default value: 3
Indicates the time you need Principle: The greater the
Login or Unlock Failure Delay to wait when you log into the value, the more secure the
Time (Second) system again after the login account. To avoid
or unlocking fails. successive illegal login or
unlocking, the recommended
value is 10.
Indicates the number of
successive login attempts Value range: 1 - 99.
allowed for the accounts Default value: 3
Illegal User
created in the UNM2000. If it Principle: The smaller the
Login X Lock
reaches the preset value, value is, the more secure it
after
Lock the the UNM2000 will is. The recommended value
User automatically lock the is 3.
corresponding account.

You can select or deselect it.

Never Lock The UNM2000 will never It is deselected by default.
Super User lock the admin user. Principle: It is recommended
to deselect this check box.

48 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-1 Account Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

When this policy is enabled,
a non-admin user account Options include:
will be deleted or suspended u Disabled or Delete
if the period for u 1 to 1000
discontinuous login reaches Default value:
Unlogged User Policy the specified value. If the u Disabled
account is suspended, u 60
contact the admin to enable Principle: The recommended
it again. values are Disabled and 60
If the policy is not enabled, and the unit is Day.
this parameter is greyed out.

With this policy enabled, the

server will force the idle
Value range: 1 - 100.
client to get offline if the
Default value: 1
client idle duration exceeds
Principle: To avoid that the
the preset limit and the
Force Idle Client Offline idle client occupies
number of online users
resources, the
exceeds the upper limit
recommended value is 1
prescribed by the license.
with the unit minute.
If the policy is not enabled,
this parameter is greyed out.

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations. The account policy immediately restores to

the default configurations, and the configuration immediately takes effect.

2.2.4 Setting the Password Policy

Setting the complexity of the password reasonably and modifying the password
regularly can improve the access security of the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

Version: A 49
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

u The password policy must be configured upon initial phase of the site building
and can be adjusted accordingly during maintenance.

u The new password policy has no effect on the passwords already set.

u The password policy includes the complexity, updating period and length limit.

u The new password policy is applicable to all new users of the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select User Security Strategy→Password Policy in the left pane to open the
Password Policy pane.

3. Set the common policy and advanced policy according to Table 2-2 and
Table 2-3.

50 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-2 Common Policy Parameters

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 6 - 16.
Minimum Length of Minimum length of the
Default value: 8
Ordinary User password set for all ordinary
Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
Password users except for user admin
The recommended value is 8 for memorability and security.

Value range: 6 - 16.

Minimum Password
Indicates the minimum length Default value: 8
Length of Super
of the admin's password. Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
User
The recommended value is 8 for memorability and security.

Value range: 6 - 16.

Indicates the maximum
Maximum Default value: 16
length of all users'
Password Length Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
passwords.
The recommended value is 16.
Within this interval, a new The value box is greyed out, and the
Select
password must not be the password policy is not constrained by this
Unlimited.
same as a history password. parameter.
Interval for setting a
For example, if a new
password that must
password is set on January Value range: 1 - 12.
be different from a
01, 2016 and this interval is Default value: 1
history password Deselect
set to 12, passwords used Principle: The larger the value, the more
(month) Unlimited.
between January 01, 2015 secure the password. The recommended
and December 31, 2015 value is 12.
cannot be used again.

Non-admin users must

Maximum Days for change passwords after the The value box is greyed out, and the
Select
Using the specified days. Otherwise, password policy is not constrained by this
Unlimited.
Password the users cannot log into the parameter.
UNM2000.

Version: A 51
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-2 Common Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 1 - 999.
Default value: 180
Principle:
u Select Unlimited on right of
Minimum Password Used Days.
The value of Maximum Password
Used Days must be greater than that
of Number of Days before
Deselect Password Expiration to Display a
Unlimited. Reminder.
u If you deselect Unlimited at the right
of Minimum Days for Using the
Password, the value of Maximum
Days for Using the Password must
be larger than or equal to the sum of
Minimum Days for Using the
Password and Notification Days
Before Password Expiration.

The value box is greyed out, and the

Indicates the shortest time Select
password policy is not constrained by this
before a non-admin user Unlimited.
parameter.
changes the password since
Value range: 1 - 999.
last change.
Minimum Password Default value: 1
Note: To modify the password
Used Days Principle: The smaller the value is, the
before the minimum Deselect
more secure the password is. To avoid
password used days expire, Unlimited.
that you forget the password due to
you can contact the security
frequent changes, the recommended
administrator.
value is 10.
Indicates the time of
password change prompt
before the password expires.
Value range: 1 - 30.
Notification Days For example, if the value is
Default value: 10
Before Password set to 10, a user who
Principle: To remind users of changing the password in time,
Expiration successfully logs in to the
the recommended value is 10.
client will receive notifications
for the password that will
expire since the 10th day.

52 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-2 Common Policy Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

Indicates the number of
history passwords that cannot
Number
be the same as the new Value range: 1 - 30.
of
password. Default value: 5
Similar
For example, if Number of Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the password.
The History
Similar History Passwords The recommended value is 30, to prevent a user from setting
pass- Pass-
is set to 2, the new password a cracked password again.
word words
cannot be set to the recent
should two history passwords.
not be
Count of The value box is unavailable, and the
similar
History Select Entire characters of the new password cannot be
to
Pass- Password. completely the same as those of the old
previous Indicates the number of
word password.
ones history password characters
Chars Value range: 1 - 16.
that cannot be contained in a
Cannot Default value: 4
new password. Deselect Entire
Be Principle: The larger the value, the more
Password.
Con- secure the password. The recommended
tained value is 4.

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies

Parameter Description Value

Minimum number of Value range: 3 - 16.
Min. different characters
different characters Default value: 3
between old and new
between old and new Principle: The larger the value, the more secure the
passwords
passwords password. The recommended value is 3.

The value box is greyed

Select Cannot contain
out, and a password
letters.
cannot contain letters.
Minimum number of letters Value range: 0 - 16.
Minimum Number of
in a new or modified Default value: 1
Letters
password Deselect Cannot contain Principle: The larger the
letters. value, the more secure the
password. The
recommended value is 1.
The value box is
Minimum number of upper-
Min. Number of Uppercase Select cannot contain unavailable, and a
case letters in a new or
Letters uppercase letters. password cannot contain
modified password
upper-case letters.

Version: A 53
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

Value range: 0 - 16.
Default value: 0
Deselect cannot contain Principle: The larger the
uppercase letters. value, the more secure the
password. The
recommended value is 1.
The value box is
Select cannot contain unavailable, and a
lowercase letters. password cannot contain
lower-case letters.
Minimum number of lower-
Minimum Number of Value range: 0 - 16.
case letters in a new or
Lowercase Letters Default value: 0
modified password
Deselect cannot contain Principle: The larger the
lowercase letters. value, the more secure the
password. The
recommended value is 1.
The value box is
Select cannot contain unavailable, and a
numbers. password cannot contain
digits.
Minimum number of digits
Value range: 0 - 16.
Minimum Number of Digits in a new or modified
Default value: 1
password
Deselect cannot contain Principle: The larger the
numbers. value, the more secure the
password. The
recommended value is 1.
The value box is
Select Can't contain unavailable, and a
special characters. password cannot contain
special characters.
Minimum number of
Minimum Special Value range: 0 - 16.
special characters in a new
Characters Default value: 0
or modified password
Deselect cannot contain Principle: The larger the
special characters. value, the more secure the
password. The
recommended value is 1.

54 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

The value box is
Select Cannot Contain unavailable, and a new
When setting or modifying
Complete Username. password cannot contain a
a password, ensure that
The password can't full user name.
the password cannot
contain continuous Value range: 2 - 16.
contain consecutive
characters in username Default value: 2
characters within a Deselect Cannot include
Principle: The larger the
username. full user name.
value, the more secure the
password.

When setting a new

password or modifying an
old password, enable this
policy, and set the
repeated character
sequence and number of
repeat times in the The Options include:

password cannot contain u Repeat Times: 2-16

duplicate character
u Number of Characters in Repeated Sequence: 2-16
sequence parameter box.
The password can't For example, a password Default value:
contain duplicate character is to be set to
u Number of Characters in Repeated Sequence: 3
sequence 123abcd123123, Number
of Characters in u Repeat Times: 2

Repeated Sequence is Principle: The smaller the values of Repeat Times and
set to 3, and Repeat Number of Characters in Repeated Sequence, the
Times is set to 2. Because more secure the password.
the repeated character
string 123 appears in the
password for three times,
the password does not
satisfy the policy and
cannot take effect.
When setting or modifying
Default value: Deselect the check box.
Password can't contain a password, ensure that
Recommended value: Select the check box.
blank spaces. the password cannot
Setting method: Select or deselect the check box.
contain a blank space.

A new or an old password Default value: Deselect the check box.

Password cannot be a
cannot be a user name in Recommended value: Select the check box.
username in reverse order
reverse order. Setting method: Select or deselect the check box.

Version: A 55
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-3 Parameters Related to Advanced Policies (Continued)

Parameter Description Value

When setting or modifying
a password, ensure that
the password cannot be
set as follows:
u Digit sequence or
letter sequence in an
Password cannot be an
increasing or a
incremental or Default value: Deselect the check box.
decreasing order, for
decremental sequence of Recommended value: Select the check box.
example, 12345678,
digits or a spacer Setting method: Select or deselect the check box.
abcdefgh, and
sequence of them.
987654321.
u Spacer sequence of
numbers or letters, for
example, 1a2a3a4a5a,
b2c2d2e2f2, and
9a7a5a3a1a.
Default value: Deselect the check box.
Recommended value: Select the check box.
Setting Method
A new or an old password
Password can't be a whole 1. Set the password dictionary.
cannot contain whole
word in the password Enter the D:\UNM2000\server\data\security
words in the password
dictionary. directory, open the weakpwdic.dic file, and add a
dictionary.
row as a dictionary item.
2. Select The password cannot contain whole
words in the password dictionary.

4. Click Apply.

Other Operation

Click Restore Default Configurations. The password policy immediately restores

to the default configurations, and the configuration immediately takes effect.

56 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2.3 Authority Management

The security administrator can grant appropriate authority to the network

management users and adjust authority according to actual project changes, so as
to ensure that maintenance personnel perform maintenance with own authority,
prevent risks caused by unauthorized operations, and ensure normal running of the
UNM2000 and NEs.

2.3.1 Authority Management Introduction

Authority specifies operations that a user can perform on a specific object. You
can set the authority management function on the UNM2000 to control user
operations on different objects.

Authority Elements

Authority elements include objects and operations, as described in Figure 2-1 and
Table 2-4.

Figure 2-1 Schematic Diagram of Authorization Elements

Table 2-4 Description of Authority Elements

Element Description

Object UNM2000 and NEs

Operations such as login, query and configuration.
Operation Only when users are assigned with the corresponding privileges can they
access and operate the UNM2000 and NEs.

Authority Description

Table 2-5 shows the operations that you can perform in the UNM2000 or on NEs.

Version: A 57
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-5 Authority Description

Authority
Object Operation Description
Attributes
Only the users having valid accounts
Log into the
UNM2000 and passwords can log into the
Access UNM2000
UNM2000.
Authority
Only the users having valid accounts
NE NE login
and passwords can log into an NE.

Indicates the UNM2000 operations

irrelevant to NEs, including log query
Network and topology management.
Management The UNM2000 application operations
UNM2000
Application are classified into log management,
Operation topology management, system
management, alarm management
and performance management.
Operation
Indicates UNM2000 operations that
Authority
are related to NEs, including reading /
writing port configurations and batch
NE configurations.
Network Device
NE The UNM2000 classifies network
Operation
device operations based on NE
models, including more than 60
device models, such as AN5116_02,
AN5516_01B and AN5116-04B.

2.3.2 Authority Allocation Principle

This section introduces the authority allocation principles of the UNM2000, helping
administrators understand how to authorize users in the UNM2000.

Authorization Mode

The common authorization modes are listed in Table 2-6. Selecting the appropriate
mode to authorize users can improve the authorization efficiency.

58 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-6 Authorization Mode

Authorization ModeNote 1 Description Application Scenario

Multiple administrators
manage different devices with
Directly set the user
different responsibilities.
Authorize the user directly management domain and
Besides, the managed
operation authority.
devices are few and not
replaced frequently.

Set the authority

(management domain and
operation authority) for the
Multiple users manage the
Bind the user with a user user group and then add the
devices with the same
groupNote 2 user into this user group so
authority.
that the user is assigned with
the authority of the user
group.

Bind the user with a user

group, and set the user
management domain and
operation authority. The user Add specific authority (not
Bind the user with a user
authority is the union of the included in the authority of the
group, an object group and an
authority of the user group user group) for the user
operation group
and the authority of temporarily.
independently set
management domain and
operation authority.

Note 1: The mode of binding the user with a user group is recommended, because one
authorization operation can authorize all users of a position. When the network
management user is changed, the administrator can adjust the authority by only adding
or deleting a user in the user group.
Note 2: One user can be added into multiple user groups, and therefore the user has the
authority of all the user groups to which the user belongs.

Authority Setting Method

The live network contains a large number of devices. It is not efficient to set
authority of the devices one by one. The UNM2000 provides diversified authority
setting modes for a user or user group. You can select the authority setting methods
by referring to Table 2-7. The user-defined object set+operation set and global
logical domain+operation set modes are recommended for authorization.

Version: A 59
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The management domain has two global logical domains:

u Global logical domain on the “Device” node: The authorization to this
global logical domain is equivalent to authorization to existing
devices in this global logical domain. When a device joins this global
logical domain, the management domain will not dynamically add
this device.

u Global logical domain on the “Global logical domain” node: The

authorization to this global logical domain is equivalent to
authorization to all devices in this global logical domain. When a
device joins this global logical domain, the management domain will
dynamically add this device.

60 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-7 Authority Setting Mode

Available Object in the

Authority Setting Mode Feature Application Scenario
Management Domain

The Assembly of A user group needs to

Objects of the manage all devices or all
UNM2000 is added to devices that can be seen
In conjunction with the
the management on the UNM2000 client.
Assembly of Object
domain of the user Considering the system
Assembly of Operations of the
group as a managed security, do not bind the
Objects UNM2000, you can
object. When setting Assembly of Objects
authorize all operation
operation authority, you with users other than the
authority to the user.
can only bind the Administrators and
operation set with the security administrator
object. group.
Object Set The devices are added
to the created object set
and then the customized
object set is added to Managed objects of
the management The “customized object multiple user groups are
Customizing domain of the user set+operation set” mode the same but the
Object Set group as a managed can improve the managed objects are not
object. When setting authorization and in the same global logical
operation authority, you domain.
can only bind the
operation set with the
object.

Version: A 61
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-7 Authority Setting Mode (Continued)

Available Object in the

Authority Setting Mode Feature Application Scenario
Management Domain

authority maintenance
efficiency.
u When the managed
object of the user or
user group is the
same, setting the
management domain
by using the
customized object set
can reduce the
workload. In
subsequent
management domain
adjustment, you only
need to adjust
objects in the object
set instead of
adjusting the user or
user group one by
one.
u When n devices in
the object set are of
the same type, you
can add or remove
the operation
authority of a user or
user group by adding
or deleting the
operation authority to
this type of device in
the bound operation
set.

62 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-7 Authority Setting Mode (Continued)

Available Object in the

Authority Setting Mode Feature Application Scenario
Management Domain

This operation is
Devices are added to
straightforward and easy
the management
to understand with
domain one by one. You
accurate control of
Device can bind operation sets Small-scaled network
authority. However, the
with the devices when
maintenance workload is
setting the operation
heavy for authority
authority.
adjustment.

The “global logical domain

+operation set” mode can
improve the authorization
efficiency and authority
maintenance efficiency. In
addition to the
advantages of the
“customized object set
+operation set” mode, the
Managed objects in the
“global logical domain
entire logical domain are
+operation set” mode
added to the object set.
features the following
The managed objects
advantages:
can be added to multiple Users manage devices
u You do not need to
Global Logical Domain global logical domains. based on the global
create an
When setting operation logical domain.
independent object
authority, you can bind
set for the user
the operation set with
group.
only the selected global
u When objects in the
logical domain.
global logical domain
are changed (added
or deleted), the
objects in the global
logical domain are
changed accordingly,
so as to automatically
adjust the authority of
the user group.

Version: A 63
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2.3.3 Authority Management Scenarios

There are two scenarios applicable for authorization and domain division: initial
authorization and authority maintenance. You can refer to Table 2-8 for operations
as desired.

64 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-8 Description of Authority Management Scenarios

Scenario Description Sub-Scenario

1. Authorization planning
Make a plan before authorization to reduce
unnecessary authorization and maintenance
workload.
2. User authorization
After installing the UNM2000, you Create users and authorize them according to
need configure and authorize the the authorization plan.
Initial authorization
administrator for managing sets of 3. Migrate an operation set.
equipment. After an operation set is created on the
UNM2000, if you want to copy it to another
UNM2000, you can export the operation set
from the system and then import it to the target
system. In this way, you can successfully
migrate the operation set.

u Authority adjustment after the network is

changed.
In the maintenance period, after new equipment
is deployed, you need to authorize the user
After initial authorization is completed,
group to manage the equipment. After any sets
the authority maintenance period
of equipment are removed, the authority for
starts. When network changes (any
Authority managing the equipment will be automatically
sets of equipment is added or
Maintenance removed from the corresponding user or user
removed) or user responsibility
group.
changes occur, you need to adjust
u Authority adjustment in case of responsibility
users' authority.
changes
You need to adjust users' authority when their
responsibility changes in terms of managed NE
scope, operation authority or role.

2.3.4 Authorization Planning Suggestion

Making an authorization plan before the authorization helps reduce unnecessary

authorization and maintenance workload. Table 2-9 shows the authorization
planning flow.

Version: A 65
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-9 Authorization Planning Flow

Step Planning Flow Content Principle

You can sort out the equipment

management division table as the
original data of authority
management according to your
organization structure and
equipment networking.
Analyze the original data for
subsequent planning based on
Collecting Original Data the following requirements:
1 for Authority u Sort out the users managing -
Management the same equipment, that is,
the users belonging to the
same management domain.
u Sort out the users with the
same responsibilities,
including not only the same
administrative equipment but
also the same operation
authority.

u Add the users with the same

authority into the same user
Classify the users according their
2 Planning User Groups group.
responsibilities.
u For users with different authority,
add them to different user groups.

u Add the users with the same

administrative scope to the same
management domain.
u Add the users with different
administrative scopes to different
management domains.
Plan how to group the managed Suggestions: Managed objects in the
Planning Management objects to fulfill efficient same global logical domain
3
Domains authorization, convenient for preferentially use the global logical
subsequent maintenance. domain. Devices not in the global
logical domain are configured in the
customized object set. The
customized object set is not
recommended to include sub-object
sets to facilitate subsequent
maintenance.

66 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-9 Authorization Planning Flow (Continued)

Step Planning Flow Content Principle

Analyze the authority required for For user groups requiring the same
users to fulfill the corresponding operation authority, define the same
4 Planning Object Sets management and define the operation set for them. Otherwise,
operation authority into operation independently plan an operation set
groups. for each user group.

Sort and output the complete

The cells of the management domain
authorization planning, providing
record the modes for adding managed
reference for authorization and
objects to the management domain
subsequent authority
Outputting (global logical domain, customized
maintenance.
5 Authorization Planning object set, or device). The cells of the
The authorization planning
Summary Listing operation authority attributes record
summary listing should include
the operation sets (including the
user group name, user group
planned customized operation set)
members, management domain
that cover all required operations.
and operation authority.

2.4 Initial User Authorization

You can create users and authorize them according to the authorization planning.

2.4.1 Flowchart of Creating Users

After completing the authority planning, create users according to Figure 2-2.

Version: A 67
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Figure 2-2 Flowchart of Creating Users

The UNM2000 has default user groups, object sets, and operation sets. For details,
see Overview of the UNM2000 User Security. If the planning result suggests using
the default user groups, object sets or operation sets directly, you can skip the first
three steps when creating users.

2.4.2 Creating a Customized Object Set

If customized object sets are required in the authorization planning, you need to
customize these object sets before authorizing user groups.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

u The object sets have been planned by referring to Authorization Planning

Suggestion.

68 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Background Information

After an object set is authorized to a user group, all users in the user group can view
members in the object set in the physical topology view.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management in the main menu. Right-click

Object Set in the left pane and select Create Object Set from the shortcut
menu.

2. Set basic information of the object set.

Set the object set name and description in the Basic Information tab of the
Create Object Set dialog box.

3. Set members of the object set.

1) On the Member tab of the Create Object Set dialog box, click Select to
open the Select Domain dialog box.

2) In the Object to be Selected area of the Select Management Domain

dialog box, select the member according to the planning and click
to add it to the Selected Object area.

Note:

u The members in the object set can be divided by global logical

domain, NE or NE type.

u To facilitate management of the users' authority, you are advised to

copy members from an existing object set to a new one. This avoids
nested sub object sets in a new object set. The detailed procedures
are as follows:

1) Click Copy Member from Object Set in the Create Object Set
dialog box.

2) Select one or more existing object sets in the Select Object Set
dialog box, and copy the members to the Member tab of the
current object set.

Version: A 69
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Related Operation

After creation, if you need to adjust the object set members, click Select in the lower
right corner of the Member tab. In the displayed dialog box, adjust the object set
members.

2.4.3 Customizing Operation Sets

If customized operation sets are required in the authorization planning, you need to
customize these operation sets before authorizing user groups.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or
higher.

u The operation sets have been planned by referring to Authorization Planning

Suggestion.

Background Information

u The users and user groups can be authorized through operation sets. By
assigning an operation set to a user group, you assign all the users in this user
group with all the operation authority in the operation set.

u The UNM2000 provides two types of operation sets, namely, NMS application
operation sets and network device operation sets.

4 NMS application operation sets: Set various types of NMS application

operations that correspond to UNM2000 functions irrelevant from NEs,
including log query and topology management.

4 Network device operation sets: Set various types of network device

operations that correspond to UNM2000 functions related to NEs,
including reading / writing port configurations and batch NE configurations.

u The UNM2000 provides more than 100 default operation sets based on
operation types and authority level (high or low).

70 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management in the main menu. Right-click

Operation Set in the left pane and select Create Operation Set from the
shortcut menu.

2. Set basic information of the operation set.

Set the operation set name, type and description on the Basic Info tab of the
Add Operation Set dialog box.

3. Set members in the operation set.

1) On the Member tab of the Create Object Set dialog box, click Select to
open the Select Operation dialog box.

2) In the Operation to Be Selected area of the Select Operation dialog box,

select the member according to the planning and click to add it to
the Selected Operation area.

Note:

To simplify subsequent authority maintenance, you can copy members of

the existing operation set to a new operation set rather than selecting the
existing operation set as the member of the new operation set. The
method is as follows:
1. Click Copy Member from Operation Set in the Create Operation
Set dialog box.

2. Select one or more existing operation sets in the Select Operation

Set dialog box, and copy the members to the Member tab of the
current operation set.

Related Operations

After creation, if you need to adjust the operation set members, click Select in the
lower right corner of the Member tab. In the displayed dialog box, adjust the
operation set members.

Version: A 71
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2.4.4 Customizing and Authorizing User Groups

If customized user groups are required in the authorization planning, you need to
customize these user groups before authorizing new users.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or
higher.

u The user groups are planned. See Authorization Planning Suggestion.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management in the main menu. Right-click User

Group in the left pane and select Create User Group from the shortcut menu.

2. Set the basic information of the user group.

1) In the Create User Group dialog box, set the name, type, description and
maximum sessions of the user group.

Note:

The user group type includes the ordinary user group and sub domain
security administrator group. The latter only has the Security
Management authority, which cannot be modified.

2) (Optional) Set the user group member. Click Select to open the Select
User dialog box, select the desired users, and click OK.

72 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Note:

There are three ways to add users into a user group:

u Select the desired users when creating a user group. When the user
group is created, the selected users belong to this user group.

u Select the desired user group for the user when creating the user.
This user belongs to the selected user group after being created.

u If the desired user and user group are already created, you can
select the user group for a user through User Group or select the
user for a user group through Member.

3. Sets the management domain of the user group.

1) On the Management Domain tab of the Create User Group dialog box,
click Select.

2) In the Select Domain dialog box, select the management domain of the
user group, and click OK.

The management domain contains two global logical domains. Different

results will be obtained if you select different global logical domains.

¡ Global logical domain on the “Device” node: The authorization to this

global logical domain is equivalent to authorization to existing devices
in this global logical domain. When a device joints this global logical
domain, the management domain will not dynamically add this
domain.

¡ Global logical domain on the “Global logical domain” node: The

authorization to this global logical domain is equivalent to
authorization to all devices in this global logical domain. When a
device joints this global logical domain, the management domain will
dynamically add this domain.

4. (Optional) Set the extended topology management domain of the user group.

1) On the Management Domain tab of the Create User Group dialog box,
click Select.

Version: A 73
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2) In the Select Domain dialog box, select the extended topology

management domain of the user group, and click OK.

5. Sets the operation authority of the user group.

1) On the Operation Authority tab of the Create User Group dialog box,
click Select.

2) Select the corresponding authority in the Select Operation Authority

dialog box, and click OK.

Note:

u Authorized objects selected in Authorized Object determine the

operation authority displayed in Optional Authority.

u You can select an operation set in the Optional Authority area and
click on the top of the area to view the operations included in the
selected operation set.

6. (Optional) Set second authorization information of the user group.

4 Click Select to select an item for the second authorization.

4 Click Enabled to set whether to enable the second authorization for the
operation.

4 Click OK.

7. After completing the settings, click OK in the Create User Group dialog box.

Related Operation

After creation, if you need to adjust the user group authority, click Select in the lower
right corner of the Domain or Operation Authority tab. In the displayed dialog box,
adjust the management domain or operation authority of the user group.

2.4.5 Creating and Authorizing Users

You can create the UNM2000 user accounts and assign them with corresponding
authority so as to allocate the accounts to users of different responsibilities.

74 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

u The user authority has been planned. For details, see Authorization Planning
Suggestion.

Background Information

u It is recommended to authorize users by binding them with user groups for

clear authority / responsibilities and simple maintenance.

u In addition to the user name and password that must be set upon user creation,
other attributes can be set to the default values or after the user is created.

u The user name and password of the new user must satisfy the account and
password policies. For details, see Setting the Account Policy and Setting the
Password Policy.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management. Right-click User in the left pane

and select Create User from the shortcut menu.

2. Set the basic information and user group information of the user in the Create
User dialog box according to Table 2-10, and click OK.

Table 2-10 User Information

Parameter Description

Compulsory. Sets the user account, which must comply with the
Username
account policies.

Real Name Sets the actual name of the user.

Employee
Sets the employee ID of the user.
Basic Number
infor- Sets the contact information of the user for convenient management.
Contact
ma-
Description Sets the description of the user, for distinguishing users.
tion
Unit Sets information of the user's company.

Sets the user password, which must comply with the password
Password
policies.

Confirm
Types the password again.
Password

Version: A 75
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-10 User Information (Continued)

Parameter Description

Modify
If this item is selected, the user will be requested to modify the
Password on
password upon next login.
Next Login

Users cannot
If this item is selected, the corresponding user cannot modify the
modify the
password via the client.
password

Account
Disabled If this item is selected, the corresponding user cannot log in.
Temporarily

Sets the valid days of the password.

u Select "System Password Valid Days", and the valid days
Password
number is 180.
Valid Days
u Select Custom to set the number of valid days.
Value range: 2 to 999 days.

Sets the maximum online number of current users.

u If you select Unlimited, the system does not limit the maximum
Max Online number of online users.
No. u If you deselect Unlimited, you need to set Maximum Online
Number. The default value is 30.
Value range: 0 to 255.

Sets the waiting time for users to exit automatically. By default, this
parameter is disabled.
Basic u If you select Disable Auto-exit, a user does not automatically
Infor- Wait-to-Exit exit.
ma- Time u If you deselect Disable Auto-exit, you need to set the Wait-to-
tion Exit Time. If no operation is performed within the specified
(Ad- period, the user will automatically exit.
vanc- Value range: 5 to 600 minutes.
e) Sets the policy for user accounts that do not log in for a long time. By
default, this parameter is disabled.
u If you deselect Enable, the policy for users not logged in is
Policy for disabled.
Users Not u If you select Enable and Disabled or Delete, you need to set
Logged in the number of days during which the user does not log in. If the
user does not log into the system during this period, the system
disables or deletes the user account.
Value range: 1 to 300 days.

76 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-10 User Information (Continued)

Parameter Description

Sets the time range for user's login. By default, this parameter is
disabled.
Login Time u If you deselect Enable, the login time range is disabled.
Range u If you select Enable, you need to set the login time range,
including date, time, and week range. The user can log into the
system only within the specified time range.

User Group Sets the user group to which this user belongs.

Indicates the management domain of the user.

The objects to be selected for the management domain are arranged
in parallel in the tree structure by devices, global logical domains,
Management Domain
and object sets. The management domain that takes effect finally is
the union of the selected devices, global logical domains, and object
sets.
Sets the operation authority of the user.
The objects of the operation authority are classified according to the
network management applications, all objects in the management
Operation Authority
system, and network devices. The network management application
authority includes the operation sets of the network management
application types and the network management operation list.

Sets the access control list of the user.

u Select Use All Access Control Lists in the System, and the
ACLs set by the system will be used in the range of IP
Access Control List addresses logged in by the user account. For setting the ACLs
of the system, see Setting the Access Control List.
u Select Use the Following Specified Access Control List to
set the login IP address range of this user account.

Note:

Click Copy Rights from User and select an existing user (non-admin user)
to copy the management domain and operation authority, and load the
data to the new user.

Related Operations

You can adjust the user authority by referring to Adjusting Users' Authority.

Version: A 77
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2.5 Migrating Operation Sets

By exporting operation sets, you can back up all the operation sets that have been
created in the current system and check which operation set the authority belongs
to. You can also edit the exported operation set file.

By importing the backup operation set file, you can recover the operation sets
missing in the UNM2000. You can also import the operation set file that has been
edited and then add some operation sets or modify some operation set members in
a batch manner on the UNM2000.

2.5.1 Exporting Operation Sets

This section introduces how to export operation sets to the local path.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. In the browse tree on the left of the NMS User Management tab, click .

3. Select a saving path in the Save dialog box, and click Save.

4. Open the operation set file saved in the local path in Step 3 to view or modify
the operation set.

2.5.2 Modifying Operation Sets in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify operation sets in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

78 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Export the operation set file to the local computer by referring to Exporting
Operation Sets.

2. Open the operation set file exported in Step 1 to modify the operation sets.

3. Import the operation set file modified in Step 2 into the UNM2000 by referring to
Importing Operation Sets.

2.5.3 Importing Operation Sets

This section introduces how to import the operation set file from the local computer
to the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. In the browse tree on the left of the NMS User Management tab, click .

3. In the Open dialog box, select the file path and click Open.

4. In the dialog box that appears, click OK. The NMS User Management tab
refreshes.

2.6 Adjusting Users' Authority

In case of network adjustment or personnel responsibility changes, authority of a

created user may be adjusted.

Version: A 79
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The operations of adjusting users' authority are based on the prerequisite

that the initial authorization of users is implemented by binding users with
user groups. If the user is directly bound with the management domain
and operation authority upon initial authorization, adjust the management
domain or operation authority according to actual situations.

2.6.1 Adjusting Authority in Case of Network Changes

During maintenance, when the network is adjusted (new devices are added or
removed), the users' authority should be adjusted accordingly.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

u The user groups for the added NEs are planned. For the planning suggestion,
see Authorization Planning Suggestion.

Note:

The operations of adjusting users' authority described herein are based

on the prerequisite that the initial authorization of users is implemented
by binding users with user groups.

Adjustment Analysis

During maintenance, when the network is adjusted (new devices are added or
removed), the users' authority should be adjusted accordingly (modifying the user
group bound with the administrator of the device).

u When new NEs are deployed, it is required to assign the corresponding user
with the authority of managing the NE. The situations are as follows:

80 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Note:

If the operation authority of the user group does not include adding NEs,
to avoid influence on the authority of the original device and simplicity of
later-phase maintenance, you need to create a new user group and bind
it with the user to manage the new NE rather than directly modifying the
operation authority of the current user group.

4 You need to create a new user group and bind it with the user to manage
the NE according to the initial authorization. See Initial User Authorization.

4 The new NE is automatically added into the management domain of the

planned user group, and the operation authority of the user group includes
the operations on the new NE. No other operation is required.

Note:

If the logical domain of the new NE has been added to the global logical
domain of the user group’s management domain, the device adding or
deletion in this logical domain will be synchronized in the management
domain of the user group.

4 You need to manually add the new NE to the management domain of the
planned user group.

u When the device is removed, it will be automatically deleted from the object
group.

The following introduces how to manually add the new NE into the management
domain of the user group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to open the
NMS User Management tab.

2. Add an NE to the management domain of the user group.

Version: A 81
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 If the planned user group uses a user-defined object set for authorization,
perform the following steps to add the new NE to the object set bound with
the user group:

a) On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Object Set
node, and select the object set bound with the user group.

b) Click Select on the Member tab at the right of the selected object set.

c) In the Select Domain dialog box, expand the Device node under
Object For Select, and select the new NE.

d) Click to move the new NE to the List of Selected Objects

area, and click OK.

4 If the planned user group uses the device mode for authorization, perform
the following steps to add the new NE to the management domain of the
user group:

a) On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User

Group node, and select the planned user group.

b) On the Management Domain tab on the right of the user group, click
Select.

c) In the Select Domain dialog box, expand the Device node under
Object For Select, and select the new NE.

d) Click to move the new NE to the List of Selected Objects

area, and click OK.

2.6.2 Adjusting Authority in Case of Responsibility Changes

During the maintenance period, when the responsibilities of users are changed,
such as changes of managed object, operation authority or position, the security
administrator needs to adjust the users' authority accordingly.

82 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Scenario Description

Note:

There are many possibilities for responsibility changes. The following

only introduces the common scenarios.

u Authority adjustment after managed objects are changed.

When the management authority of an object is transferred from a user group

to another user group, you need to adjust the members in the management
domain of the user group.

u Authority adjustment after operation authority is changed.

Due to responsibility changes, a user group still needs to manage a certain

object, but with more or fewer operation privileges. In this situation, you need to
adjust the operation authority of the user group.

u Authority adjustment after the position is changed.

4 When an employee is transferred to another position, you can adjust the

user groups associated with the user.

4 When there are newcomers, create user accounts and assign them with
corresponding authority. See Creating and Authorizing Users.

4 When an employee quits, you can delete the user or suspend the user for
future use.

2.7 Querying Authority

You can determine user authority upon initial authorization and within the authority
maintenance period through authority query.

2.7.1 Viewing the Management Domain of the User or User

Group

The security administrator can view the management domain of a user or a user
group to determine the managed objects.

Version: A 83
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User or User Group
node, and select a user or a user group.

3. View the managed objects of the management domain on the right

Management Domain tab.

You can view the management domain with respect to different managed
objects as follows:
Managed Object Method

Device Expand the Device node to view managed devices.

Expand the Global Logic Domain node and view the selected global logical
Global Logic Domain domain. In the left Main Topology browse tree, confirm the devices in the
selected global logical domain.

Expand the Object Set node and view the selected object set as well as the
Object Set
specific objects managed by the object set.

Note:

If you select Show Management Domain of the User Group at the

bottom left of the Management Domain tab, you can view the
management domain information of the user group to which the user
belongs and the information is greyed out. You cannot delete it from the
Management Domain tab.

84 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2.7.2 Viewing the Operation Authority of the User or User

Group

The security administrator can view operation authority of a user or a user group to
determine the operation authority for the managed object.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User or User Group
node, and select a user or a user group.

3. On the right Operation Authority tab, expand the object node to view
operation authority of the user and each object in the user group.

Note:

If you select Display Authority of Attributed User Group, the displayed

user operation authority includes the operation authority inherited from
the user group. The inherited operation authority is displayed in gray and
cannot be deleted from the Operation Authority tab.

2.7.3 Viewing the User Group to Which a User Belongs

The security administrator can view the user group to which a user belongs and
determine the authority inherited by the user group.

Version: A 85
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Background Information

A user can belong to multiple user groups and inherit the management domains and
operation authority of these user groups.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node, and
select a user.

3. View the user groups to which the user belongs on the right User Group tab.

2.7.4 Viewing Users / User Groups to Whom an Operation

Set Is Assigned

You can learn about which users or user groups this operation set serves. In other
words, you can know which users or user groups the authority is assigned to.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Operation Set node,
and select an operation set.

3. View the users / user groups whom the operation set serves on the right
Service For tab.

86 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2.7.5 Viewing Operations Included in an Operation Set

The security administrator can view specific authority of an operation set to

determine whether the authority in the operation set meets the requirements.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Admin Group authority or higher.

Background Information

An operation set consists of sub-operation sets and operation groups. Authority of

an operation set is the union of the sub-operation sets and specific operations.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Operation Set node,
and select an operation set.

3. View the specific authority in the operation set on the right Member tab.

Version: A 87
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

If the operation set includes sub-operation sets, you need to check the
specific operations in the sub-operation set to determine the specific
operations of the operation set.

2.7.6 Viewing Objects in an Object Set

The security administrator can view objects in an object set and determine whether
these objects meet the planning requirements.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Background Information

An object set can include sub-object sets. The final effective management domain
of the object set is a union of the selected devices, the selected device types, global
logical domains, and sub-object sets.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the Object Set node,
and select an object set.

3. View the specific objects in the object set on the right Member tab.

The final effective management domain of the object set is a union of the
selected devices, device types, global logical domains, and sub-object sets.

4 Expand the Device node and view specific devices under the Device
node.

4 Expand the Device Type node and view specific device types under the
Device Type node.

88 Version: A
 2 Security Management

4 Expand the Global Logic Domain node and view global logical domains
included in the object set. On the Main Topology tab, view the specific
devices included in the corresponding global logical domain.

4 Expand the Object Set node to view sub-object sets in the object set. To
view the specific devices included in the sub-object set, refer to Step 2 and
Step 3.

2.8 Authorization Operation FAQs

The following introduces common fault handling methods for authorization

operations.

2.8.1 How to Identify User Authority

Problem Description

How to identify authority of a user?

Background Information

A user's original authority is coupled with the management domain and operation
authority of the user group.

As shown in the figure below, the user owns the following authority:

u For the objects in the management domain A, the user has the operation
authority defined in Operation Authority A.

u For the objects in the management domain B, the user has the operation
authority defined in Operation Authority B.

Version: A 89
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The user cannot perform operations permitted by Operation Authority B but not
permitted by Operation Authority A on devices in management domain A. Similarly,
the user cannot perform operations permitted by Operation Authority A but not
permitted by Operation Authority B on devices in management domain B.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu to open the
NMS User Management tab.

2. Expand the User node in the NMS User Management navigation tree, and
select a desired user.

4 In the right pane of the NMS User Management tab, click User Group to
view the user groups to which the user is added. For details, see Viewing
the User Group to Which a User Belongs.

4 In the right pane of the NMS User Management tab, click Domain to view
the management domain to which the user is added. For details, see
Viewing the Management Domain of the User or User Group.

4 In the right pane of the NMS User Management tab, click Operation
Authority to view the operation authority granted to the user. For details,
see Viewing the Operation Authority of the User or User Group.

3. Expand the User Group node on the NMS User Management navigation tree,
and view the management domain and operation authority of the corresponding
user group. For details, see Viewing the Management Domain of the User or
User Group and Viewing the Operation Authority of the User or User Group.

4. Confirm the user's authority through the query result of steps 2 to 3.

90 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2.8.2 How to Allocate Authority Beyond the User Group

Problem Description

How to allocate authority beyond the user group after a user is added to the user
group?

Procedure

1. Check whether the authority of the user group are completely the same as the
exclusive authority of the user, that is, whether the user group includes only the
exclusive authority.

4 If yes, add the user to the user group.

4 If not, ➔ Step 2.

2. Create a user group and assign the required authority by referring to Initial User
Authorization. Delete the original user group and add the user to the new user
group.

Note:

You can also set independent management domains and operation

authority for the user. However, this setting is not recommended because
it does not facilitate management. This setting is applicable only to
temporarily adding exclusive authority for a user.

2.9 Authorization Examples

The following introduces authorization examples.

2.9.1 Authorization Planning Example

The following uses an example to introduce the authorization planning procedures.

In the actual project, the network operators should complete the authorization
planning according to their respective organizational structure and equipment
networking.

Version: A 91
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Scenario Introduction

There are 10 devices in a certain area, among which there are 4 devices in logical
domain 01 and 6 devices in logical domain 02, as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Device Networking Diagram

There are 6 administrators managing these devices with their management

authority division as shown in Figure 2-4.

92 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Figure 2-4 Schematic Diagram of Device Management Division

Version: A 93
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Authorization Planning Flow

Figure 2-5 shows the authorization planning flow chart.

Figure 2-5 Authorization Planning Flow Chart

Collecting Original Data for Authority Management

The device management division table is sorted out according to the organization
structure and device management division, as shown in Table 2-11.

Table 2-11 Device Management Division

Managed Object Administrator Responsibility

Configure the managed objects and take over

Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04,
A the daily maintenance of the managed objects
Device05, Device06 and Device07
when administrator B is absent.
Maintain the managed objects and take over
Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04,
B the data configuration of the managed objects
Device05, Device06 and Device07
when administrator A is absent.
Device08, Device09, and Device10 C Configure the managed objects.

Device08, Device09 and Device10 D Maintain the managed objects daily.

94 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-11 Device Management Division (Continued)

Managed Object Administrator Responsibility

Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04,

Device05, Device06, Device07, Device08, E Monitor the managed objects during the day.
Device09 and Device10
Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04,
Device05, Device06, Device07, Device08, F Monitor the managed objects at night.
Device09 and Device10

Analyze the original data for subsequent planning based on the following
requirements:

u Sort out the users managing the same equipment, that is, the users belonging
to the same management domain.

Table 2-12 Co-managed Objects

Administrator Co-managed Object

A and B Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06 and Device07

C and D Device08, Device09 and Device10

Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06, Device07, Device08,
E and F
Device09 and Device10

u Sort out the users with the completely same authority, including not only the
same managed devices but also the same operation authority.

Table 2-13 Co-management Authority

Administrator Co-management Authority

As the full-time or part-time administrators, they configure and maintain the same
managed objects.
u The full-time administrator A and part-time administrator B configure the same
A and B
managed objects.
u The part-time administrator A and full-time administrator B maintain the same
managed objects daily.

E and F Monitor the same managed objects.

Version: A 95
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Planning User Groups

A user group is a set of UNM2000 users with the same management authority.
Planning the user groups means classifying the users according to their
management authority. The users with the same authority can be added to the same
user group. Table 2-14 shows the user group planning.

Note:

For simple authority maintenance, it is recommended adding the user

with authority different from other users into a different user group.

Table 2-14 User Group Planning

User Group Member Responsibility

Configuration and Configure and maintain the devices: Device01, Device02,

A and B
Maintenance User Group Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06 and Device07.
Configuration User Group C Configure the devices: Device08, Device09 and Device10.

Maintenance User Group D Maintain the devices: Device08, Device09 and Device10.
Monitor the devices: Device01, Device02, Device03,
Monitoring User Group E and F Device04, Device05, Device06, Device07, Device08,
Device09 and Device10.

Planning Management Domains

When planning management domains, consider how to effectively add managed

objects to the management domain for subsequent maintenance. For users in the
same management domain, plan the management domain uniformly. For users in
different administrative scopes, plan the management domains independently. This
example has three groups of users with the same managed objects. The managed
objects of all users are the same. Therefore, three groups of management domains
are recommended.

The principles for planning management domains are as follows: Preferentially use
logical domains. Devices not in the same logical domain are suggested to be added
to user-defined object sets to avoid direct authorization to the devices. Sub-object
sets are not recommended for the user-defined object sets to ensure clear structure
and convenient maintenance.

96 Version: A
 2 Security Management

According to the preceding principles, the planned management domains are as

described in Table 2-15, and the management division on each object is shown in
Figure 2-6.

Table 2-15 Management Domain Planning Table

Objects in
Management
Administrator Management Objects
Domain
Domain
Device01, Device02, Device03, and
Management Logical Domain 01
A and B Device04
Domain 01
Object Set 01 Device05, Device06, and Device07
Management
C and D Object Set 02 Device08, Device09, and Device10
Domain 02
Device01, Device02, Device03, and
Logical Domain 01
Management Device04
E and F
Domain 03 Device05, Device06, Device07, Device08,
Logical Domain 02
Device09, and Device10

Figure 2-6 Schematic Diagram of Management Domain Planning

Version: A 97
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Planning Object Sets

When setting the management domain of a user by setting a global logical domain
and object set, you need to set user operation authority by binding the user with an
operation set. Therefore, analyze the authority required for users to fulfill the
corresponding management and define the operation authority into operation
groups.

1. Analyze operation authority of each user to fulfill the responsibilities. Because

the users have been allocated to the corresponding user groups during
planning according to the responsibilities, you only need to analyze operation
authority by user groups.

Table 2-16 describes operation authority required by each user group,

analyzed based on Table 2-14.

Table 2-16 Operation Authority Assignment

User Group Member Responsibility Required Operation Authority

u Configuration and maintenance

Configure and maintain operations of the devices: Device01,
Configuration and Device01, Device02, Device02, Device03, Device04,
Maintenance User A and B Device03, Device04, Device05, Device06, and Device07.
Group Device05, Device06, and u Network management application
Device07. operations required for configuration
and maintenance
u Configuration operations of the
devices: Device08, Device09, and
Configuration Configure Device08,
C Device10.
User Group Device09, and Device10.
u Network management application
operations required for configuration

u Maintenance operations of the

devices: Device08, Device09, and
Maintenance User Maintain Device08, Device09,
D Device10.
Group and Device10.
u Network management application
operations required for maintenance

u Monitoring operations of the devices:

Monitor devices: Device01,
Device01, Device02, Device03,
Device02, Device03,
Device04, Device05, Device06,
Monitoring User Device04, Device05,
E and F Device07, Device08, Device09, and
Group Device06, Device07,
Device10.
Device08, Device09, and
u Network management application
Device10.
operations required for monitoring

98 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2. Plan the operation groups according to the operations respectively required by

user groups.

The operations here are the same to a type of devices. If operations required by
user groups are the same, you can configure a shared operation set for these
user groups. Otherwise, configure independent operation sets for each user
group. To ensure clear operation set structure and convenient maintenance, do
not configure sub-operation sets for the user-defined operation sets.
Table 2-17 shows the operation set of this area.

Table 2-17 Operation Set Planning Table

Operation Set Type Operation Set Name Operation Authority

Configuration and maintenance operations of

Device Configuration and
the devices: Device01, Device02, Device03,
Maintenance Operation Set
Device04, Device05, Device06 and Device07.

Device Configuration Operation Configuration operations of the devices:

Set Device08, Device09, and Device10.
Network Device Operation Set Device Maintenance Operation Maintenance operations of the devices:
Set Device08, Device09 and Device10.
Monitoring operations of the devices:
Device Monitoring Operation Device01, Device02, Device03, Device04,
Set Device05, Device06, Device07, Device08,
Device09 and Device10.
Network Management
Application Operation Set of Network management application operations
Configuration and Maintenance required for configuration and maintenance.
Engineers

Network Management
Network management application operations
Application Operation Set of
Network Management required for configuration.
Configuration Engineers
Application Operation Set
Network Management
Network management application operations
Application Operation Set of
required for maintenance.
Maintenance Engineers

Network Management
Network management application operations
Application Operation Set of
required for monitoring
Monitoring Engineers

Version: A 99
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Sorting Out the User Group Attribute Table

After the user group, object set and operation set are planned, it is recommended
outputting the complete user group attribute table so as to provide reference for
authorization and authority maintenance.

The user group attribute table mainly includes user group members, management
domains, and operation authority. The management domains and operation
authority are the bound objects and operation modes configured upon authorization.
Table 2-18 describes the user group attribute information collected according to the
planning tables.

Table 2-18 User Group Attribute

User Group Member Responsibility Management Domain Operation Authority

Device configuration and

maintenance operation sets:
configuration and maintenance
Logical domain 01
Configure and maintain operations on Device01, Device02,
Configura- (Device01, Device02,
the devices: Device01, Device03, Device04, Device05,
tion and Device03, and
Device02, Device03, Device06, and Device07.
Mainte- A and B Device04)
Device04, Device05, Network management application
nance User Object set 01
Device06 and operation set of configuration and
Group (Device05, Device06,
Device07. maintenance engineers: Network
and Device07)
management application
operations required for
configuration and maintenance.

Device configuration operation sets

of S2: configuration operations on
Device08, Device09, and
Configura- Configure the devices: Object set 02 Device10.
tion User C Device08, Device09 (Device08, Device09, Network management application
Group and Device10. and Device10) operation set of configuration
engineers: Network management
application operations required for
configuration.

100 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-18 User Group Attribute (Continued)

User Group Member Responsibility Management Domain Operation Authority

Device maintenance operation

sets: Maintenance operations on
Device08, Device09, and
Mainte- Maintain the devices: Object set 02 Device10.
nance User D Device08, Device09 (Device08, Device09, Network management application
Group and Device10. and Device10) operation set of maintenance
engineers: Network management
application operations required for
maintenance.
Device monitoring operation sets:
Logical domain 01 Monitoring operations on Device01,
Monitor the devices: (Device01, Device02, Device02, Device03, Device04,
Device01, Device02, Device03, and Device05, Device06, Device07,
Device03, Device04, Device04) Device08, Device09, and
Monitoring
E and F Device05, Device06, Logical domain 02 Device10.
User Group
Device07, Device08, (Device05, Device06, Network management application
Device09 and Device07, Device08, operation set of monitoring
Device10. Device09, and engineers: Network management
Device10) application operations required for
monitoring.

2.9.2 Authorizing Users

This section uses assigning authority for users in two areas as an example to
introduce how to create user accounts and assign authority.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario Introduction

Devices in areas S1 and S2 are uniformly managed by the UNM2000. Figure 2-7
describes the inspectors and maintainers. Authority need to be assigned for these
personnel.

Version: A 101
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Figure 2-7 Network Example

Data Planning

Plan the user groups, management domains, and management authority by

referring to Authorization Planning Suggestion, and organize the user group
attribute table, as shown in Table 2-19.

102 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Table 2-19 User Group Attribute

User Management
Member Responsibility Operation AuthorityNote 2
Group DomainNote 1
Device monitoring operation
sets of S1: Monitoring
operations on Device01,
Monitor the Logical domain
Monitor- Device02, Device03, and
devices: Device01, S1 (Device01,
ing User Device04.
A, F Device02, Device02,
Group in Assembly of Application
Device03, and Device03, and
S1 Inspectors: network
Device04. Device04)
management application
operations required for
monitoring

Device maintenance
operation sets of S1:
Monitoring operations on
Mainte- Maintain Logical domain
Device01, Device02,
nance Device01, S1 (Device01,
Device03, and Device04.
User B Device02, Device02,
Assembly of Application
Group in Device03, and Device03, and
Maintainers: network
S1 Device04. Device04)
management application
operations required for
maintenance
Device monitoring operation
sets of S2: Monitoring
Monitor the Logical domain operations on Device05,
devices: Device05, S2 (Device05, Device06, Device07,
Monitor-
Device06, Device06, Device08, Device09, and
ing User
C, F Device07, Device07, Device10.
Group in
Device08, Device08, Assembly of Application
S2
Device09, and Device09, and Inspectors: network
Device10. Device10) management application
operations required for
monitoring

Version: A 103
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 2-19 User Group Attribute (Continued)

User Management
Member Responsibility Operation AuthorityNote 2
Group DomainNote 1
Device maintenance
operation sets of S2:
Maintain the Logical domain Monitoring operations on
Mainte- devices: Device05, S2 (Device05, Device05, Device06,
nance Device06, Device06, Device07, Device08,
User D Device07, Device07, Device09, and Device10.
Group in Device08, Device08, Assembly of Application
S2 Device09, and Device09, and Inspectors: network
Device10. Device10) management application
operations required for
monitoring

Note 1: According to the planning principles, managed objects in the same global logical
domain preferentially use the global logical domain. Since Device01-Device04 are in
logical domain S1 and Device05-Device10 are in logical domain S2, you do not need to
plan an independent object set in this example.
Note 2: The Assembly of Application Inspectors and Assembly of Application Maintainers in
Operation Authority are default network management application operation sets of
the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Create a user-defined operation set according to the data planning.

For details about how to create a user-defined operation set, see Customizing
Operation Sets.

2. Create a user group and bind it with the management domain and operation
authority according to the data planning.

Note:

For details about creating and authorizing a user-defined user group, see
Customizing and Authorizing User Groups.

3. Create a user and bind it with a user group according to the data planning.

104 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Note:

For details about creating and authorizing a user, see Creating and
Authorizing Users.

2.9.3 Adjusting Users' Authority - Management Scope

Changes

The following introduces how to adjust the existing authority of a user after an NE is
added and the management scope is changed.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario Introduction

A new NE Device05 is added, and is to be monitored by inspector A and maintained

by maintainer B. The figure below shows the original management authority of
inspector A and maintainer B.

Version: A 105
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Configuration Suggestion

User's Original Authority Analysis Description

Inspector Group is
Inspector A
bound with the non- Operation authority: The device type of
belongs to the
default object set new device Device05 is the same as that
non-default
Object Set A and non- of Device01 and Device03. Therefore, the
user group
default operation set adjustment does not involve operation
Inspector
Inspector Operation authority changes, and the relevant In this example, you can
Group.
Set. operation set does not need to be add Device05 to Object
adjusted. Set A to satisfy the
Maintainer Group is
Maintainer B Management domain: This adjustment authority adjustment
bound with the non-
belongs to the requirement involves administrative requirements.
default object set
non-default domain changes. Because the original
Object Set A and non-
user group user group has the NE adding operation
default operation set
Maintainer authority, the authority of the original
Maintainer Operation
Group. device is not affected. Therefore, you can
Set.
add Device05 to the original object set A.

106 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Procedure

Add Device 05 to object set A. For details, see Creating a Customized Object Set.

2.9.4 Adjusting Users' Authority - Operation Authority

Changes

The following takes deleting specific authority of an existing UNM2000 user as an

example to introduce how to adjust the authority of existing users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Scenario Introduction

Delete the Modify NE authority of UNM2000 user A.

Configuration Suggestion

User's Original Authority Analysis Description

The authority adjustment

requirement in this example
Operator Group A In this example, you need to
does not involve any
is bound with the unbind the user set
changes of the
non-default object Operator Group A with the
management domain, and
set Object Set A. operation set Assembly of
therefore no adjustment to
Application Operators and
the object set is needed.
UNM2000 then bind it with a new
As the authority adjustment
user A operation set Assembly of
requirement in this example
belongs to Application Operators A.
involves changes of
the non- If there is another user, for
operation authority and
default example user B, who
Operator Group A modifying the default
user group requires the Modify NE
is bound with the operation set is not
Operator authority in the user group,
default operation recommended, you need to
Group A. you need to remove the
set Assembly of create an operation set
user B from Operator
Application Assembly of Application
Group A and then re-
Operators. Operators A that includes
assign authority to the user
all the operation authority in
A. This circumstance is not
Assembly of Application
considered in this example.
Operators except the
Modify NE authority.

Version: A 107
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Create Assembly of Application Operators A.

Create Assembly of Application Operators A and select all the authority in

"Assembly of Application Operators" with Modify NE removed.

For details about how to create a user-defined operation set, see Customizing
Operation Sets.

2. Modify the operation authority of Operator Group A.

Unbind the user with the operation set Assembly of Application Operators
and then bind it with a new operation set Assembly of Application Operators
A.

For details about how to modify operation authority of the user group, see
Customizing and Authorizing User Groups.

Operation Result

If user A has logged in, log the user out of the system and then re-log into the
system to validate the settings. After re-login, user A does not have the authority to
modify NEs.

2.9.5 Adjusting Users' Authority - Position Changes

This section introduces the related operations of the position changes when user A
quits.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

Background Information

u When a user account is not used temporarily, you can suspend it. The
suspended account cannot log in to the UNM2000.

u The users in the "Security Admin Group" can enable or suspend all the users
except themselves and admin.

108 Version: A
 2 Security Management

u The users in the "Domain Security Admin Group" can enable or suspend the
users created by them.

u The admin user cannot be suspended.

Scenario Introduction

User A quits, and the account needs to be reserved.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node, and
select user A.

3. In the Basic Information tab on the right, select Suspend Account and click
Apply.

2.10 User Security Management

You can effectively improve the security of the UNM2000 and prevent unauthorized
operations by means of password management, locking management, and login
user monitoring.

2.10.1 Locking the Terminal

Locking the UNM2000 terminal can prevent others from operating the client without
permissions.

Procedure

The UNM2000 supports the following terminal locking modes:

Unlocking Mode Procedure

Select System→Lock the Terminal to open the The window is
Manual locking
locked dialog box.

The client will be automatically locked when no operations are

performed in the specified time duration.
Automatic locking
Note: You can set the automatic locking time by referring to Setting the
GUI Display.

Version: A 109
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Related Operations

u Unlocking the terminal: Click Unlock in the The window is locked dialog box.
Enter the password in the displayed dialog box and click Login.

u Logging off the account after the terminal is locked: In the The window is
locked dialog box, click Logout. Then click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

2.10.2 Logging Out Users

The following introduces how to log out the current user.

Procedure

1. Select System→Logout from the main menu.

2. In the dialog box that appears, click Yes to log out the user. You need to restart
the UNM2000 to log in.

Related Operation

Log off the account after the terminal is locked: On the The window is locked
dialog box, click Logout. Then click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

2.10.3 Modifying the User Password

User passwords must be periodically changed to ensure access security of the

UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You have learned about the user password policies. For details, see Setting the
Password Policy.

Procedure

1. Select System→Change Password from the main menu.

2. In the displayed Change Password dialog box, set Old Password, New
Password and Confirm Password.

110 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Note:

The new password must comply with password policies. Otherwise, the
system will display an error prompt.

3. Click OK.

2.10.4 Reminding Users to Modify Password upon Expiration

When the password expires, the system will remind users to modify the password
manually.

Background Information

u You have set the remaining days for the system to remind the user when the
password is about to expire on the UNM2000.

u You have set the lifespan of the password on the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Log into the UNM2000 using an expired password. An alert box indicating that
the password expired appears.

2. Click Close. The Modify User Current Password dialog box appears. Set the
new password and click OK. You can then log into the UNM2000 using the new
password.

Version: A 111
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2.10.5 Resetting a User Password

In case a user forgets the password, the password expires or the user login is
denied, the security administrator needs to reset the password for the user.

Background Information

u A user in Security Admin Group can reset the passwords for all the users
except admin, security administrators, and himself / herself.

u The password of the security administrator is reset by admin.

u The admin user cannot reset his / her own password. Therefore, the password
of admin must be properly kept.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node. Right-
click a desired user and select Reset Password.

3. In the Reset Password dialog box, set New Password and Confirm
Password, and then click OK.

112 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Note:

If Modify the Password at Next Login is selected, the user must change
the password upon the next login. You are advised to select it to improve
the security of the UNM2000.

2.10.6 Managing Security of Service Passwords

You can manage the passwords of different services and set them visible or not for
different users.

Background Information

The services that require the password authority configuration are as follows:

Service Name Protocol ID

WiFi Service Config 3883
WEB Administrator Config Management
4294
Inquiry

ONU Web Admin Global Config 5380

Remote Management Config 3882
Voice IP Config 1652, 4330, 4015, 3412 and 5654

Voice MD5 Authentication 1658, 3414, 6319 and 5659

Voice Port Config 1659, 4332, 6322, 5428 and 5672

PPPoE With NGN Uplinked 3041

Version: A 113
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Service Name Protocol ID

NGN Configuration 3042, 4178 and1925
IAD MD5 Configuration 3047
WAN Service 3884, 2612 and 19002

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Security→Business Password Security Management from the main

menu to open the Business Password Security Management tab.

2. Select a user from the left browse tree.

3. Set whether to display the password of a service by selecting / deselecting the

Password Visible check box in the right pane.

4. Click Apply to apply the settings.

5. Click Copy Privilege to User to open the Select User dialog box. Select a
user and copy the authority of viewing the service password to the user.

114 Version: A
 2 Security Management

2.10.7 Unlocking a UNM2000 User

If a user is automatically locked due to consecutive input of incorrect passwords, the

user can wait until the system automatically unlocks the user or request the security
administrator to manually unlock the user. After being unlocked, the user can
normally log into the UNM2000.

Background Information

u A user is automatically locked due to consecutive inputs of incorrect passwords.

After being locked, the user cannot log into the UNM2000. The limit on the
number of consecutive inputs of incorrect passwords can be set by referring to
Setting the Account Policy.

u A user in Security Administrator Group can unlock the users except the
admin and security administrators.

u The security administrator is unlocked by admin.

u The admin user cannot be manually unlocked. Therefore, the password of

admin must be properly kept.

Procedure

The UNM2000 supports the following account unlocking modes:

Unlocking Mode Procedure

To unlock an account manually, perform the following steps:
1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.
Unlocking the user
2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User
manually
node.
3. Right-click a desired user and select Unlock.

A locked user cannot log into the UNM2000 until it is automatically

Unlocking the user unlocked after a specified time period.
automatically Note 1: You can set the automatic unlocking time referring to
Setting the Account Policy.

2.10.8 Locking a User Group

The UNM2000 can lock a user group, so that users in the user group cannot log in
to the UNM2000.

Version: A 115
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management from the main menu. Click User
Group in the left pane to expand the User Group node.

2. Right-click a user group such as Inspector Group and select Lock.

Note:

If a user in the locked user group logs in to the system, the system
reports an error. The user group must be unlocked to enable the user
login.

2.10.9 Unlocking a User Group

The UNM2000 supports user group unlocking.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Security Admin Group or higher authority.

116 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. Choose Security→NMS User Management from the main menu. Click User
Group in the left pane to expand the User Group node.

2. Right-click a user group such as Inspector Group and select Unlock.

2.10.10 Monitoring User Sessions

By monitoring user sessions, you can understand the information of the online users.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a member of Security Administrator

Group.

Background Information

u Session: The connection set up between the client and the server. The session
starts at login of the client and ends at exit of the client.

u When the user login mode is set to Multi-User Mode, one user account can log
into multiple clients at the same time. You can specify the maximum number of
concurrent online users using a same account in Advanced dialog box of the
Basic Information tab. For details, see Creating and Authorizing Users.

u When a client has multiple IP addresses, the value of the IP Address field is
selected randomly from these IP addresses.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

Version: A 117
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. On the Monitoring User Session tab, view the online users and their session
information.

Other Operation

u On the Monitoring User Session tab, click Refresh to refresh the current
page.

u Select and the page is automatically refreshed every 30 seconds.

u Force other users to log out according to Logging Out Users.

u Send messages to other users according to Sending Messages to Online

Users.

2.10.11 Logging Out Users

By monitoring user sessions, you can view the information of the online users and
log out the users who may influence the system security as needed, so as to ensure
the system security.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin Group.

Background Information

u Only uses belonging to Security Admin Group can forcibly log out other users.
The other security administrators other than admin can forcibly log out only
non-security administrator users.

u The current login user cannot forcibly log out sessions corresponding to the
current login.

u The forced exit operation only forces the user account that generates the
corresponding session to log out. For example, if the user account user logs
into the same UNM2000 server via client ends A and B, sessions a and b will
be generated respectively. When the account user generating session a is
forced to exit, the account user generating session b is not influenced.

118 Version: A
 2 Security Management

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

2. Right-click the corresponding user session, and select Forced Offline from the
shortcut menu.

Note:

You can select multiple user sessions concurrently to perform the forced
exit operation.

3. Enter the reasons in the Forced Offline dialog box, and click OK.

2.10.12 Sending Messages to Online Users

Sending messages to online users implements convenient communication between

users.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a user belonging to Security Admin Group.

Background Information

The UNM2000 does not support the user of the current session sending messages
to himself or herself.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Monitor User Session.

2. Send messages to the user of the specified session.

Version: A 119
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Sending To Operation

Right-click the corresponding session, select Send Message, enter the content and
A single object
click OK.
1. Select multiple sessions using the Ctrl or Shift key.
Multiple objects 2. Right-click the desired sessions, select Send Message, enter the content and
click OK.
1. Select all sessions using the Ctrl+A keys.
2. Hold down the Ctrl key and click the session of the current user to deselect the
current user.

All other objects

3. Right-click the desired sessions, select Send Message, enter the content and
click OK.

2.10.13 Monitoring User Activity Information

The following introduces how to monitor user account activity information to prevent
unauthorized user operations.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM2000 as a member of Security Administrator

Group.

Procedure

1. Select Security→NMS User Management from the main menu.

2. On the NMS User Management browse tree, expand the User node.

120 Version: A
 2 Security Management

3. Click a user and click Activity Info in the right pane to view the activity
information of the user.

Version: A 121
3 Configuration Management

The configuration management means the operations to configure the information of

the network and the system equipment, and is the most significant management
function of the UNM2000.

NE Communication Route Management

SNMP Parameter Template

ONU Capability Set Template

Managing Global Templates

Managing Global Configurations

Signaling Tracing

Configuration Synchronization

Network Access Status Management

Pinging NEs

Telneting NEs

WEB Configuration

The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server

Migrating the PON Configuration

Synchronizing the Device Capabilities

Synchronizing the Device Version Information

122 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

3.1 NE Communication Route Management

By using the NE communication route management function, you can set the
Manager server IP address and the Trap receiver address. The following introduces
how to manage NE communication routes.

Note:

You can configure multiple EMS server addresses when using distributed
deployment mode of EMS servers.

3.1.1 NE Management Program

The NE management program is used to set the communication protocol between

the UNM2000 and the device. Only when the NE management program is correctly
configured can normal communication between the UNM2000 and the device be
ensured so as to manage devices through the UNM2000.

3.1.1.1 Creating a Manager Program

Correct configuration of the NE manager program is the prerequisite to ensure

normal communication between the UNM2000 and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

Version: A 123
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

u The anm_manager-1507393536(server IP address) is the default

manager program. If no manager program is configured for an NE
during its creation and no partition is matched with the NE, the
default manager program will be selected for the NE.

u Only one NE communication route manager is supported in the

single-instance mode and hence creating new manager programs is
not needed.

2. Right-click Communication Routing Management, and select Create

Management Program from the shortcut menu. Configure various parameters
of the manager program in the displayed dialog box, and click OK.

3.1.1.2 Deleting / Modifying a Manager Program

When the network resource is adjusted or some changes are made to the manager
program that the NE belongs to, you can delete the manager program and then
create a new one or directly modify the manager program to meet your requirement.

Note:

Deleting the default manager program is not supported.

124 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

2. Delete a manager program:

Note:

Deleting the default manager program is not supported.

1) In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, right-

click the manager program and select Delete the Manager from the
shortcut menu.

2) Click OK in the dialog box that appears to complete deleting the manager
program.

3. Modify a manager program:

1) In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, right-

click the manager program and select Manager Property from the
shortcut menu.

2) Modify the parameters as needed in the Manager Properties dialog box

that appears, and then click OK.

3) Click Yes to save the modifications.

Version: A 125
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

1. In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, click

before the manager and Pass-through in sequence.The right pane displays
the list of pass-through NEs managed by the manager program.

2. Right-click an NE and select the corresponding operation from the shortcut

menu: Cancel Manager Management, Copy NE, Delete NE, modify NE
Attribute, etc.

Note:

Copy NE is used to create an NE of the same type. After copying an NE,

you only need to modify the different parameters such as the IP address.
In this way, NEs can be created rapidly.

3.1.1.3 Pre-configuration

The NEs in the Pre-configured communication NE list are those without manager
program.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

126 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

2. In the left pane of the Communication Routing Management tab, click

before the manager and Pass-through in sequence.

3. Right-click a certain NE in the Pass-through NE List of the Manager in the

right pane and select Cancel Manager Management from the shortcut menu.
This NE is moved to Pre-configured NE list.

Subsequent Operation

1. Right-click a certain NE in the pre-configured common NE list and select Select

Management Object from the shortcut menu, or click a certain NE in the pre-
configured common NE list and click the Select Management Object button to
select a manager program for the NE again.

2. Click OK. The NE is moved to the pass-through NE list.

3.1.2 Partition Policy Management

For the distributed multi-instance deployment, the EMS has multiple manager
programs. The partition policy can be used to allocate the NEs to different manager
programs according to the specified start IP address and end IP address of each
partition. New NEs are automatically allocated to the corresponding manager
program for management according to the partition policy.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Communication Route Management to open the

Communication Routing Management tab.

Version: A 127
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Right-click Partition Policy Management in the left pane and select Create a
Partition from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, set the
parameters and click OK.

Note:

u Manager Name: Indicates the name of the created manager

program.

u After the partition is created

4 If a manager program is not configured for an NE during its
creation, the UNM2000 will automatically assign an existing
manager program to the NE according to the partition to which
the NE's IP address belongs.
4 If a manager program is configured for an NE during its creation,
and is inconsistent with the manager program of the partition to
which the NE's IP address belongs, this manager program is still
preferred.

Other Operations

Right-click a partition entry and select Create a Partition, Modify Partition or

Delete the Partition from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

128 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

3.2 SNMP Parameter Template

To ensure the communication between the EMS and the NE, it is necessary to
configure the SNMP parameters of NEs at the UNM2000.

You can directly configure the SNMP parameters of NEs at the UNM2000 side,
create NEs manually, or automatically apply the SNMP parameters by using the
applicable SNMP parameter template upon NE automatic discovery.

3.2.1 Creating and Using an SNMP Parameter Template

You can manage the SNMP parameter templates used for communication between
the UNM2000 server and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Background Information

The system provides the default SNMP parameter templates as shown below. The
SNMP parameter template named default cannot be deleted or modified. If no
SNMP parameter template is set upon NE creation, the SNMP parameter template
named default will be used for access NEs by default, and the SNMP parameter
template named default_Switch will be used for switch NEs by default.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→SNMP Parameter Template from the main menu to open

the SNMP Parameter Template Management tab.

2. Click Create to open the SNMP Parameter Template dialog box, set various
parameters and click Create.

Version: A 129
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Right-click the specific template and select Bind NE from the shortcut menu to
open the Select Bound NE dialog box. Select the NE to be bound and click
OK.

4. After the NE is bound, the information on the NE bound with the SNMP
parameter template will be displayed in the Binding NE Information pane.

Other Operations

Change the SNMP parameter template bound with the NE.

1. In the main topology window, right-click the NE and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu. The Attribute Page pane appears on the right.

2. In the Attribute Page pane, click the SNMP parameter template field and
select a new template from the drop-down list to change the SNMP parameter
template bound with the NE.

130 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

3. Click to save the modification.

Version: A 131
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.2.2 Modifying / Deleting an SNMP Parameter Template

You can manage the SNMP parameter templates used for communication between
the UNM2000 server and the NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Background Information

The SNMP parameter template named default is the default template and cannot
be deleted.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→SNMP Parameter Template from the main menu to open

the SNMP Parameter Template Management tab.

2. On the SNMP Parameter Template Management tab, select the SNMP

parameter template to be modified or deleted.

4 Modifying: Click the Modify button, or right-click to select Modify from the
shortcut menu. In the SNMP Parameter Template dialog box that appears,
modify the template as required.

4 Deleting: Click the Delete button, or right-click to select Delete from the
shortcut menu to delete the template.

132 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Note:

The SNMP parameter template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

3.3 ONU Capability Set Template

The current method of adapting to the NE by adding the ONU type code cannot be
meet the ever-increasing requirements for adaptation of new terminal types.

With the ONU capability set template, you can configure the parameters such as
ONU port quantity, port type and resource type. The UNM2000 can deliver it to the
device to support the new type of ONU in real time, which quickly meets the
adaptation requirements without upgrading the device.

3.3.1 Creating an ONU Capability Set Template

You can create an ONU capability set template, configure the parameters such as
ONU port quantity, port type and resource type and then deliver it to the device to
quickly adapt to the new ONU.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The ONU capability set template is enabled.

1) Open the server configuration file platform-options.ini in the directory D:

\unm2000\server\etc.

2) Modify the parameters:

#ONU capability set template
[OnuCapability]
enable = true; true - enable the ONU
capability set function, false -
disable the ONU capability set function

Procedure

1. Select Configure→ONU Capability Profile from the main menu to open the
ONU Capability Profile tab.

Version: A 133
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Click , or right-click in the blank area of the ONU Capability Profile tab and
select Create Profile from the shortcut menu.

3. In the displayed Create a ONU Capability Profile dialog box, set various
parameters and click OK.

134 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Other Operations

Binding an ONU capability set template

1. On the ONU Capability Profile tab, right-click the specified template. Select
Binding to NE from the shortcut menu to open the Select Bound NE dialog
box.

2. Select the NE to be bound and click OK. After the NE is bound, the information
of the bound NE will be displayed in the NE Bind State pane on the right.

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

3.3.2 Modifying an ONU Capability Set Template

When the ONU capability set template cannot meet the user requirement, you can
modify the template as needed.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The ONU capability set template is enabled.

1) Open the server configuration file platform-options.ini in the directory D:

\unm2000\server\etc.

2) Modify the parameters:

#ONU capability set template
[OnuCapability]
enable = true; true - enable the ONU capability
set function, false - disable the ONU capability
set function

Procedure

1. Select Configure→ONU Capability Profile from the main menu to open the
ONU Capability Profile tab.

2. Select an ONU capability set template and click or right-click to select

Modify Profile from the shortcut menu.

Version: A 135
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be modified.

Other Operations

Deleting an ONU capability set template

1. On the ONU Capability Profile tab, select an ONU capability set template and

click or right-click to select Delete Profile from the shortcut menu.

Note:
The ONU capability set template bound with an NE cannot be deleted.

3.4 Managing Global Templates

A template is a set of attributes with specific values. For example, if a template is

referenced to configure the resources, such as ADSL or G.SHDSL port, the
parameter values of the attributes preset in the template will be automatically
adopted by the resource.

You can use a template to configure multiple NEs of the same model in the
management domain of the entire network by using the global profile, so as to
improve the project start-up efficiency.

3.4.1 Viewing Global Templates

You can configure multiple NEs of the same type in the management domain of the
entire network in a batch manner by using the global template, so as to improve the
project start-up efficiency.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

136 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an

example. You can follow the same procedures to view other templates
with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the
ADSL Line Profile tab.

3. Click a template entry on the ADSL Line Profile tab to view the template
information.

Other Operations

On the ADSL Line Profile tab, right-click a template entry and select Add, Delete,
Batch Modify, Compare Templates, or Bind to System Card / Port to perform the
corresponding operation.

3.4.2 Adding a Global Template

When the existing global templates do not meet the requirements or new global
templates are needed, follow the steps below to add global templates.

Version: A 137
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an

example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation
on other templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the
ADSL Line Profile tab.

3. Click to open the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box, enter the
number of entries to be added and click OK.

4. On the ADSL Line Profile tab, double-click each parameter field to manually
enter the data or select the data from the drop-down list, click to select the
saving range, and then click OK.

Note:

u Global Template Name is mandatory.

u The system automatically generates Global Template ID.

138 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

3.4.3 Modifying a Global Template

When the existing global templates do not meet your requirements, you can create
global templates by following operations.

Background Information

u You can only modify the parameter settings of a template with the template
name unchanged after the global template is saved.

u The UNM2000 automatically updates the modified parameter settings of the

template.

If the template is bound with a device, the modified and saved parameter
settings of the template are automatically delivered to the device.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an

example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation
on other templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the
ADSL Line Profile tab.

3. On the ADSL Line Profile tab, right-click the desired template and select
Batch Modify from the shortcut menu to open the Modify in a batch manner
dialog box.

Version: A 139
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Modify the parameter settings in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box and
click Apply→OK at the lower part to save the changes.

Note:

Select the Select check boxes and the Modify the Selected Rows at the
lower part to modify the settings of the selected parameters.

3.4.4 Binding / Unbinding a Global Template

You can bind a global template with a device so that the parameter settings of the
device are consistent with those set in the global template in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

140 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile of the AN5006-20 as an

example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the operation
on other templates with the only difference in the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. Select Global Profile→ADSL Line Profile under the AN5006-20 to open the
ADSL Line Profile tab.

3. Select the desired template and click the button, or right-click it and select
Save to System from the shortcut menu to open the Select Object dialog box.
Select the system to be bound and click OK.

4. Bind a card / port (for the template to be bound with a card / port).

1) Select the desired template and click the button, or right-click it and
select Bind to System Card / Port from the shortcut menu to open the
Please select card port dialog box. Click to expand the NE, ONU, card

Version: A 141
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

and port in sequence, select the check box of the desired object, and click
OK.

5. Unbind a template.

1) On the ADSL Line Profile tab, click .

2) In the displayed Select Object dialog box, select the device information
and click OK to unbind the template from the device.

Other Operations

Select the shortcut menu or click the button on the toolbar to perform the
corresponding operation on the template, such as Delete, Batch Modify, Delete
from System and Compare Templates.

3.4.5 Deleting a Global Template

When a global template is no longer needed, you can delete it.

142 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The template to be deleted is not bound with any device; otherwise, see
Binding / Unbinding a Global Template to unbind the template from the device.

Note:

The following uses the ADSL Line Profile as an example. You can follow
the same procedures to delete other templates with the only difference in
the access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select ADSL Line Profile to display the ADSL Line Profile
tab.

3. Click to open the Configure the Selection Range dialog box, select the
corresponding range according to the quantity of templates to be deleted and
then click OK.

3.5 Managing Global Configurations

The global configuration is a set of attributes with specific values. You can use the
global configuration to configure multiple NEs of the same type in the management
domain of the entire network in a batch manner (not using templates), so as to
improve the project start-up efficiency.

Version: A 143
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.5.1 Viewing the Global Configurations

You can configure multiple NEs of the same type in the management domain of the
entire network in a batch manner (not using templates), so as to improve the project
start-up efficiency.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The following uses the Voip Service Vlan under Voice Service Config
of the AN5006-30 as an example. You can follow the same procedures to
view other global configurations with the only difference in the access
method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5006-30→Global Config→Voice Service Config→

Voip Service Vlan to display the Voip Service Vlan tab and view the existing
voice VLAN configuration data.

3.5.2 Adding the Global Configurations

When the existing global configurations do not meet the requirements or new global
configurations are needed, follow the steps below to add the global configurations.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

144 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Note:

The following uses Igmp Mode under Service Config of the AN5516 as
an example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the
operation on other global configurations with the only difference in the
access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5516/AN6000/AN6001→Global Config→Service

Config→Igmp Mode to display the Igmp Mode tab.

3. Click to open the Enter the number of rows to add dialog box, enter the
number of entries to be added and click OK.

4. On the Igmp Mode tab, complete the parameter settings and click . Then
the system automatically generates Global Configuration ID.

Note:

Global Configuration Name is mandatory.

3.5.3 Modifying the Global Configurations

When the existing global configurations do not meet your requirements, you can
modify the global configurations according to your needs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 145
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The following uses the IGMP Mode under Service Config of the AN5516
as an example. You can follow the same procedures to perform the
operation on other global configurations with the only difference in the
access method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5516/AN6000/AN6001→Global Config→Service

Config→Igmp Mode to display the Igmp Mode tab.

3. On the Igmp Mode tab, right-click the desired configuration entry and select
Batch Modify from the shortcut menu to open the Batch Modify dialog box.

4. Modify the parameter settings in the Batch Modify dialog box and click Apply
→OK at the lower part to save the changes.

3.5.4 Issuing the Global Configurations to a Device

The following introduces how to issue the global configurations to the corresponding
device so that the device parameter is consistent with the global configuration
parameter in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The following uses the ARP Proxy Switch under Service Config of the
AN5516 as an example. You can follow the same procedures to perform
the operation on other global configurations with the only difference in the
access method.

146 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5516/AN6000/AN6001→Global Config→Service

Config→ARP Proxy Switch to open the ARP Proxy Switch tab.

3. Select a configuration entry and click the button, or right-click it and select
Save to Database from the shortcut menu to open the Configure the
Selection Range dialog box. Select the range and click OK.

4. Select a configuration entry and click the button, or right-click it and select
Save Configuration to Device from the shortcut menu to open the Configure
the Selection Range dialog box. Select the desired NE and click OK.

3.5.5 Deleting the Global Configurations

You can delete the global configurations that are no longer needed.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The following uses the Voip Service Vlan under Voice Service Config
of the AN5006-30 as an example. You can follow the same procedures to
delete other global configurations with the only difference in the access
method.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Global Template Manager from the main menu to open

the Global Template Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select AN5006-30→Global Config→Voice Service Config→

Voip Service Vlan to open the Voip Service Vlan tab.

3. Select the global configuration entry to be deleted, and click to delete it.

Version: A 147
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.6 Signaling Tracing

Tracing the signaling is used to trace the signaling frame of the communication
between the current IAD and the voice communication card, so as to find the
communication faults in a timely manner.

Background Information

This function is currently only supported by the FTTH-type and FTTB-type ONUs
that support voice services.

Prerequisite

Set the Enable Signal Trace Report field of the traced object to Enable on the
SNMP TRAP Receiver IP tab (NE Manager→Local Service Config).

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Configure→Signaling Tracing to open the Select

Signaling Tracing Object dialog box.

2. Select the traced object in the displayed dialog box to access the Signal Trace
tab.

3. Click Start to perform signaling tracing.

148 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

3.7 Configuration Synchronization

The configuration synchronization function implements the comparison between the

configuration data in the UNM2000 and those on the device. If any difference is
detected, the corresponding data will be downloaded or uploaded to ensure
consistency of the configurations.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Configuration Synchronization from the main menu to

display the Configuration Synchronization tab.

2. Click Add NE to open the Add NE dialog box, select the object to be compared
and click OK. The Configuration Synchronization tab displays the added NE
whose configurations are to be synchronized.

3. Select the object to be compared in the configuration NE list, and click

Configuration Comparison to compare the configurations.

4. View the comparison result in the lower part of the Configuration Comparison
tab.

Version: A 149
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

When the comparison result shows inconsistency in configurations, you can click
Upload Configurations or Download Configurations to upload or download the
configurations according to Table 3-1.

Table 3-1 Configuration Uploading / Downloading

Button Description

Uploads the configuration data of devices to the network

Upload Configurations
management database.

Downloads the configuration data from the network

Download Configurations
management database to devices.

3.8 Network Access Status Management

The network access management helps you analyze and observe the resource
interconnection status and network access status of the system and the line card.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→Network Access Status Management from the main

menu to open the Network Access Status Management tab.

2. Select the desired object in the object tree and click the Query button to query
the resource management system interconnection status and registration
status of the object.

150 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

3. Select the system / line card to be registered in the object tree, and click the
Send RMS or Send Selected RMS button to enable the interconnection with
the resource management system.

4. Select the system / line card to be registered and click the Initiate Registration
or Initiate Selected Line Cards button.

5. Click the Write Database or Read Database button to write the configuration
into the database or read the configuration from the database.

3.9 Pinging NEs

The Ping operation is used to check whether the communication between NEs and
the EMS is normal.

Procedure

1. In the main topology or NE manager, right-click the specific NE and select

Tools→Ping from the shortcut menu. In the displayed Command Tool dialog
box, view the Ping operation result.

3.10 Telneting NEs

When the UNM2000 client cannot access the device directly, it can access the
device via Telnet or access the Telnet proxy server to perform operations via CLI.
Setting the Telnet / SSH Proxy Server describes how to set the Telnet proxy server.

Procedure

1. In the main topology or NE manager, right-click the specific NE and select

Tools→Telnet from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed Command Tool dialog box, enter the username and password
to log into the CLI and perform operations via the CLI.

Version: A 151
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.11 WEB Configuration

The UNM2000 provides the Web configuration access to call a third-party Web
network management system to manage devices. Currently, only the S2208G-PAF
device supports this function.

Procedure

Right-click an S2208G-PAF NE, and select Tools→Web Config from the shortcut
menu to call a Web network management system to manage the S2208G-PAF NE.

3.12 The Tracert Function of the UNM2000 Server

The UNM2000 supports sending the Tacert packet from the UNM2000 server to the
specified IP address.

Background Information

The Tracert (tracing the route) function is used to test the gateway that the data
packet passes from the source host to the destination. It mainly checks whether the
network connection is normal and locates the failure in the network. The Tracert
command uses the IP Time to Live (TTL) field and the ICMP error message to
determine the route from a host to another host in the network.

The command is Tracert on Windows OS and Traceroute on UNIX OS.

Prerequisite

u The authority of the Tracert function is configured in the authority and domain
division management. Only the user properly authorized can perform the
Tracert function.

u At present, it only needs to support sending the Tracert packet to the IP

address in the IPv4 format, and it does not need to support sending the Tracert
packet to the IP address in the IPv6 format and the host domain name.

Procedure

1. In the left Object Tree pane of the Main Topology tab, right-click Local NMS
and select Server tracert from the shortcut menu.

152 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

2. In the Server Tracert Tool command dialog box, enter the specified IP address
and press Enter. The Tracert result appears in the command dialog box.

3.13 Migrating the PON Configuration

The UNM2000 supports PON configuration migration as well as the PON port
configuration migration.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→PON Configuration Migration from the main menu to

open the Operation Instructions alert box.

2. Click OK to display the PON Configuration Migration tab.

3. Set the parameters, such as source OLT and destination OLT.

4. Click Execute.

5. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

Version: A 153
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3.14 Synchronizing the Device Capabilities

This UNM2000 supports synchronizing the device capability.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the left browsing tree of the main topology, right-click an NE and select
Synchronize Equipment Capability.

2. An alert box appears at the lower right corner, prompting synchronization

success of device capability.

3.15 Synchronizing the Device Version

Information

This UNM2000 supports synchronizing the device version information.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the left browsing tree of the main topology, right-click an NE and select
Version Synchronization.

2. An alert box appears at the lower right corner, prompting synchronization

success of device version.

154 Version: A
 3 Configuration Management

Version: A 155
4 Topology Management

The topology management is used to create and manage the topology architecture
of the entire network, so as to present the network connection status and operating
status of the equipment. You can view the topology objects and real-time alarm
prompts in the topology view.

Topology Creation Flow

Creating a Global Logical Domain

Creating NEs

Creating Extended Subracks

Adding Cards

Replacing Cards

Creating a Link

Editing an NE

Editing a Fiber Connection

Browsing the Topology View

Deleting the Topology

Failure Cases

156 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

4.1 Topology Creation Flow

The creation flow of the network topology describes the creation procedures of the
subnets, NEs, cards and links as well as the relationship among the operation tasks.
Figure 4-1 describes the creation flow of the network topology.

Figure 4-1 Flow for Creating the Network Topology

In the creation flowchart, the horizontal procedures indicate the four phases of the
network topology creation: creating the subnet, creating the NE, creating the card
and creating the link; the vertical procedures indicate the operation tasks included in
each phase.

Table 4-1 describes the creation flow of the network topology.

Table 4-1 Description of the Network Topology Creation Flow

Procedure Operation Description

Manage Create a global For convenient management, the topological objects in the same area or of the
subnets logical domain similar attributes can be placed in the same logical domain.

To manage the physical devices through the UNM2000, you need to create the
Add an NE corresponding NEs in the UNM2000. Creating NEs includes creating the
access NE and virtual NE, and discovering the NE automatically.

Configure the NE The NEs are not configured after being created. Before managing the NEs via
data the UNM2000, you need to configure the NE data first.
Manage NEs
The NE ID is the unique identifier of the NE. During the network planning, each
NE must be assigned a unique ID. In case of NE ID conflicts, the route conflicts
Modify the NE ID will occur and consequently some NEs cannot be managed. To adjust the
original planning and modify the NE ID during debugging or capacity
expansion, you can modify it through the UNM2000.

Version: A 157
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 4-1 Description of the Network Topology Creation Flow (Continued)

Procedure Operation Description

Modify the NE You can modify the NE name as needed at any time. Modifying the NE name
name does not influence the running of the NE.

If an inappropriate NE is created, you can delete it in the UNM2000. Deleting an

Delete the NE NE leads to loss of all information related to the NE in the UNM2000; however,
this does not influence the running of the device.

If a physical card is added after the NE data are manually configured, you need
Add a card
Manage to add the card on the NE panel.
cards When the network configurations change or the card configurations of an NE
Delete the card
need to be modified, you can delete the card from the NE panel.

Add a link You can create links, cables as well as virtual fibers on the UNM2000.

Modify the link You can modify the name, attenuation, length and type of the link according the
Manage links information connection status and physical features of the link.

To delete an NE or change the fiber connection between NEs during network

Delete the link
adjustment, you need to delete the link between the NEs.

4.2 Creating a Global Logical Domain

For convenient management of NEs, you can customize logical domains and place
the NEs in the same area or of the same attribute into a same logic domain. A
logical domain is a set of various NEs, and sub logical domains can be created
under it. For example, you can create a logical domain named Site A, and then
create sub logical domains such as Area 1 and Area 2 under Site A.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Create Logical Domain from the main menu to open the
Create Global Logical Domain dialog box.

2. In the Create Global Logical Domain dialog box, set various parameters,
among which Name is required and other parameters are optional.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created logical domain appears
in the main topology.

158 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Other Operations

Right-click the logical domain and select the desired option from the shortcut menus
to perform the corresponding operation.

4.3 Creating NEs

To manage the physical devices through the UNM2000, you need to create the
corresponding NEs in the UNM2000. There are two ways to create the NEs:Manual
creation and automatic discovery. For creating the network topology architecture,
manual creation of NEs in a batch manner is recommended. For network capacity
expansion, automatic discovery of NEs is recommended.

4.3.1 Creating an Access NE

Only when the access NE is created can the access device be managed via the
UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main topology, right-click to select Create NE→Create Access NE, or

select Resource→Create NE→Create Access NE from the main menu to
open the Create Access NE dialog box.

Version: A 159
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Set the parameters referring to Table 4-2.

Table 4-2 Settings of Creating the Access NE

Parameter Description Remark

NE Type The NE type.

After the NE type is selected, the corresponding subrack

Default Shelf Type Required
(shelf) type will be determined by the system.

NE The name of the NE. It should be easy to recognize.

NE IP Address The IP address of the NE. Optional

NE Mask The mask of the NE.

Optional
NE Gateway The IP address of the NE gateway.

160 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-2 Settings of Creating the Access NE (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main
Alias Name topology displays the alias; If this item is not configured, the
main topology displays the NE name.

NE SN
Manufacturer
Name
Attributes used for identifying the NE.
Remark
Username Optional
Password
Longitude Longitude and latitude of the physical area where the device
Latitude is located, used for locating.

Topo Level Topology layer to which the NE belongs.

Manager program which manages the NE. If this item is not

configured, this NE is managed by the manager program of
Manager its partition; if this item is not configured and no partition -
exists for the NE, the NE is managed by the default
manager program.

The template used for communication between the

SNMP Parameter
UNM2000 server and various NEs. Generally, the default -
Template
template is selected.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created access NE appears in
the logical domain or main topology.

4.3.2 Creating a Switch NE

You can manage a switch via the UNM2000 after creating a switch NE.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. On the main topology tab, right-click in the blank area and select Create NE→
Create Switch NE from the shortcut menu, or select Resource→Create NE→

Version: A 161
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Create Switch NE from the main menu to open the Create Switch NE dialog
box.

2. Set the parameters referring to Table 4-3.

Table 4-3 Settings of Creating a Switch NE

Parameter Description Remark

NE Type NE type of the switch.

Subrack (shelf) type displayed automatically after the NE

Default Shelf Type Required
type is selected.

NE Name of the NE for easy identification.

NE IP Address IP address of the NE in IPv4 / IPv6 format. Optional

NE Mask Mask of the NE in IPv4 / IPv6 format.

NE Gateway IP address of the NE gateway in IPv4 / IPv6 format.

The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main Optional

Alias Name topology displays the alias; If this item is not configured, the
main topology displays the NE name.

162 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-3 Settings of Creating a Switch NE (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

NE SN
Manufacturer
Attributes used for identifying the NE. Optional
Name
Remark
Username
Attributes used for identifying the NE. Optional
Password
Longitude Longitude and latitude of the physical area where the device
Optional
Latitude is located, used for locating.

Topo Level Topology layer to which the NE belongs. Optional

Manager program which manages the NE. If this item is not

configured, this NE is managed by the manager program of
Manager its partition; if this item is not configured and no partition Optional
exists for the NE, the NE is managed by the default
manager program.

Template used for communication between the UNM2000

SNMP Parameter
server and NEs. The default_Switch template is selected Required
Template
by default for creating a switch NE.

3. After the parameters are set, click OK. The created switch NE appears in the
logical domain or main topology.

Note:

After a switch NE is created, the system will automatically create a

subrack. The subrack will contain a virtual core switch card by default for
displaying ports on the switch panel. An S5800 series switch can house
two 10GE cards on the backplane. You need to manually add the
corresponding cards in the NE manager.

4.3.3 Creating Other NEs

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 163
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. On the main topology tab, right-click in the blank area to select Create NE→
Create Other NE from the shortcut menu, or select Resource→Create NE→
Create Other NE from the main menu to open the Create a Virtual NE dialog
box.

2. Set the parameters according to Table 4-4.

Table 4-4 Settings of Creating the Other NEs

Parameter Description Remark

NE Type The NE type.
Required
NE Name The name of the NE for identification.
NE IP Address The IP address of the NE.
The alias of the NE. If this item is configured, the main
Alias Name topology displays the alias; If this item is not configured, the Optional
main topology displays the NE name.

NE SN The NE attribute information used for identifying the NE.

164 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-4 Settings of Creating the Other NEs (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

Manufacturer
Name
Remark
Topo Level The topological level to which the NE belongs.

3. After configuring the parameters, click OK. The created access NE appears in
the logical domain or main topology.

4.3.4 Automatic Discovery of NEs

The UNM2000 supports the NE automatic discovery. You can set the desired IP
segment, in which the NEs will be discovered automatically and created in the
UNM2000. Meanwhile, the configuration data will be uploaded, adding the NEs to
the UNM2000 for management. The NEs that can be automatically detected include
access NEs and switch NEs.

4.3.4.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can view the created NE automatic discovery task to automatically discover the
NE information such as IP address, type and status.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab, to
view the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

4 Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management tab. In the left pane, select Data
Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task.

Version: A 165
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Click the created NE automatic discovery task in the left pane to view the NE IP
address, NE type and status.

4.3.4.2 Creating Automatic NE Discovery Tasks

You can set a task to discover NEs in the specified IP address range and create the
discovered NEs automatically.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Follow an access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab.

4 Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management tab. In the left pane, select Data
Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task.

2. Click the Create button at the bottom of the tab, or right-click Auto Detect NE
Task in the left pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the
Create Auto Detect NE Task dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic Information and Extend Information tabs as
required referring to Table 4-5, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

166 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Table 4-5 Settings of Creating an Automatic NE Discovery Task

Parameter Description Remark

Re-
Task name Name of the automatic NE discovery task
quired

Status of the task. It is selected by default.

Re-
Enable u Select: Enable the scheduled task.
quired
u Deselect: Disable the scheduled task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u One time: The task is executed immediately
after it takes effect.
u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1
Execution Re-
Note 1
to 365.
Basic Cycle quired
u Every week: Select the effective days in
information every week.
u Every month: Select the effective dates in
every month.

Execution Execution time of a periodic task.

time Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic statistics task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss Optional

End time of a periodic statistics task. It is valid

End time after being selected.
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

IP address range of NEs to be automatically

discovered. You can set it as follows.
u Manually add Start IP Address, End IP
Extend IP Address Address and Subnet Mask in IPv4 / IPv6 Re-
information Range format. quired
u Download an excel template, enter the IP
address range in the template, and then
import the template.

Version: A 167
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 4-5 Settings of Creating an Automatic NE Discovery Task (Continued)

Parameter Description Remark

1. Select ANM NE (access NE) or
Interchanger NE (switch NE) for the NE
type to be detected.

2. Click to select an SNMP parameter

template.
Note: By default, the SNMP parameter
template is default for an access NE, and
default_Switch for a switch NE.
Detect
3. Set whether to create NEs automatically. If Re-
Parameter
Auto Create NE is selected, you can set the quired
Settings
name prefix of each NE created
automatically. For example, enter NE in the
text box to the right of Auto Create NE, an
NE created automatically will be named as
NE+NE type_NE IP (NES5800-52T-S-PE(-C)
_10.171.1.202).

4. Click to set the logical domain that

detected NEs belong to.

List of IP addresses to be filtered. That is, NEs

Filter IP List corresponding to listed IP addresses will not be Optional
discovered.
Note 1: When One time is selected for execution cycle, Execution Time / Start Time / End
Time will be automatically hidden on the Basic Information tab.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
another task. This improves the setting efficiency.

Subsequent Operation

If Auto Create NE is not selected during task creation, you can manually create
discovered NEs as follows.

1. On the Policy Task Management tab, expand Auto Detect NE Task in the left
pane to display all tasks.

168 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

2. Click a desired task, and you can view its details in the right pane. If The NE
does not exist is shown in the Status column of an NE, the NE is discovered
but not created.

3. Select an entry containing The NE does not exist, click Create All or Create
Selected NE to create the desired NE.

4.3.4.3 Automatic Discovery of NEs

You can set the system to discover the NEs within the appointed IP address range
as required and create the discovered NE automatically.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Follow the access method below to open the Policy Task Management tab, to
view the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

4 Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu.

4 Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management tab. In the left pane, select Data
Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task.

Version: A 169
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Right-click a corresponding task and select Execute Now from the shortcut
menu, or select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the
tab to execute the NE automatic discovery task.

Note:

When a switch NE is automatically detected and created, the system will

automatically create the shelf and add a virtual core switch card on the
shelf by default, which is used to present the panel port of the switch. For
the 5800 series switches, you can insert two 10GE cards on the
backplane and you need to access the NE manager and add the
corresponding cards.

4.4 Creating Extended Subracks

This section introduces how to create extended subracks.

Background Information

u The supported device types include: AN5516-06 and AN5116-06B.

u Each NE supports creating at most two extended subracks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. On Device Tree of the NE manager, right-click an NE and select Create

Expand Subrack from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Subrack dialog box, set the parameters such as Child Subrack
Number, Subrack Type and Subrack Name, and click OK.

170 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

4. View the extended subrack created on the Device Tree.

Related Operation

u Add all cards: Right-click the extended subrack and select Add All Cards from
the shortcut menu.

u Delete subracks: Right-click the extended subrack and select Delete Subrack
from the shortcut menu.

u View the subrack attributes: Right-click the extended subrack and select
Attribute from the shortcut menu. Then view the subrack attributes in the
Property Page pane.

4.5 Adding Cards

After configuring the NE data, you need to add cards in the NEs. You can manually
add cards or have the cards added automatically.

Version: A 171
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.5.1 Adding Cards Automatically

The physical configuration detection function enables the automatic discovery of

physical cards, which then can be synchronized to the UNM2000 automatically
through the synchronization operation.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Detect Physical Configuration from the main menu to

open the Detect Physical Configuration tab.

2. Select the system to be detected in the object tree pane, and click Detect
Physical Configuration (D) at the lower part of the tab to execute the
detection command. Then you can view the information of the detected cards
and ports.

3. Select the synchronization mode according to Table 4-6, and click the
Synchronize All button to synchronize the configurations of detected cards to
the UNM2000.

Table 4-6 Synchronization Mode

Synchronization Mode Meaning

Only synchronizes the configurations of added physical cards

Incremental
(against the current configurations in the UNM2000).

Overwrites the current configurations in the UNM2000 with the

Overwritten
newest physical card configurations.

172 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

4.5.2 Adding Cards Manually

You can add cards manually or pre-configure the cards as required.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The NE has been created.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager

from the shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. Add the card.

4 Adding all cards

a) Right-click the subrack in the device tree and select Add All Cards
from the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes. The UNM2000 adds all the
cards to the recommended locations respectively.

c) Right-click the card and select Delete Card / Replace Card from the
shortcut menu to adjust the inserted cards according to the quantity
and location of actual cards of the project.

4 Adding a single card

Right-click the slot of the card in the subrack view and select Add Card→
Add XXX Card from the shortcut menu according to the actual cards and
card location in the project.

Subsequent Operation

5.5 describes how to authorize the added cards and deliver the configuration to the
devices.

4.6 Replacing Cards

You can replace cards as required.

Version: A 173
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The NE has been created.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager

from the shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. In Subrack View, right-click a card and select Replace Card and select the
desired card.

Subsequent Operation

5.5 describes how to authorize the added cards and deliver the configuration to the
devices.

4.7 Creating a Link

You can configure services in the UNM2000 after creating the corresponding link in
the main topology.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u NE and card data are configured.

174 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view, and select Create
Virtual Link from the shortcut menu to open the Create Virtual Link dialog
box.

2. Set the parameters referring to Table 4-7.

The table below describes required and common link configuration items only.
Adopt default settings for other items.

Table 4-7 Settings of Creating a Link

Parameter Description

Name of the link, displayed above the link in the topology view by default. It
Name
can be empty.

Source End NE Source NE of the link

Source End
Port on the source NE of the link
Port
Sink NE Destination NE of the link
Sink End Port Port on the destination NE of the link
u Forward: The connection line has an arrow from the source NE to the
sink NE.
Direction
u Bidirectional: The connection line has bidirectional arrows.
Bidirectional should be selected for a link between switch NEs.

3. After the setting is completed, click OK. The connection line appears between
the source and sink NEs.

4.8 Editing an NE

After configuring the NE basic data, you can set the NE attribute (NE name, NE IP
address, etc.) and NE icon according to the management requirement.

4.8.1 Setting NE Attributes

After creating NEs, you can modify NE attributes (NE name, NE IP address, etc.)
according to the network operation and management requirements.

Version: A 175
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

u Modifying an NE's name does not influence the operation of the NE.

u Inappropriate IP address settings may cause anomalous communication

between the UNM2000 and NEs or between NEs. This failure can be
eliminated by modifying the NE IP address.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. On the Main Topology tab, right-click the desired NE and select Attribute from
the shortcut menu to open the Attribute Page pane.

2. Modify the NE attributes as needed.

Note:

You cannot modify the NE type of an access NE, or the NE type and
SNMP parameter template of a switch NE.

3. (Optional) In NE Maintain Information of Attribute Page, click View to open

the NE Maintain Information dialog box. You can view the location and
maintainer information of the NE and click Close.

4. (Optional) Click at the top of Attribute Page, and the User-Defined

Properties area appears. Here you can set the custom property name and
value for the NE.

Note:

You can add up to three custom properties for an NE. The custom
property name and value define the topology information of a hotspot
area.

5. After completing the settings, click and the settings take effect.

176 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Related Operation

Manage the NE maintenance information.

1. Select Resource→NE Maintain Information from the main menu to open the
Query NE Maintain Information dialog box.

2. Select the corresponding NE and click Show to open the NE Maintain

Information dialog box.

3. Configure the location and maintainer information of the NE, and click OK.

4.8.2 Editing Icons

You can modify the size and pattern of the NE icon according to your preference.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In Physical Topology View, right-click the NE whose icon is to be edited and

select Edit the Icon from the shortcut menu to open the Edit Icon dialog box.

2. Modify the size and pattern of the NE icon and preview the icon at the lower
part of the dialog box.

3. After completion of the icon editing, click OK and the NE icon turns into the
desired size and pattern.

Version: A 177
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.8.3 Setting the Displayed Content of the Icon

You can set whether to display the NE IP address and type in the NE icon,
facilitating NE query in the topograph.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select View→Topology View→Show NE IP or View→Topology View→

Show NE Type. These sub-menu options will be selected and the NE icon will
display its IP address and type.

4.8.4 Tagging an NE

You can add special tags to NEs to distinguish NEs requiring difference levels of
attention.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select the NE to be tagged in Main Topology.

2. Select Resource→Mark the NE As from the main menu.

3. In the Identifier NE dialog box, enter the tag content and click OK.

178 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

4.8.5 Querying a Label

The following introduces how to query marked objects.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Label Query to open the Label Query tab, which displays
all the objects marked with labels by default.

2. Do as follows:

4 Reset Query:Click Reset Query to open the Reset Query dialog box and
then set the flag name and applicable object to search for the object with a
specific flag.

4 Refresh:Click Refresh to refresh the objects in the tab.

4 Locate to Object:Select the desired object and click Locate to Object to

locate the object in the Main Topology tab.

4 Delete the Flag:Select the object and click Delete the Flag to delete the
flag of the object.

4.9 Editing a Fiber Connection

This section introduces how to modify the connection line properties and how to
expand / collapse the connection line.

4.9.1 Modifying the Connection Line Properties

You can modify the properties of the connection line between NEs, such as
direction, type and width.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the connection line between NEs and select Connection

Properties from the shortcut menu to open the Link Attribute dialog box.

Version: A 179
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Modify the connection line direction, control point format, width and color as
needed.

3. After modification, click OK.

4.9.2 Setting the Display Mode of the Connection Line

When there are multiple connection lines between the NEs, you can collapse or
expand the lines.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the connection line between the NEs and set the display mode.

4 Collapse the connection lines:After Collapse line is selected from the

shortcut menu, the collapsed line is added with a + symbol, and the
connection line names are hidden.

4 Expand the lines:After the Expand line is selected from the shortcut menu,
the connection lines are expanded, each of which is displayed with its
name.

4.9.3 Viewing Links Between OLT NEs

The UNM2000 sets up links between OLTs automatically and displays the states of
physical connections between OLTs in the main topology. This section introduces
how to view the states of physical connections between OLTs.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The physical connections between OLTs are in normal state.

u PON NE Auto Link is enabled in the Parameter Settings dialog box following
the steps in Configuring Automatic Link Setup Between PON NEs.

180 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

u The LLDP basic attributes are configured on two connected OLTs and hence
data communication is set up between them.

4 In the main menu of NE Manager, select Configuration→Local Service

Configuration→PON Service to display the operational tree.

4 Select Common Config→LLDP Basic Properties to display the LLDP

Basic Properties tab.

4 Set the parameters referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

LLDP Switch Set it to enable.

LLDP Manage IP Set it to the loopback interface IP address.

Slot No. Set it to the slot where the port physically connected resides.

Port No. Set it to the port that physically connects the device to another.

Mode Set it to Tx / Rx.

4 Click to save the configuration data to the current OLT.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of Physical Topology View, and select Refresh
PON NE Link from the shortcut menu.

2. In Physical Topology View, check the states of connections between OLTs.

The table below describes three connection states.

State Description

The connection line between OLTs is solid and green.

OLTs connected
normally

The connection line between OLTs is dotted and gray.

OLTs disconnected

The connection line between OLTs is solid and red.

OLTs connected but
failed in
communication

Version: A 181
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.9.4 Viewing Links Between ONU NEs

This section introduces how to view the states of links between ONU NEs. This
helps you quickly understand the running states of links between NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Right-click an OLT NE in the main topology and select View Topology from the
shortcut menu to open the sub-topology view of the OLT NE.

2. Check the states of links between ONUs as follows.

4 When all ONUs are normally connected, their topology links are displayed
in green.

4 When a fiber cut alarm occurs on a PON port or an ONU, the topology link
affected is displayed in red. The table below describes the specific
scenarios.

182 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

Where a Fiber Cut Alarm Where a Red Topology Link

Scenario
Occurs Is Displayed

No optical splitter connected The PON port or its Between the PON port and
to a PON port connected ONU the ONU
An optical splitter connected Between the PON port and
The PON port
to a PON port the optical splitter

An optical splitter connected Between the optical splitter

An ONU connected
to a PON port and the ONU
Optical splitters of multiple
Between the PON port and
levels connected to a PON The PON port
the first-level optical splitter
port

Optical splitters of multiple

Between the last-level optical
levels connected to a PON An ONU connected
splitter and the ONU
port

4.10 Browsing the Topology View

In the physical topology view, you can browse the NE topology monitored by the
UNM2000 and relevant information.

Version: A 183
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4.10.1 Customizing Views

In case of too many devices in the main topology, the focused objects are not easy
to locate and view. However, you can create a custom view to only display your
focused objects.

Background Information

u Each user can create up to five custom views.

u Users can only see the custom views created by themselves.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Click on the toolbar on the Main Topology tab.

2. In the Create Custom View dialog box that appears, fill in the view name and
the remarks.

3. Select Node Member→Select. In the Select Object dialog box, select the NEs
to be displayed in the custom view, and then click OK.

4. Select Link Member→Select. In the Select Object dialog box, select the NE
links to be displayed in the custom view, and then click OK.

184 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

5. Click OK in the Create Custom View dialog box.

6. In the UNM2000 alert box that appears, click Yes to switch to the custom view.

4.10.2 Checking the Physical Topology View

In the physical topology view, you can check the topology of NEs monitored by the
UNM2000 and relevant information.

Procedure

1. On the Main Topology tab, select Physical Topology View from the Current
View drop-down list.

2. The Current View window displays the information of the devices in the
topology.

Subsequent Operation

Perform the following operations via the shortcut menu:

u Expand / collapse all logical domains.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Expand
All Logical Domains or Collapse All Logical Domains from the shortcut
menu.

u Hide nodes.

Version: A 185
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Right-click the NE in the physical topology view and select Hidden Node from
the shortcut menu. Then the NE is not displayed in the physical topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the physical topology view and select Manage
the Hidden Nodes from the shortcut menu to open the Hide Node
Management dialog box. Then select the nodes to be displayed and click OK.
The corresponding nodes are displayed in the physical topology view.

u According to Table 1-2, you can lock, move, zoom in or zoom out the physical
topology view by clicking the shortcut icons on the top of the view.

4.10.3 Viewing the Sub-topology View

By checking the sub-topology view, you can view the topology relationship between
various physical units of the NE, including the subrack, cards, and ports.

Procedure

1. Right-click an NE in the object tree pane or the physical topology view and
select View Topology from the shortcut menu to open the Sub-topology View
tab of the corresponding NE.

2. The Sub-topology View tab displays all the information of the NE, including
the subrack, card and the connection of ports.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations in the sub-topology view via the shortcut
menu.

u Set the background image.

Right-click the blank area on the Sub-topology View tab, and select Set
Background Image or Use the Default Background Image from the shortcut
menu to set the background image of the sub-topology view.

u Set the layout style.

1) Right-click the blank area on the Sub-topology View tab, and select
Layout Mode from the shortcut menu to open the Layout Mode dialog
box.

186 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

2) Adjust the layout style as required, and preview the adjustment results in
the Preview pane.

3) Click OK after the setting is completed.

u Hide nodes.

Right-click the node in the sub-topology view, and select Hidden Node from the
shortcut menu; then the selected node is not displayed in the sub-topology view.

u Manage the hidden nodes.

Right-click in the blank area of the sub-topology view and select Manage the
Hidden Nodes to open the Hide Node Management dialog box. Then select
the nodes to be displayed and click OK. Then the corresponding nodes are
displayed in the sub-topology view.

u Edit icons.

Right-click the node in the sub-topology view, and select Edit the Icon from the
shortcut menu. In the Edit Icon dialog box, set the size and pattern of the node
icon, and click OK.

u Table 1-2 describes how to lock, move, zoom in, and zoom out the sub-
topology view via the shortcut icons at the top part of sub-topology view.

u Add splitters.

Version: A 187
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Right-click the PON object in the sub-topology view, and select Add Splitter
from the shortcut menu. In the Add Optical Splitter dialog box, set parameters
of the splitter and then click OK.

u Move splitters.

1) On the Sub-topology View tab, right-click a splitter and select Move

Optical Router to open the Move Optical Router dialog box.

2) In the Move Optical Router dialog box, select the desired PON port or
splitter, and click OK.

As shown below, move the splitter from PON port 8 to the splitter 2 under
the PON port 7.

188 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

4.10.4 Browsing the Bird-eye View

The Bird-eye View displays the thumbnail of the topology. In case the topology
window displays only part of the view, you can browse the full view, understand the
topology architecture as well as locate the display area of the topology view via
Bird-eye View.

Procedure

1. Click on the toolbar above the topology view to open the Bird-eye view
window, which displays the thumbnail of the current topology.

Note:

In the Bird-eye view window, only the area within the purplish red frame
is displayed in the topology view. Drag this area to locate the display area
of the topology.

4.10.5 Viewing Hot-spot Regions

Prerequisite

The NE attributes and hot-spot regions are set according to Managing Customized
Attributes.

Procedure

1. Select View→Hot Region from the main menu.

2. Click a hot-spot region in the browsing tree at the left side of the Hot Region
tab, and you can view the hot-spot region topology.

Version: A 189
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

On the Hot Region tab, you can view the sub-topology, NE manager, current
alarm / alarm history, Ping / Telnet / SSH / ICMP Ping / Tracet and NE
attributes via an NE's shortcut menu.

Related Operation

u Modify the attributes of a hot-spot region.

1) Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2) Right-click a hot spot in the browsing tree at the left side of Custom
Attributes Management and select Modify Property.

3) Modify the attributes or objects of the hot spot in the Modify Property
dialog box and click OK.

u Delete a hot-spot region.

1) Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2) Right-click a hot spot in the browsing tree at the left side of Custom
Attributes Management and select Delete Property Value.

190 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

u Transfer a hot-spot region.

1) Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2) Right-click a hot spot in the browsing tree at the left side of Custom
Attributes Management and select Transfer The Selected Object.

3) Modify the attribute name or value in the Transfer The Selected Object
dialog box, and click OK.

4.10.6 Searching Objects

You can search for and locate the object quickly via the object search functions.

Background Information

The objects include NEs, logical domains and cards.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Search Object from the main menu.

2. In the displayed Advanced Search dialog box, set the object type, search type
and search content, and then click Search.

Version: A 191
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Select the desired object in the search result and click Localize. The Main
Topology tab will automatically go to the area that the NE locates in and mark
the target object.

4.10.7 Setting the Topology

With the Topology Setting function, you can adjust the topology background,
logical domain background, NE and link display mode, and display content.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area of the Physical Topology View and select
Topology Setting.

2. On the Topo Setting tab, set the topology parameters as required and click
.

192 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

4.10.8 Filtering the Topology

The UNM2000 supports filtering topologies according to specified criteria, such as

subnet or NE.

Background Information

u The topology filtering settings are only applicable to the current user.

u If a user sets the filtering criteria on multiple client ends simultaneously, only the
latest setting will take effect when he restart the main topology/

Procedure

1. Right-click a blank area in the main topology and select Topo Filtering from
the shortcut menu, or select View→Topo Filtering in the main menu to open
the Topo Filter pane.

Note:

The filtering criteria are empty by default. If you have set the topology
filtering and then re-open the GUI, the latest setting remains.

2. Set Logic Name, NE Name or Link Name in the Topo Filtering pane, and
then click Filter.

Version: A 193
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The following filters the NE whose name contains 10.171.0.34. After the filtering
conditions are set, the topology only displays this NE.

Note:

You can enter the keyword related to the region name, NE name or
connection name for filtering.

4.10.9 Sorting the Object Tree

With the object tree sorting function, you can sort the browse tree by name.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the blank area in the left browse tree on the main topology tab and
select Sort by Name from the shortcut menu.

2. Drag an NE or a logical domain to the designated position.

3. Click at the top of the browse tree pane to save the settings.

4.10.10 Setting the Background Image

You can customize the background image of the topology by the Set Background
Image function.

Procedure

u Set the background image of the main topology.

194 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

1) Right-click in the blank area of the Main Topology tab and select Set
Background Image from the shortcut menu to open the Set Logic
Domain Background dialog box.

2) Select a logical domain in the left pane of the Set Logic Domain
Background dialog box.

3) Click Set Background, select the background image in the displayed

dialog box and click Open.

4) (Optional) Click Use Default Background to set the background image of

the logical domain to the default one.

5) Click OK to save the settings.

u Set the background image of the sub-topology.

1) Right-click an NE in the main topology and select View Topology from the
shortcut menu to open the Sub-topology View tab of the NE.

2) Right-click in the blank area of the Sub-topology tab and select Set
Background Image from the shortcut menu.

3) Select the desired background image in the displayed dialog box and click
Open.

4) (Optional) Right-click in the blank area of the Sub-topology tab and select
Use the Default Background Image from the shortcut menu to set the
background image of the sub-topology as the default background image of
the system.

4.11 Deleting the Topology

Typically, you need to delete the objects in the network topology before adjusting
the topology.

4.11.1 Deleting a Global Logical Domain

When adjusting the network topology, you can delete the subnet logical domain that
is no longer needed from the topology view. After a logical domain is deleted, the
objects in this logical domain will be moved to its upper-level logical domain.

Version: A 195
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click in the logical domain of the main topology window and select Delete
from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

4.11.2 Deleting NEs

When an incorrect NE is created or an NE is changed due to network adjustment,

you can delete the NE on the UNM2000. Deleting an NE leads to loss of all
information related to the NE in the UNM2000; however, this does not influence the
running of the device.

Background Information

u The UNM2000 provides batch deletion of NEs, and you can select and delete
multiple NEs.

u Deleting NEs will delete the alarms, performance and configuration data of the
NE simultaneously.

u Deleting NEs will delete all cards, ports, connected ONUs and related alarms,
performance and configurations under the NE.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

u Delete a single NE.

1) Right-click the desired NE and select Delete from the shortcut menu.

2) Click OK in the displayed alert box to delete the selected NE.

u Delete multiple NEs.

1) Select Resource→Batch Delete NE from the main menu.

196 Version: A
 4 Topology Management

2) In the Select an NE dialog box, select the desired NEs and click OK.

3) Click OK in the displayed warning alert box to delete the selected NEs and
their connected ONUs.

4.11.3 Deleting Shelves

This section introduces how to delete shelves.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In Device Tree of the NE Manager, right-click the desired shelf and select
Delete Subrack from the shortcut menu.

2. Click Yes in the dialog box that appears.

4.11.4 Deleting a Card

In case of network configuration change or modifying the card configuration of the

NE is required, you can delete the card from the NE.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click the desired NE in the main topology and select Open NE Manager
from the shortcut menu to open the NE Manager window.

2. Delete the card.

4 Delete all cards.

a) Right-click the subrack in the device tree and select Delete All Cards
from the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

Version: A 197
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Delete a single card

a) Right-click the desired card in the device tree and select Delete Card
from the shortcut menu.

b) In the displayed dialog box, click Yes to apply.

Subsequent Operation

5.5 describes how to authorize cards and delivery configuration to device.

4.12 Failure Cases

This chapter introduces the failure cases of the UNM2000.

4.12.1 Causing Database Service Crash by Card Upgrade

Failure Description

Upgrading the card leads to database service crash.

Possible Reason

The following reasons may result in this problem after troubleshooting:

The query sentence SELECT DISTINCT ctaskno FROM t_pmcollectobjinfo

WHERE cneid = 13172736; makes the database (MySQL 5.7.18) service crash.

Summary and Suggestion

Summary:The query with DISTINCT will result in the MySQL bug which is related to
the Windows operating system due to lack of the SP1 patch for the Windows 2008
R2.

Suggestion:Before installing the server software on the Windows Server 2008 R2

Standard system, install the SP1 patch.

198 Version: A
5 NE Management

This section introduces the NE management of the UNM2000.

NE Manager GUI

Configuring Local Services

Viewing the ONU List

Managing ONUs

Authorizing Cards

Authorizing ONUs

Synchronizing ONUs Manually

Synchronizing ONU Port Description Manually

Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port

Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs

Manual ONU Authorization

Modifying SVLANs / CVLANs in a Batch Manner

OTDR Link Management

System Maintenance

Operation and Maintenance Management

Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

Configuring NEs in Batches

Version: A 199
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.1 NE Manager GUI

The NE Manager GUI is the main GUI for managing the devices. You can perform
operations based on NEs as well as configure, manage and maintain the NEs,
cards or ports separately. You can select the corresponding operation object and the
corresponding function in the main menu of the NE manager to search for and use
the related configuration items of the function.

Access Method

Double-click an NE in the main topology, or right-click the NE and select Open NE

Manager from the shortcut menu to access the NE Manager GUI, as shown in
Figure 5-1.

(1) Toolbar (2) Main menu

(3) Alarm statistical panel (4) Shelf view

(5) Display pane (6) Common command pane

(7) Device tree pane

Figure 5-1 NE Manager GUI

200 Version: A
 5 NE Management

5.2 Configuring Local Services

The following introduces the access method and GUI layout of the NE service
configuration function.

Access Method

Right-click an NE in the main topology and select Local Service Config or access
NE Manager and select Configuration→Local Service Configuration to open the
Local Service Configuration tab.

GUI Introduction

The Local Service Configuration GUI includes the Operational Tree pane, the
Local Service Configuration tab and the Operation Information pane, as shown
in Figure 5-2.

(1) Operational tree pane (2) Service configuration (3) Operation information
pane pane

Figure 5-2 Local Service Configuration GUI

5.3 Viewing the ONU List

You can view the ONU details and configure the ONUs.

Version: A 201
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browse tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

Note:

The ONU list allows you to view the software / hardware version
information of ONUs.

2. You can perform the following operations as needed.

Note:

The following uses Port Service Config, Service Configuration and

View Details as an example to introduce how to perform the operations.

4 Port Service Config

On the ONU List tab, select an entry and click Port Service Config to
view the port type of the ONU service and the number of ports of different
types.

4 Service Configuration

202 Version: A
 5 NE Management

On the ONU List tab, select an entry and click Service Configuration to
access the designated ONU service configuration tab and perform the
service configuration of the ONU.

Note:

Right-click the designated configuration option in Operational Tree and

select Favorite from the shortcut menu to save this option in the favorite
folder, so that the user can find it quickly next time. Select Cancel
Favorite to remove this option from the favorite folder.

4 View Details

Click View Details to view the detailed information of the specified ONU,
including ONU Port Panel, ONU Information, ONU Service Information,
LAN Port Status Information, ONU MAC address, ONU Callback
Information and QINQ Domain Attach Information.

Version: A 203
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.4 Managing ONUs

This section introduces how to copy / paste ONU port service configurations,
deauthorize ONUs, add users, mark ONUs and reset ONUs.

5.4.1 Copying / Pasting Port Service Configurations

This section introduces how to copy and paste ONU port service configurations.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browse tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an entry and select Port Service Config from the shortcut menu.

3. Expand Data Port or Voice Port in the left browse tree of the Port Service
Config tab.

4. Right-click a port and select Copy Port Configuration.

5. Right-click a port and select Paste the Port Config and send to device.

5.4.2 Deauthorizing ONUs

This section introduces how to deauthorize ONUs.

204 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Background Information

u Deauthorize (database): Deauthorizes the ONU from the EMS database

without issuing commands to the device.

u Deauthorize an ONU: Issues the "Deauthorize ONU" command to the device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Deauthorize:

4 Deauthorize (database): Right-click an entry and select Unauthorize

(database) from the shortcut menu.

4 Deauthorize an ONU: Right-click an entry and select ONU

Deauthorization from the shortcut menu.

3. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

5.4.3 Adding Users

This section introduces how to add ONU users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select New User.

3. In the New User dialog box, set the basic information of the user and click OK.

Version: A 205
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

User Address is required.

Related Operation

u View the information of the ONU user:

1) On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu.

2) View the user information in the Attribute pane.

u Delete ONU users:

1) On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu.

2) Modify the user information in the Attribute pane.

3) Click to save the settings.

u Modify the information of the ONU user:

206 Version: A
 5 NE Management

1) On the ONU List tab, right-click an ONU and select Attribute from the
shortcut menu.

2) In the Property pane, select a use and click .

3) Click to save the settings.

5.4.4 Labeling ONUs

This section introduces how to label ONUs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU and select Mark the ONU as from the shortcut menu.

3. Enter the label content in the displayed dialog box and click OK.

Related Operation

For querying labels, see Querying a Label

5.4.5 Resetting ONUs

This section introduces how to reset ONUs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 207
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU and select Reset ONU.

3. Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

5.4.6 Adjusting ONU Service Types

Configuring the ONU service type can help identify the important ONUs and the
corresponding ONU alarms that require attention.

Background Information

The default alarm shielding rules of the UNM2000 are only applicable to the ordinary
ONUs. This meets multiple cities' requirements to only report ONU alarms of
enterprise customers.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU, select ONU Service Type and then Set VIP ONU or Set
Ordinary ONU from the shortcut menu.

5.4.7 Replacing ONUs

This section introduces how to replace ONUs.

208 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Background Information

You can replace the original ONU with an unauthorized ONU under the same PON
port.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The unauthorized ONU exists under the same PON port.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

2. Right-click an ONU and select ONU Replace.

3. In the ONU Replace dialog box, set the New Physic ID.

4. Click OK.

5.4.8 Querying End-to-End Services

You can view the ONU end-to-end service and the graphical display of its signal
flowchart.

Background Information

Supported Equipment Types:

u OLTs: AN5516 series (01/04/06), AN6000-17, AN6001-G16 and AN5116-06B/

04B

u ONUs of the MDU type: AN5006-04P4, AN5006-11, AN5006-12, AN5006-20,

AN5006-30, AN5006-15, AN5006-16, AN5172-8GR, AN5220, AN5506-10-B.
The THA-EDFA does not support viewing the end-to-end service path.

Procedure

1. Right-click an NE in the main topology and select ONU List from the shortcut
menu.

Version: A 209
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. On the ONU List tab of the NE Manager, right-click an ONU and select
OnuPort Service Query.

3. On the OnuPort Service Query tab, view the service parameter information at
the ONU side and OLT side.

4. Click a service and view the details of the service in the lower pane.

5.5 Authorizing Cards

Users need to authorize the cards of the equipment.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE manager GUI, select Configuration→Set Card

Authentication to display the Set Card Authorization tab to view the
authorization information of cards.

2. Configure the card authorization according to the parameter description in

Table 5-1 and button description in Table 5-2.

210 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Table 5-1 Parameters

Parameter Meaning

EMS Configuration The type of card configured in the UNM2000.

Device Configuration The type of card stored in the device RAM memory.

Actual Configuration The type of card physically inserted into the device.

Table 5-2 Buttons

Button Operation

Set the EMS configuration as the card configuration.

Set the device configuration as the card configuration.

Set the actual configuration as the card configuration.

Add all cards.

Delete all cards.

Hide empty slots.

3. After completing the card authorization, click to deliver the configuration to

the device.

5.6 Authorizing ONUs

You can perform ONU authorization related operations, including configuring the
authentication mode of the PON port or the ONU, authorizing the ONU, replacing
the ONU logical identifier and viewing authorized ONU list.

5.6.1 Configuring the ONU Whitelist

You can query the information of the authorized ONUs and pre-authorize the
unauthorized ONUs. Services can be authorized and provisioned only for the ONUs
in the white list.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 211
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u The PON port authorization type of the OLT device is configured.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→ONU Whitelist from the main

menu of the NE manager to open the ONU Authorization View tab, displaying
the information of the authorized ONUs.

2. Modify the ONU whitelist information: Select an entry, double-click Slot No.,
PON No., ONU Type, ONU No., or Enable/Disable, and select the
corresponding value from the drop-down list or manually enter the value.

Pre-authorizing the ONU

1. Click on the ONU Authorization View tab. In the displayed dialog box,
enter the number of ONU(s) to be pre-authorized and click OK.

2. Set the parameters of the ONU(s) to be pre-authorized according to the PON

port authentication mode.

3. Click on the ONU Authorization View tab to deliver the pre-authorization

data to the device.

5.6.2 Managing ONU Authentication Modes

You can view and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single
PON port, card or device.

212 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→ONU Authentication Mode

from the main menu of the NE manager.

2. Select the object in the Switch Objects (ONU Authentication Mode) dialog
box that appears, and click OK.

3. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Auth Type field
of this ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the drop-down list.
Table 5-3 describes the authentication modes.

Table 5-3 Description of the ONU Authentication Modes

Authentication Mode Description

Physical address
Authenticates the ONU based on its MAC address.
authentication
Logical SN
authentication: enable
the ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch to set the ONU that is already authenticated
replacement function in based on its SN to be authenticated based on its MAC address.
the logical SN
authentication mode

Version: A 213
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 5-3 Description of the ONU Authentication Modes (Continued)

Authentication Mode Description

Logical SN
authentication: disable
the ONU MAC automatic Turn on this switch, and the ONU can be authenticated only based
replacement function in on its SN. It cannot be authenticated based on its MAC address.
the logical SN
authentication mode
GPON password
authentication: enable
Turn on this switch to set the ONU that is already authenticated
the ONU MAC automatic
based on GPON password to be authenticated based on its MAC
replacement function in
address.
the GPON password
authentication mode
GPON password
authentication: disable
Turn on this switch, and the ONU can be authenticated only based
the ONU MAC automatic
on GPON password. It cannot be authenticated based on its MAC
replacement function in
address.
the GPON password
authentication mode

4. After the settings are completed, click to deliver the configurations to the
device.

5.6.3 Managing PON Port Authentication Modes

You can view and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single
PON port.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→PON Port Authentication

Mode from the main menu of the NE manager.

214 Version: A
 5 NE Management

2. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Authentication

Mode field of this ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the
drop-down list.

3. After the settings is completed, click to deliver the configuration to the

device.

5.6.4 Replacing the ONU Logical Identifier

When an ONU using the authentication based on logical ID is faulty, you can
replace it with an ONU of the same type, and set the logical ID of the new ONU to
that of the faulty ONU. The services on the original ONU will be automatically
downloaded to the new ONU, and service configuration is not required.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→Replace the ONU Logic ID

from the main menu of the NE manager to open the ONU Authorization View
tab.

2. Click and enter the number of rows to be added in the dialog box that
appears. Then click OK.

3. Set the parameters accordingly.

Version: A 215
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. After the settings are completed, click to deliver the configurations to the
device.

5.6.5 Viewing the Authorized ONU Information

You can view the authorized ONU information.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager window, select Configuration→ONU Authentication→

Authorized ONU Information from the main menu to display the Switch
Object (Authorized ONU Information) dialog box.

2. Select a card or port and click OK to view the information of the authorized
ONU connected to the card or port. Table 5-4 describes the Status column on
the ONU Authorization View tab.

216 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Table 5-4 ONU Authorization Status

Status Meaning

Authorized The ONU is connected and the authorization information is sent to the ONU.
The ONU is disconnected and the authorization information is saved in the
Preauthorized
network management database.

Note:
You can select only one card in the Switch Object (Authorized ONU
Information) dialog box.

Other Operations

Replace the selected object.

1. On the ONU Authorization View tab, click .

2. In the displayed Switch Object (Authorized ONU Information) dialog box,

reselect the desired card or PON port and click OK. The ONU Authorization
View tab displays the information of the authorized ONUs corresponding to the
selected object.

5.6.6 Detecting ONUs by PON Port Automatically

You can view and modify the authentication mode of the ONU connected to a single
PON port.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→ONU Authentication→Switch of PON Auto Sense

ONU from the main menu of the NE manager.

2. To modify the authentication mode of an ONU, double-click the Switch field of

this ONU and select the desired authentication mode from the drop-down list.

Version: A 217
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. After the settings is completed, click to deliver the configuration to the

device.

5.7 Synchronizing ONUs Manually

You can manually synchronize the ONU authorization information on the device to
the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the NE Manager, select Configuration→Manual ONU Synchronization

from the main menu. The Manually synchronizing the ONU succeeded alert
box appears at the lower right corner, indicating that the ONU authorization
information on the device is synchronized to the UNM2000.

5.8 Synchronizing ONU Port Description

Manually

You can manually synchronize the ONU port description from the device to the
UNM2000 or from the UNM2000 to the device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

218 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. Synchronize information from the device to the UNM2000: Right-click an NE on

the device tree of the NE manager and select Manual Port Description
Synchronization→Synchronization From Device to synchronize the ONU
authorization information from the device to the UNM2000.

2. Synchronize information from the UNM2000 to the device: Right-click an NE on

the device tree of the NE manager and select Manual Port Description
Synchronization→Synchronization From NMS to synchronize the ONU
authorization information from the UNM2000 to the device.

5.9 Rule Tasks of Enabling the ONU Port

You can set the automatic enabling and disabling time period of the ONU port,
which is convenient for you to remotely manage the time period in which the ONU
port can be used.

5.9.1 Viewing Rule Tasks

You can view the port enabling rule tasks already set in the system to understand
the object source, execution result and other related information of each task.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane
to view the existing tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the task type, execution type, task progress,
task status, execution result and start time of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Version: A 219
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.9.2 Creating Rule Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane or right-click in the
right pane and then select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog
box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5.9.3 Executing Rule Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the ONU port enabling rule tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane
to view the existing tasks.

220 Version: A
 5 NE Management

3. Right-click the desired rule task and select Execute Now from the shortcut
menu, or click the task and then click the Execute Now button at the bottom of
the tab to execute the ONU port enabling rule task.

Other Operations

Right-click a rule task and select View from the shortcut menu to view the executed
object and execution status in the lower pane.

5.10 Obtaining Unauthorized ONUs

You can obtain the information of unauthorized ONUs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager, select Configuration→Obtain Unauthorized ONU from

the main menu to display the Switch Object(Unauthorized ONU List) dialog
box.

2. Select a desired PON port and click OK. The ONU Authorization View tab
appears, displaying the unauthorized ONUs.

Subsequent Operation

u Click to read the information of unauthorized ONUs from the device.

u Click to open the Switch Object (Unauthorized ONU List) dialog box and
reselect the PON port to be queried.

u Click , select the range in the displayed Configure the Selection Range
dialog box and click OK to authorize the ONU on the displayed ONU
Authorization tab.

5.11 Manual ONU Authorization

You can authorize the ONUs manually.

Version: A 221
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the NE manager, select Configuration→Manual ONU Authorization from

the main menu to display the Manually Authorize ONU dialog box.

2. Configure the basic information and authentication information, and click Write
Database or Write Equipment according to Table 5-5 to authorize the ONU
manually.

Table 5-5 Buttons

Button Application

It is applicable to the situation when the ONU is not physically

connected. When the ONU is connected, you can write the
Write Database
configuration in the database into the device through Configuration
Synchronization.

Write Equipment It is applicable to the situation when the ONU is physically connected.

5.12 Modifying SVLANs / CVLANs in a Batch

Manner

You can modify SVLANs / CVLANs in a batch manner.

Background Information

As modifying SVLANs / CVLANs of ONUs one by one is inefficient, the UNM2000

now supports modifying SVLANs / CVLANs of ONUs in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→Batch Modify SVLAN/CVLAN from the main menu of

the NE manager.

2. In the displayed dialog box, select the device and click OK.

222 Version: A
 5 NE Management

3. Click Batch Modify on the Batch Modify SVLAN/CVLAN tab.

4. In the Batch Modify dialog box, click Add to add one or more entries.

5. Set SVLAN ID, New SVLAN ID, CVLAN Strategy, CVLAN ID Start and
CVLAN ID End.

Note:

When CLVAN Strategy is set to Translation, it is not required to set

CVLAN ID Start and CVLAN ID End.

5.13 OTDR Link Management

You can set parameters, perform test, view test status and deliver the test command
for the OTDR link via the OTDR link management.

Version: A 223
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The ODMA, ODMB or ODMC card is configured.

Procedure

1. Select Configuration→OTDR Link Management from the main menu in the

NE manager to open the OTDR Link Management tab.

2. Configure the parameters (taking the Port Mapping Relation as an example).

1) Select Test Config→Port Mapping Relation from the operational tree in

the NE manager.

2) Click , set the number of rows to be added in the dialog box that
appears and click OK.

3) Set the parameters such as OTDR Slot No., OTDR Port No., and Test
Port No..

4) Click to save data to the database.

3. Execute the manual test.

1) Select Test→Manual Test from the operational tree in the NE manager.

2) Select the tested object in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

3) After the test is completed, view the test result in Export.

Other Operations

u View test history:

1) Select Test→Test Records from the operational tree in the NE manager.

2) Set the query criteria in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

3) View the test history data on the Test Records tab.

u Read the connection status of the OTDR card / optical link / remote device from
the device. The following takes querying optical link status as an example.

1) Select Test State→Find Optical Link Status from the operational tree in
the NE manager.

2) Click to read the device status.

224 Version: A
 5 NE Management

3) View the results on the Find Optical Link Status tab.

u Reboot a device or card. The following takes rebooting a remote device as an

example.

1) Select Commands→Remote Device Reset from the operational tree in

the NE manager.

2) Set the ODTR slot number and port number on the Remote Device Reset
tab.

3) Click to deliver the command to the device.

5.14 System Maintenance

This section introduces the system maintenance functions newly added in this
version.

5.14.1 Upgrading the System Software

This section introduces how to upgrade the system software for an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The upgrade package is saved in a directory on the FTP server.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager, select Configuration→System

Maintenance→System Software Update to open the System Software
Update dialog box.

Version: A 225
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Set the parameters referring to the table below.

Parameter Description

Select File Type Select the type of the software to be upgraded.

Slot Select the slot housing the card to be upgraded.

XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the upgrade package is saved.

Enter the directory where the upgrade package is saved on the FTP
File Path server. When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory
here. The default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

File Name Select the upgrade package to be used.

3. Click Update System Software to upgrade the system software. After the
upgrade is complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt
Message.

5.14.2 Backing Up the System Software

This section introduces how to back up the system software for an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

226 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE Manager, select Configuration→System

Maintenance→System Software Backup to display the System Software
Backup tab.

2. In the drop-down box of XFTP Server, select an XFTP server where the
backup file is saved.

3. Click Backup System Software to back up the system software.

4. When the backup is complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt
Message. You can view the backup file in the specified path on the XFTP
server.

5.14.3 Exporting a Configuration File

This section introduces how to export the configuration file of an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The name of the file to be exported is obtained.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System

Maintenance→Export Configuration File to display the Export
Configuration File tab.

Version: A 227
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Set the parameters referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

XFTP Server Select the XFTP server where the exported file is saved.

Repeated Times Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 10 to set the number of retries.

Export File Name Enter the name of the file to be exported.

3. Click Export Configuration File. A progress bar Exporting Configuration

File is shown in the lower part of the window. When the export is complete, the
execution result will be displayed in Prompt Message.

Other Operations

Click XFTP Server Setting to open the XFTP Server Setting window. You can set
the related parameters of the XFTP server.

5.14.4 Importing a Configuration File

This section introduces how to import the configuration file of an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The name of the file to be imported is obtained.

228 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System

Maintenance→Import Configuration File to open the Import Configuration
File window.

2. Set the parameters referring to the table below.

Parameter Description

XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the configuration file is saved.

Enter the directory where the configuration file is saved on the FTP
File Path server. When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory
here. The default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

Select a file to be imported. When Show All is selected, configuration

File Name
files of all types will be displayed.

3. Click Import Configuration File to import the selected configuration file. When
the import is complete, the execution result will be displayed in Prompt
Message.

5.14.5 Comparing Configuration Files

This section introduces how to compare configuration files for an NE.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

Version: A 229
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u You have obtained the name of the file to be compared.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System

Maintenance→Compare Config File to display the Compare Config File tab.

2. Set the parameters of the first configuration file referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the configuration file is saved.

Enter the directory where the configuration file is saved on the FTP
File Path server. When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory
here. The default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

Select the file to be compared. Files in txt format are shown by default.
Configuration File
If Show All is selected, configuration files of all types will be displayed.

3. Select a comparison mode as needed.

4 Compare the configuration file with the current configuration of the NE.

a) Click Compare to Current Configuration to compare the

configuration file with the current configuration on the device. After the
comparison is complete, the execution result will be displayed in
Prompt Message.

b) When the comparison is completed successfully, the Configuration

Comparison Results dialog box appears to display the detailed
comparison result.

4 Compare the configuration file with another.

a) Click Select Configuration to Compare to open the Select

Configuration dialog box.

230 Version: A
 5 NE Management

b) Set the parameters of the second configuration file in the same way
that you set the first one.

c) Click OK to compare the first configuration file with the second one.
After the comparison is complete, the execution result will be
displayed in Prompt Message.

d) When the comparison is completed successfully, the Configuration

Comparison Results dialog box appears to display the detailed
comparison result.

5.14.6 Upgrading an ONU

This section introduces how to upgrade an ONU.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured.

u The upgrade package is saved in a directory on the FTP server.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of an NE manager, select Configuration→System

Maintenance→Update ONU to display the Update ONU tab.

2. Set the parameters referring to the following table.

Version: A 231
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Parameter Description

Select File Type Select the type of the software to be upgraded.

Select the ONU to be upgraded.

1. Click to open the Select ONU dialog box.
Select ONU
2. Select the ONU type and model.
3. Click OK.
XFTP Server Select the FTP server where the upgrade package is saved.

Enter the directory where the upgrade package is saved on the FTP
File Path server. When Default Path is selected, you need not enter a directory
here. The default path is the root directory of the FTP server.

File Name Select the file to be upgraded.

3. Click Update ONU. A progress bar Updating ONU is displayed in the lower
part of the window. When the upgrade is complete, the execution result will be
displayed in Prompt Message.

Note:

During ONU upgrade, the Update ONU window becomes modeless. You
can perform other operations at the same time.

5.15 Operation and Maintenance Management

This section introduces the operation and maintenance management functions

newly added in this version.

5.16 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can set the NE automatic discovery task to automatically discover the NEs in
the specified IP range and then synchronize the NEs to the UNM2000 so as to
automatically create NEs in the UNM2000.

5.16.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

You can specify an IP address range within which NEs are to be discovered
automatically.

232 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Resource→Auto NE Discovery or select System→

Policy Task Management→Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task to
view the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

2. Double-click a task entry, or right-click a task entry and select Attribute from
the shortcut menu. You can view the related information of this task, such as
execution cycle, execution time, and IP address range.

Subsequent Operation

u Right-click a corresponding task and select Execute Now from the shortcut
menu, or select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the
tab to execute the NE automatic discovery task.

u Right-click an NE that is discovered automatically in the right pane, and select

Create Selected NE or Create All from the shortcut menu to automatically
save the NE data in the UNM2000.

Version: A 233
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.16.2 Creating an NE Automatic Discovery Task

When changes are made to IP segments managed by the UNM2000 and new
device NEs are added in these IP segments, you can create NE automatic
discovery tasks to enable the UNM2000 to manage the devices in the entire
network.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Auto NE Discovery from the main menu to access the

Auto Detect NE Task GUI.

2. Click the Create button at the bottom of the tab, or right-click Auto Detect NE
Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and select Create from the
shortcut menu to open Create Auto Detect NE Task dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information and Extend information tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

234 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click the new NE automatic discovery task in the left pane to view the IP
address, NE type and status.

5.17 Configuring NEs in Batches

The UNM2000 supports configuring access NEs in batches, including calibrating

time, synchronizing alarms and saving configurations to Flash in batches.

5.17.1 Calibrating Time in Batches

The UNM2000 can calibrate NE time in a batch manner, improving operation

efficiency.

Prerequisite

You have configured the UNM2000 server address in SNMP System Time Config
for NEs.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Batch Configuration→NE Batch Timing from the

main menu to open the NE Batch Timing page on the NE Batch
Configuration tab.

2. Click Batch Timing in the right pane to open the Select NE dialog box.

3. In the Select NE dialog box, select a desired logical domain or desired NEs
and click OK.

4. Click Yes in the displayed alert box to execute the time calibration command.

Version: A 235
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

When the batch command is being executed, you can click Stop to
suspend the operation.

5. When the batch command is executed successfully, view the time calibration
result in the NE Batch Timing page.

6. (Optional) To calibrate NE time again, select desired objects and click Restart.
Click Yes in the displayed alert box.

5.17.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches

In case of network interruption or other failures, alarm data in the UNM2000 may be
inconsistent with those on NEs. In this version, NE alarms can be synchronized to
the UNM2000 in a batch manner.

236 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Batch Configuration→NE Batch Alarm

Synchronization from the main menu to open the NE Batch Alarm
Synchronization page on the NE Batch Configuration tab.

2. Click Batch Synchronization in the right pane to open the Select NE dialog
box.

3. In the Select NE dialog box, select a desired logical domain or desired NEs
and click OK to deliver the alarm batch synchronization command.

Note:

When the batch command is being executed, you can click Stop to
suspend the operation.

4. When the batch command is executed successfully, view the alarm batch
synchronization result in the NE Batch Alarm Synchronization page.

5. (Optional) To synchronize NE alarms again, select desired objects and click

Restart.

Version: A 237
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5.17.3 Saving Configurations to Flash in Batches

The UNM2000 can save NE configurations to Flash in a batch manner, improving

operation efficiency.

Procedure

1. Select Configure→NE Batch Configuration→NE Batch Save To Flash from

the main menu to open the NE Batch Save To Flash page on the NE Batch
Configuration tab.

2. Click Batch Save in the right pane to open the Select NE dialog box.

3. In the Select NE dialog box, select a desired logical domain or desired NEs
and click OK.

4. Click Yes in the displayed alert box to execute the command of saving
configurations to Flash.

Note:

When the batch command is being executed, you can click Stop to
suspend the operation.

5. When the batch command is executed successfully, view the configuration

saving result in the NE Batch Save To Flash page.

6. (Optional) To save NE configurations again, select desired objects and click

Restart. Click Yes in the displayed alert box.

238 Version: A
 5 NE Management

Version: A 239
6 Alarm Management

The alarm is the main information source for knowing about the operating condition
of the equipment and the fault isolation. You need to monitor and handle alarms in a
timely manner, so as to ensure the normal operation of the network.

Basic Concepts

Setting Remote Notification of Alarms

Setting Alarm Rules

Managing the Alarm Project Status

Setting Alarm Related Parameters

Managing Alarm / Event Templates

Managing Alarm Configurations

Synchronizing Alarms

Monitoring Network Alarms

Handling Alarms

Customizing Alarms

Managing the Alarm / Event Data

Gathering Statistics of Device Failures

240 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.1 Basic Concepts

This section introduces the basic concepts related to alarm management, including
alarm browsing, alarm notification mode, alarm level, alarm classification, current
alarm, alarm history, alarm and event, alarm statistics and alarm saving, facilitating
you in alarm processing.

Alarm Browsing

By browsing alarms, the network maintainer can understand the running status of
the network devices and the UNM2000 timely. The alarm browsing operation
includes browsing the current alarms or alarm history of the UNM2000, NEs, cards
and services, as well as synchronizing, verifying and confirming the alarms.

u Browsing alarms:You can browse the alarms of the devices or services in the
UNM2000 to understand the running status of the network or device.

4 Browsing current alarms:Browses the current alarms of all levels of the

entire network.

4 Browsing the alarms of the specified NE:By selecting the device in the
main topology, you can browse the current alarms of the selected device
quickly.

4 Browsing the alarm log:By browsing the alarms which meet the query
condition, you can browse the required alarm information quickly.

u Confirming alarms:If an alarm is confirmed, the alarm is processed. You can

select the desired alarm and confirm it in the current alarm window.

4 Manual confirmation:You can select the desired alarm and confirm it in the
current alarm window.

4 Automatic confirmation:You need to enable the alarm automatic

confirmation function. After an alarm is processed, the UNM2000 will clear
the alarm immediately or at the specified time according to the settings.

u Confirming and clearing alarms: You can select the desired alarm to confirm it
and clear it at the same time in the current alarm window. This alarm will be
saved in the alarm history database.

Version: A 241
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Synchronizing alarms: In case the UNM2000 restores from the communication

interruption with the device or the UNM2000 restarts, you need to synchronize
the alarm to ensure consistent alarms in the UNM2000 and on the device. The
UNM2000 will check whether the alarms in the UNM2000 database and on the
NE device are consistent. If not, the alarms on the NE device will be
synchronized to the UNM2000 database and overwrite the alarms in the
database.

u Checking alarms: Checks whether the current alarm at the UNM2000 side
exists in the current alarms at the NE side. If yes, the alarms at the UNM2000
side keep unchanged. If not, the UNM2000 clears the alarm.

u Refreshing alarms: Obtains the latest alarms from the UNM2000 alarm
database and displays them at the client.

u Clearing alarms: Clears the alarms from the current alarm database of the
UNM2000 and from the NE and saves them to the alarm history database.

u Filtering alarms: You can set the filter conditions to filter the alarm not focused
in the alarm browsing window.

u Alarm remarks: Adds remarks for the alarms already processed, convenient for
alarm management.

Alarm Notification Mode

Obtaining the alarm information timely is very important to alarm processing and
network maintenance. The UNM2000 provides multiple ways of alarm notification.

u Alarm indicator color:The UNM2000 uses the changes of the alarm indicator
LEDs to help you quickly locate the alarmed object. By default, the alarm
indicator of the UNM2000 indicates critical alarms in red, major alarms in
orange, minor alarms in yellow and alert alarms in blue. You can customize the
colors of the alarm indicator to indicate alarms of different levels.

u Alarm sound:The UNM2000 client provides the audible and visual alarm when
it is connected to the alarm box device. You can determine the level of the
reported alarm according to the indicator color and sound of the alarm box.
Upon the reporting of a new alarm, the UNM2000 immediately triggers the
alarm box to play the alarm sound and the corresponding alarm indicator
flickers.

242 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

u Remote alarm notification:The UNM2000 provides the following two ways of

remote alarm notification for users who are not on site.

4 Sends alarms via email automatically to the specified users.

4 Sends alarms via SMS automatically to the specified users.

Alarm Level

Alarm levels are used to identify the severity, importance and urgency of the alarms.
The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the following four levels in terms of severity:
critical alarms, major alarms, minor alarms and warning alarms. The alarms of
different levels have different meanings and should be processed differently, as
shown in Table 6-1.

Table 6-1 Description and Handling Method of Alarms of Different Levels

Alarm Level Meaning Handling Method

Indicates the alarms on the failures that

Critical alarm are global or may cause corruption of Handled urgently.
NEs and services.
Indicates the alarms on the failures of
Major alarm Processed timely.
cards or services in a certain range.

Indicates the alarms on failures of Alarm reason should be found

Minor alarm
general cards or services. timely to eliminate the failure.

Indicates the alarms that may influence

the service quality of devices or
resources other than system
Warning alarm Handled accordingly.
performance and service. Some of them
are just information prompting the
devices are back to normal.

Alarm Status

The alarm status includes alarm confirmation and clearance. Different handling
methods should be adopted for alarms in different status. Alarms can be divided into
the following different statuses according to whether the alarm has been confirmed
or cleared.

u Unconfirmed and uncleared

u Confirmed but uncleared

u Unconfirmed but cleared

Version: A 243
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Confirmed and cleared

Alarm Classification

Alarms can be divided into NE alarms and UNM2000 alarms according to their
occurrence locations.

u NE alarms:Indicates the alarms on the failures of NEs.

u UNM2000 alarms:Indicates the alarms on the failures of the UNM2000

environment.

Current Alarm and Alarm History

Alarms are divided into current alarm and alarm history. Their respective meanings
are as follows:

u Current alarms:Indicates the NE alarms saved in the current alarm database of

the core switch card or the UNM2000 alarms saved in the current alarm
database of the UNM2000.

u Alarm history:Indicates the NE alarms cleared and then saved in the alarm
history database of the core switch card or the UNM2000 alarms confirmed by
users, cleared from the current alarm database and then saved to the alarm
history database.

Alarm Statistics

Alarm statistics indicates gathering the alarm data according to your desired
conditions. The alarm statistics are convenient for you to analyze the running status
of the device.

Alarm Saving

If the alarm history data stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the
UNM2000 operation will be influenced. The alarm data saving function can save the
alarm history data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to
improve the UNM2000 operation performance. The UNM2000 supports manual
saving and overflow saving.

244 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

u Overflow saving:You can set the maximum alarm saving capacity and the
UNM2000 will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history
data reach the preset capacity, the UNM2000 will save the data to a specified
file to decrease its load.

u Save Manually:You can save the alarm history data in the UNM2000 to a
specified file folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving period.
When the alarm history data saved in the database reach the preset time
period, the UNM2000 will save the data to a designated file folder.

Alarm and Event

When detecting the status changes of the managed objects, the UNM2000 presents
them via alarms or events.

u The alarm indicates the notification generated when the system detects a
failure.

u The event indicates any changes occurring on the managed objects.

6.2 Setting Remote Notification of Alarms

By setting the remote notification rules of alarms, alarms meeting the rules will be
sent to the maintenance personnel so that they can obtain the alarm information
timely even if they are not on site.

6.2.1 Remote Notification Panorama of Alarms

The UNM2000 can send alarms to users through messages or by emails. You can
comprehensively learn about remote notification functions through the remote
notification panorama of alarms.

Version: A 245
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.2.2 Commissioning Alarm Notification by Emails

The following introduces how to commission the alarm notification by emails,

including parameter setting and function verification.

Background Information

u The UNM2000 server or client has been connected to the SMTP mail server.

u If the SMTP mail server requires authentication, you must have the user name
and password used to connect to the mail server.

u To ensure communication security and security of remote alarm / event

notifications sent by the UNM2000, you must ensure that the mail server (SMTP)
supports TLS, port 587 is available, and the sending client has installed the
trust certificate. TLS is recommended for encrypted transmission of remote
notifications by emails.

Prerequisite

SMTP has been configured for connections and the corresponding ports are
available, since the UNM2000 needs to communicate with the mail server through
the ports when sending remote notifications by emails.

u Port 25 has been configured for the common connection mode.

u Port 587 has been configured for the TLS connection mode.

u Port 465 has been configured for the SSL connection mode.

Configuring Parameters of Alarm Notifications by Emails

You need to set parameters of alarm notifications by emails on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Select Enable Email Setting on the Email Notification tab, and set the
parameters such as E-Mail Server, Sender of the Email, Encryption Type, and
Identity Authentication according to Table 6-2.

246 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Table 6-2 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Enable Email Indicates whether to notify users of

Select or deselect the check box.
Setting the alarm by email.

Indicates the address of the email

E-Mail Server Enter it manually.
server.
Sender of the Email Sets the email sender's address. Enter it manually.

Indicates the encryption type of the

Encryption Type Select the check box.
email.
Indicates the port number of the
Port Number server. Enter it manually.
Email Value range: 0 to 65535
Notification Identity Indicates whether the identity
Select or deselect the check box.
Authentication authentication is required.

Indicates the username of the email

Username Enter it manually.
receiver.
Indicates the password for logging
Password Enter it manually.
into the mailbox.
1. Click Test....
Tests whether the alarm-related 2. Enter the receiver's email
Test
email is sent successfully. account.
3. Click OK.

Version: A 247
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click Apply.

Verifying Alarm Notifications by Emails

After parameters of alarm notifications by emails are set, verify whether the
configuration is correct and whether email notifications can be received on the
UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Confirm that the email parameters are correctly configured and Enable Email
Setting is selected on the Email Notification tab.

4. Click Test....

5. In the Test text box, enter the email address for testing, and click OK.

4 If the system prompts Test email successfully sent, and an email titled
Test from UNM2000 is received in the mailbox, the alarm notification by
emails is correctly configured.

4 If the system prompts for anomalies, the alarm notification by emails is

incorrectly configured. Check the parameter configuration and test again.

6.2.3 Commissioning Alarm Notification Through the GSM

Modem

The following introduces how to commission the alarm notification through the GSM
modem, including parameter setting and function verification.

248 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

The GSM modem has been installed and commissioned.

Setting Parameters of Message Notification by the GSM Modem

After the GSM modem is installed, you need to set parameters of message
notification through the GSM model on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Communication Parameter to open the dialog box.

3. Select Enable GSM Modem Settings on the GSM Modem Settings tab, and
set parameters such as message sending device, serial port number, baud rate,
and message interval according to Table 6-3.

Table 6-3 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

GSM Enable GSM Indicates whether to enable

Select or deselect the check
Modem Modem the GSM modem to send
box.
Settings Settings alarm messages.

Version: A 249
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 6-3 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

Indicates the device for

SMS Modem sending messages. -
Default value: GMS Modem
Serial Port Indicates the serial port Select an item from the drop-
Number number of the GSM modem. down list.
Indicates the baud rate of
Baud Rate signal transmission for the Enter it manually.
GSM modem.
Message Indicates the interval of the
Enter it manually.
Interval alarm sending.

1. Click Test....
2. Enter the phone number
Tests whether the alarm
Test for receiving the
message is sent successfully.
message.
3. Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

Verifying Message Notification by the GSM Modem

After parameters of message notification through the GSM modem are set, verify
whether the configuration is correct and whether alarm messages can be received
on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Communication Parameter to open the dialog box.

3. Confirm that the GSM modem parameters are correctly configured and Enable
GSM Modem Settings is selected on the GSM Modem Settings tab,.

4. Click Test....

5. In the Test text box, enter the mobile number for testing (including the country
code, for example, +8613*********), and click OK.

4 If the system prompts that the message has been successfully sent and
the test mobile phone has received the message, the message notification
through the GSM modem is correctly configured.

250 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4 If the system prompts for anomalies, the message notification through the
GSM modem is incorrectly configured. Check the parameter configuration
and test again.

6.2.4 Commissioning Message Notification Through the

SMS Gateway

The following introduces how to commission the message notification through the
SMS gateway, including parameter setting and function verification.

Prerequisite

You have obtained the IP address, port, user name, password, and coding protocol
of the SMS center.

Setting Parameters of Message Notification by the SMS Gateway

You need to configure parameters of the SMS center (SMS gateway) on the
UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Select Enable SMS Gateway Settings on the ISMG Settings tab, and set
SMS gateway parameters according to Table 6-4.

Version: A 251
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 6-4 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Enable SMS Indicates whether to enable the

Select or deselect the check box.
Gateway Settings ISMG to send alarm messages.

Indicates the interface protocol of the Select an item from the drop-down
Code Protocol
ISMG. list.
Click IPV4 or IPV6 to select an IP
Indicates the IP address of the host,
Host IP protocol version, and manually enter
supporting IPV4 or IPV6.
the IP address.
Indicates the port number of the host.
ISMG Settings Port Number Enter it manually.
Value range: 0 to 65535

Indicates the charged user type.

Charging User Options include charging the source Select an item from the drop-down
Type (Tx) terminal, destination (Rx) list.
terminal and service provider.

Username Indicates the username of the ISMG. Enter it manually.

Indicates the password of the ISMG

Password Enter it manually.
user.

252 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Table 6-4 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

Indicates the number of the source

Source Number Enter it manually.
terminal.
SP Code Indicates the service provider code. Enter it manually.

Indicates the service type of the

Service Type Enter it manually.
SMS.
1. Click Test....
Tests whether the short message is 2. Enter the phone number for
Test
sent successfully. receiving the short message.
3. Click OK.

4. Click Apply.

Verifying Message Notification by the SMS Gateway

After parameters of message notification through the SMS gateway are set, verify
whether the configuration is correct and whether alarm messages can be received
on the UNM2000 client.

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Communication Parameter.

3. Confirm that the SMS gateway parameters are correctly configured and Enable
SMS Gateway Settings is selected on the ISMG Settings tab,.

4. Click Test....

5. In the Test text box, enter the mobile number for testing (including the country
code, for example, +8613*********), and click OK.

4 If the system prompts that the message has been successfully sent and
the test mobile phone has received the message, the message notification
through the SMS gateway is correctly configured.

4 If the system prompts for anomalies, the message notification through the
SMS gateway is incorrectly configured. Check the parameter configuration
and test again.

Version: A 253
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.2.5 Setting the Alarm Notification Format

You can set the remote notification format of the alarm, including setting the email
subject and contents of the mail notification.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Message Format.

3. Set the remote notification message format.

4 In the Email Notification tab, click the Select the Field buttons in the Title
and Content panes respectively to select the subject and content fields of
the mail to be sent.

4 Select the SMS Notification tab, and click the Select the Field button to
select the content field to be sent.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings take effect
immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

settings in case of setting error.

254 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.2.6 Setting the Sending Delay of the Remote Alarm

Notification

Set the delayed duration to send the remote notification upon the occurrence of the
alarm. If the alarm is still not cleared after the duration, the remote notification will be
sent; otherwise, it will not be sent.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. In the left pane, select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Remote

Notification Settings→Sending Delay.

3. Select the alarm codes needing transmission delay. You can isolate the target
alarm codes rapidly via selecting the NE type or the searching function.

Version: A 255
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

u The remote notification for the alarm codes in the Alarm Delay
Settings will be sent with a delay of 10 seconds by default.

u You can modify the delay time interval of a certain alarm as required.

4. Click Set the Alarm Delay Time.

5. Set the alarm delay time interval and then click Apply. Update the Alarm
Forward Time of the selected alarm code to the new values set.

6. Click Apply after the settings are completed. The settings immediately take
effect.

6.2.7 Setting Remote Notification Rules of the Alarm

By setting the alarm remote notification rules (including the receiver information,
notification conditions, alarm sources, and time limit), the alarms meeting the rules
will be automatically sent to the maintenance personnel so that they can obtain the
alarm information in a timely manner even if they are not on site.

256 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Notification Settings from the main menu.

2. On the Alarm Notification Setting tab, click Create Receiver Information.

3. Set the related information such as the receiver information, notification

conditions, alarm sources, and time limit as required, and click OK.

4. (Optional) In the left pane, select the corresponding receiver and modify the
relevant information if necessary in the right pane. Click Save All.

Version: A 257
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5. (Optional) In the left pane, select the Receiver Information node, right-click
the corresponding receiver on the right pane, and select Enable / Disable.

6.2.8 Sending Remote Notification of Alarms

Through the UNM2000 client, maintainers in the equipment room can send alarms
of equipment in different regions to maintainers nearby according to the
geographical distribution, so as to ensure alarm processing in a timely manner and
improve device maintenance efficiency.

Background Information

u Manual sending of remote notifications of alarms is applicable only to current

alarms.

258 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

u Email subject, email content, and message content can be set by referring to
Setting the Alarm Notification Format.

Prerequisite

u Parameters and rules for remote notifications of alarms have been configured.

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Right-click an NE on the main topology and select Current Alarm.

2. On the Current Alarm tab, right-click an alarm entry and select Remote
Notification→Email/Message to open the Send a Mail to Notify or Notify via
SMS dialog box.

3. Select Receiver and click OK.

6.3 Setting Alarm Rules

This section introduces how to set the alarm reporting rules and shielding rules.

6.3.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Rules

You can set the alarm reporting rules to automatically report the alarms that you
concern most. These alarms will be automatically reported to the UNM2000 upon
their occurrence. For the unnecessary alarms, you can set not to report them so as
to minimize the influence on the UNM2000 performance caused by a large number
of alarms.

Version: A 259
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.3.1.1 Viewing Alarm Reporting Rules

You can view whether the existing alarm reporting rules meet the requirements for
current network maintenance.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingAlarm Reporting Settings from the main menu to

display the Alarm Reporting Setting tab.

2. Select Report Rule in the left pane, and view the existing reporting rules in the
right pane.

3. Click before Report Rule, select the corresponding alarm reporting rule, and
then view the related information of the rule in the right pane.

6.3.1.2 Setting Alarm Reporting Rules

When the existing alarm reporting rules cannot meet the requirements for device
maintenance, you can create alarm reporting rules as described below.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm reporting rule has been planned according to the
maintenance requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Reporting Settings from the main menu to

display the Alarm Report Setting tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Alarm Report
Rule dialog box.

260 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

No. Access Method

1 Click Report Rule in the left pane, and click Create in the right pane.

Select Report Rule in the left pane, right-click in the blank area in the right pane
2
and select Create from the shortcut menu.
3 Right-click Report Rule in the left pane and select Create from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Alarm Report Rule dialog box, set the alarm reporting rules as
required.

Note:

u Click Copy from Other Rule, and select the desired reporting rule in
the Select the Report Rule dialog box to copy the related
information of the selected reporting rule. This can improve the
setting efficiency.

u If the continuous reporting mode is enabled, the alarms meeting the

reporting rules will be reported again after the set time interval
expires.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Other Operations

Right-click an alarm reporting rule entry in the right pane and select Delete, Refresh,
Enable / Disable, Print, Copy Cell or Export from the shortcut menu to perform the
corresponding operation.

Version: A 261
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.3.2 Managing Alarm Shielding Rules

The alarm shielding rules are used to shield some NE alarms so that you can focus
on important alarms, improving the failure solving efficiency. After the alarm
shielding rules are set, the shielded alarms are neither saved into the alarm
database nor displayed.

6.3.2.1 Viewing Alarm Shielding Rules

You can view whether the existing alarm shielding rules meet the maintenance
requirements of the UNM2000 and the NE.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Shield Rule Management from the main

menu to open the Alarm Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Select View Current Alarm Shield Rule in the left pane, and view the existing
current alarm shielding rules in the right pane.

3. Click before Current Alarm Shield Rule, select the corresponding alarm
shielding rule, and view the related information of the rule in the right pane.

6.3.2.2 Setting Alarm Filter Rules

When the existing alarm filter rules cannot meet the management and maintenance
requirements of the UNM2000 and NEs, you can create alarm filter rules as
described below.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

262 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Settings→Alarm Shield Rule from the main menu to open the
Alarm Shield Rule Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Alarm Report
Rule dialog box.

Number Path
Click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane and click Create in the right
1
pane.

Click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane, right-click in the right pane
2
and select Create from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Alarm Shield Rule Management in the left pane and select Create from
3
the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Current Alarm Shield Rule dialog box, set the alarm filter rule
according to the planning.

Note:

u On the Shield Conditions tab, select the ONU service level and set
the alarm shielding rule applicable to different ONU service levels.

u Click Copy from Other Rule to open the Select Shield Rule dialog
box and select the desired filter rule to copy its rule settings. This can
improve the setting efficiency.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Version: A 263
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

Right-click the alarm reporting rule entry in the right pane and select the Delete,
Refresh, Enable / Disable, Print, Copy Cell or Export operation.

6.3.2.3 Setting Northbound Interface Filter Rules

When some alarms need not be reported to the third-party EMS through the
northbound interface, you can set northbound interface alarm filter rules to fitter
these alarms so as to improve the alarm processing efficiency.

Background Information

u The shielding rules do not apply to the alarms already reported. They are only
applicable to the subsequent alarms matching the shielding rules.

u The filtered alarms will not be reported to the northbound interface.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingNorthbound Interface Shield Rule Management from

the main menu to open the Northbound Interface File Rule Management tab.

2. Click Create Rule.

3. In the displayed Northbound Interface Filter Rule dialog box, set the filter
rules.

264 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Note:

On the Alarm Source tab, select the ONU service level and set the alarm
shielding rule applicable to different ONU service levels.

4. Click OK to add a northbound interface alarm filter rule and filter the current
alarm in specific condition. You can view the added northbound interface alarm
filter rule in the Northbound Interface File Rule Management tab.

Other Operations

On the Filter Rule of North tab, right-click a northbound interface alarm rule and
select the desired option from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding
operations, including Modify Rule, Delete Rule, Disable Rule, Copy Rule, etc.

6.3.2.4 Setting Alarm Vibration Shielding Rules

When some alarms need not be reported, you can set alarm vibration shielding
rules to fitter these alarms so as to improve the alarm processing efficiency.

Background Information

u When an alarm is generated several times in the delay time, but the reporting
times do no reach the preset repetition times, the UNM2000 only displays the
number of alarm occurrence times without reporting the alarm repeatedly.

u When the reporting times of an alarm reach the preset repetition times in the
delay time, the UNM2000 only displays the number of alarm occurrence times
and mark the alarm as a vibration alarm, without reporting the alarm repeatedly.

Version: A 265
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The desired alarm filter rule has been planned according to the maintenance
requirement.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management from the

main menu.

2. Click Create.

3. In the Create Current Alarm Vibration Shield Rule dialog box, set the alarm
level, alarm type, alarm delay time and alarm vibration times.

4. Click OK to add an alarm filter rule and filter the current alarm in specific
condition. The newly added alarm vibration shielding rules can be viewed on
the Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management tab.

Other Operations

In the Alarm Vibration Shield Rule Management tab, right-click an alarm filter rule
and select the operations, such as Delete and Copy.

266 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.3.2.5 Setting Alarm Frequency Analysis Rules

For alarms with a large quantity but little impact in current networks (such as ONU
fiber cut alarm, power disconnection alarm and MGC link alarm), you can set the
alarm frequency analysis rules and set Handling Strategy and Triggering
Conditions for different alarms. The UNM2000 will filter the alarms or generate new
alarms based on the rules.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule from the main

menu to open the Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule tab.

2. Perform the following operations.

Operation Procedure
1. In the Alarm Frequency Analysis Rule tab, select Add.
Adding an alarm
2. In the Object dialog box, set the parameters according to the
frequency analysis
planning.
rule
3. Click OK.
Modifying an alarm
1. Select a desired rule and click Modify.
frequency analysis
2. Modify the rules according to the requirements and click OK.
rule
1. Select a desired rack and click Delete Rule.

Deleting an alarm Note:

frequency analysis
rule Press Shift or Ctrl to select multiple rules
simultaneously.
2. Click Yes in the Delete Rule alert box.
Enabling/Disabling an
alarm frequency Select a desired rule and click Enable/Disable.
analysis rule

Version: A 267
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.4 Managing the Alarm Project Status

During engineering installation or expansion, NEs may generate alarms. After

collecting the alarms, the UNM2000 reports the alarms and dispatches the work
orders. A large number of invalid work orders affects the work order handling
efficiency. After setting the managed object to maintenance status, alarms
generated by the object are reported to the UNM2000 but not to the northbound
interface, thereby avoiding a large number of invalid work orders dispatched.

6.4.1 Managing Project Status Tasks

This section introduces how to create, view, modify and delete project status tasks.

Background Information

u The UNM2000 provides default tasks. The default tasks cannot be deleted or
modified, and the task status cannot be changed.

u The managed objects of project tasks can be logical domains, NEs, cards, or
ports.

u When "Project Status" of the project task is changed to "Active", the status of
the managed object is changed to "Project Status".

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Choose Alarm→Project Status Task from the main menu.

2. Perform the following operations by referring to the table below.

268 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Operation Procedure
1. Click Add at the bottom right of the Project Status Task tab.
2. Set Task Information and Device Information in the Create
Create a project task
Project Task dialog box.
3. After the settings are completed, click OK.

1. Select a project task to be modified on the Project Status Task

tab, and click Modify.
Modify a project task 2. Set Task Information and Device Information in the Modify
Task dialog box.
3. Click OK.
1. Select a project task to be deleted on the Project Status Task
Delete a project task tab.
2. Click Delete and then click Yes in the alert box.
1. Click Query on the Project Status Task tab.
Query project tasks 2. Set query criteria in the Query Project Task dialog box and click
OK.
Right-click a project task with Project Status set to Active on the
Project Status Task tab, and select Stop from the shortcut menu.
Stop a project task
Note: After a project task is suspended, the object that only
exists in this project changes from Project Status to Normal.

1. Right-click a project task with Task Status set to Active on the

Project Status Task tab, and select Suspend from the shortcut
Suspend a project menu.
task 2. Click Yes in the displayed alert box.
Note: After a project task is stopped, the object that only exists in
this project changes from Project Status to Normal.

Version: A 269
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Operation Procedure
1. Right-click a project task with Task Status set to Active on the
Recover a project Project Status Task tab, and select Recover from the shortcut
task menu.
2. Click Yes in the displayed alert box.

1. Select a project task to be configured on the Project Status Task

tab.
2. Click View Details. The managed object of the selected task is
displayed in the lower pane.
3. Configure managed objects of the project task as needed.

Configure managed
4 Click Add Device. In the Add Device dialog box, select an
objects of a project
object to be added to the project, and click OK.
task
4 Select the managed object to be deleted, click Delete
Device and click Yes in the displayed alert box.

4. Select the managed object and click Query Project Status

Alarm. On the Device Alarm tab, view the project status alarm of
the selected object.

Related Operations

u Select an NE on the Main Topology tab, or select an NE, card or port in the NE
Manager window. Then right-click to select Manage Project Status→Create
Project Task to create a project task for the selected object.

u Select an NE on the Main Topology tab, or select an NE, card or port in the NE
Manager window. Then right-click to select Manage Project Status→Add to
Project Task to add the selected object to an existing project task.

6.4.2 Managing Project Status of NEs

You can manually set the alarm maintenance status of an object on the UNM2000.
By setting the maintenance status to Project Status, you can directly identify and
mask non-concerned alarms to rapidly locate and handle important alarms.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

270 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Procedure

1. On the Main Topology tab, select an NE, or select an NE, a card or a port in
the NE Manager window. Then right-click to select Manage Project Status→
Modify Project Task from the shortcut menu.

2. In the Modify Project Status dialog box, set the alarm maintenance status of
the selected object, and click OK.

3. Click Close in the displayed alert box.

6.5 Setting Alarm Related Parameters

Set the alarm-related parameters, including the alarm reporting rules, alarm
shielding rules, alarm history definition and other local settings.

6.5.1 Setting the Audible Alarms

You can set different sounds for alarms of different levels and set the play priority of
the alarm sounds. When an alarm occurs, the loudspeaker on the computer running
the client will play the corresponding sound to notify of the reported alarm of the
specific level.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→Alarm Sound in the left pane to open

the dialog box.

Version: A 271
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

6.5.2 Enabling / Disabling the Audio Alarm

The following introduces how to enable / disable the audio alarm. This operation is
only valid to the current client end. The UNM2000 client will play different alarm
sounds for alarms of different levels upon their occurrence in the UNM2000 or NE.
You can select whether to enable the audio alarm in the UNM2000.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

u Disable the audio alarm.

272 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Click to change it to .

u Enable the audio alarm.

Click to change it to .

Note:

For other setting items related to the audio alarm, see Setting the Audible
Alarms.

6.5.3 Setting the Alarm Color

You can set different colors for alarms of different levels, which is convenient for you
to browse the focused alarms.

Background Information

u After the colors corresponding to alarms of different levels are set, the alarm
icons in the topology view, alarm entries queried and alarm indicators on the
alarm bulletin board will appear in the set colors.

u The UNM2000 provides four colors corresponding to four alarm levels. Critical
alarms: ; major alarms: ; minor alarms: ; warning alarms: .

u The GUI display settings are applicable to all users at any client.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings→Alarm Settings→Local Alarm→

Alarm Color dialog box.

2. In the Set a Color for the Alarm Level combo box, click on the right to
select the desired color for each alarm level.

3. In the Set the Background Color of the List Corresponding to the Alarm
combo box, click on the right to select the desired colors for different
confirmation statuses.

4. Click Apply→OK to apply the settings.

Version: A 273
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.5.4 Setting the Display Modes of New Alarms / Events

You can set the display modes of new alarms / events as required.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→New Alarm / Event in the left pane to

open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

274 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.5.5 Setting Other Items of the Local Alarms

Other local alarm settings include the alarm monitoring template, maximum number
of startup templates as well as whether to enable alarm automatic reporting upon
client startup.

Background Information

This setting is only applicable to the current client end.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm settings→Local Setting→Others in the left pane to open the

dialog box.

3. Set the parameters according to your needs and then click Apply. The settings
will take effect immediately.

4. Select Alarm→Alarm Query Template Management from the main menu to

view the parameters already set.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

6.5.6 Setting the Definition of the Alarm History

You can set the delay for switching current alarms to the alarm history as required.

Background Information

When the current alarms are confirmed and cleared, they are switched to the alarm
history after the preset delay time.

Version: A 275
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Alarm History Definition in the

left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Set the delay for switching current alarms to the alarm history and then click
Apply to apply the settings.

6.5.7 Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules

For convenient maintenance, the UNM2000 provides the automatic confirmation by

alarm level or by rule for the unconfirmed but cleared alarms. You can set the
automatic confirmation rules for the cleared alarms.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Auto Confirm in the left pane to

open the dialog box.

276 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

3. Click Add to open the dialog box.

4. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Confirming Condition, Alarm

Source and Alarm Source and Alarm Source Type tabs respectively. Then
click OK to create an automatic confirmation rule.

5. Return to the Auto Confirm dialog box, and click Apply to make the settings
valid.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore the parameters to the default

values.

6.5.8 Setting Automatic Alarm Synchronization

When the automatic alarm synchronization is set, the alarms will be automatically
synchronized after the UNM2000 recovers from the communication interruption with
the NE or restarts so as to ensure the consistency of the alarms at the UNM2000
side and NE side.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: A 277
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Auto Synchronization in the left

pane to open the dialog box.

Set the All alarms will be synchronized when network management

service starts up and Auto Synchronize Equipment Alarm after
Communication Interruption is Restored check boxes.

Note:

u Automatically synchronizing all alarms after network management

services are started: After the network management services are
started, the UNM2000 not only synchronizes alarm data of NEs, but
also synchronizes existing alarm information from the alarm
services.

u Automatically synchronizing device alarms after a communication

interruption is recovered: After the communication interruption is
recovered, the UNM2000 issues a polling command to synchronize
NE alarms to the UNM2000. For IPRAN and POTN devices, the
UNM2000 issues forcible synchronization commands to synchronize
NE alarms to the UNM2000.

6.5.9 Converting Events to Alarms

You can convert events into alarms by adding or deleting events in a batch manner.
The UNM2000 processes the alarms converted from events as alarms.

278 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

The authority of the Event to Alarm Settings function is configured in the authority
and domain division management. Only the user properly authorized can perform
this function.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→SettingEvent to Alarm Settings from the UNM2000 main

menu.

2. On the Event to Alarm Settings tab, select the desired event entries.

3. Click Save.

6.6 Managing Alarm / Event Templates

The UNM2000 supports setting the alarm / event query conditions or statistical
conditions as templates. You can use the predefined alarm / event template to
quickly set the filter conditions and attributes of alarms / events.

6.6.1 Alarm Template

The alarm template is used to save the alarm query / statistical conditions. The
alarm template simplifies the setting operation and enables you to quickly complete
the settings of the alarm browsing and alarm attributes.

Version: A 279
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The UNM2000 allows you to set the alarm templates for different objects, such as
network blocks, NEs, and cards..

The alarm templates include the following types:

u Current alarm query template

u Alarm history query template

u Alarm log query template

u Current alarm log statistical template

u Alarm history log statistical template

u Alarm filter template

The following introduces how to view, add, delete and modify various alarm
templates.

6.6.1.1 Viewing Alarm Templates

You can view the alarm template already set and saved. If the current alarm
template meets your requirements for querying alarms, you can use the template
directory without the need to set the conditions.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Select Alarm Profile in the left pane of the Alarm Query Template
Management tab, and view the quantity and attributes of various preset
templates in the right pane.

3. Click the desired alarm template type and select the specific number of this
type of template to view the details.

280 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.6.1.2 Creating an Alarm Template

You can save the commonly used alarm query / statistics conditions as a template
so that you can directly use the template next time for the same query or statistics,
without the need to set the conditions again.

Note:

The following uses the current alarm query template as an example. You
can follow the same procedures to add other templates with the only
difference in the access method.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Current Alarm
Template dialog box.

No. Access Method

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, and click Create
1
Current Alarm Template in the right pane.

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the right
2
pane and select Create Current Alarm Template from the shortcut menu.

Right-click Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane and select Create
3
Current Alarm Template from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the alarm query conditions in the Create Current Alarm Template dialog
box as needed.

Version: A 281
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Click Copy from Another Template, and select the desired alarm
template in the Select Template dialog box to copy the related
information of the selected alarm template. This can improve the setting
efficiency.

4. After completing the settings, click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Select Current Alarm Query Template in the left pane, select the new alarm
template entry in the right pane and click the desired button at the bottom, or right-
click the entry and select Delete, Refresh, Print, Copy Cell or Export from the
shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

6.6.1.3 Modifying an Alarm Template

When setting the alarm template, you can modify the settings in case the query
condition setting error occurs.

Note:

The following uses the current alarm query template as an example. You
can follow the same procedures to modify other templates with the only
difference in the access method.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

282 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

2. Select Alarm Profile in the left pane of the Alarm Query Template
Management tab, and view the quantity and attributes of various preset
templates in the right pane.

3. Click the desired alarm template type and select the specific number of this
type of template to view the details.

4. Modify the relevant information of the alarm template in the right pane and click
Apply.

6.6.1.4 Setting the Template Attributes

At the UNM2000 client, you can set the alarm template as a monitoring template,
startup template or default template to facilitate monitoring, querying or gathering
statistics of alarms.

Background Information

u Default template:When you query or gather statistics of the alarms via the
menu, the UNM2000 will use this template to open the tab of the corresponding
functions. Only one default template can be set for a type of alarm templates.

u Monitoring profile:The Alarm Statistics dialog box in the toolbar of the

UNM2000 client will display the alarm statistics according to this template. The
monitoring template needs to be a current alarm template. You can set five
monitoring templates at most.

Note:

After the monitoring template is set to the current template in the Alarm
Statistics dialog box, the four indicators (in different colors) on the
toolbar will display the statistics data of alarms with various levels
according to the current template.

u Monitoring profile:The Alarm Statistics dialog box in the toolbar of the

UNM2000 client will display the alarm statistics according to this template. The
monitoring template need to be a current alarm template. You can set five
monitoring templates at most.

Version: A 283
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Alarm Query Template to open the Alarm
Query Template Management tab.

2. Set the alarm template attribute, that is, set the alarm profile to be a monitoring
template or startup template.

4 Set the alarm template as a monitoring template.

a) In the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management tab,

select Monitor Template Management.

b) Right-click in the blank area of the right pane and select Select, or
click the Select button at the lower-right corner.

c) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding alarm

and click OK to set the template as a monitoring template.

d) Select a monitoring template and click Delete Template Settings, or

right-click the monitoring template and select Delete Template
Settings to undo setting the alarm template as a monitoring template.

4 Set the alarm template as a startup template.

a) In the left pane of the Alarm Query Template Management tab,

select Startup Template Management.

b) Right-click in the blank area of the right pane and select Select, or
click the Select button at the lower-right corner.

c) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding alarm

and click OK to set the template as a startup template.

d) Select the starting template and click Delete Template Settings, or

right-click the startup template and select Delete Template Settings
to undo setting the alarm template as a startup template.

284 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.6.2 Event Template

The event template simplifies the setting operation and enables you to quickly
complete the settings of the event browsing. The event template is used to save the
event query or statistical conditions.

The UNM2000 allows you to set the event templates for different objects, such as
network blocks, NEs, and cards. Monitoring and managing events can ensure the
normal operation of the network.

6.6.2.1 Viewing Event Templates

Save the frequently used event query conditions into a template, so as to use the
template for quick queries in the future.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event
Query Template tab.

2. Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane to view the existing event
query templates.

3. Click the desired event template type and select the specific entry of this type to
view the details.

6.6.2.2 Creating an Event Template

Save the frequently used event query conditions into a template, so as to use the
template for quick query in the future.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event
Query Template tab.

Version: A 285
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the New Event Query
Template dialog box.

No. Access Method

Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane and click Create
1
Event Query Template in the right pane.

Right-click Event Report Query Template in the left pane and select
2
Create Event Query Template from the shortcut menu.

Click Create Event Query Template in the left pane, right-click in the
3 right pane and select Create Event Query Template from the shortcut
menu.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic Information, Filter Info, and Event Source
tabs as required, and click OK. Then the new event query template will be
displayed in the template list.

Note:

Click Select Template, and you can copy all settings except Template
Name from other templates. This can improve the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

Right-click the corresponding query template, and select operations such as Copy,
Delete, Refresh, Set as Default Template / Cancel Default Template, Print, Copy
Cell or Export.

Note:

The default profile (All Object) of the system cannot be copied, deleted,
and modified.

6.6.2.3 Modifying an Event Template

When setting the event template, you can modify the event query template settings
in case the query condition setting error occurs.

286 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Alarm→Event Query Template to open the Event
Query Template tab.

2. Click Event Report Query Template in the left pane to view the existing event
query templates.

3. Click the event reporting query template to view the detailed settings of the
template.

4. Modify the event query reporting template in the right pane and click Save All.

6.7 Managing Alarm Configurations

The UNM2000 supports managing alarm reporting management templates and

binding them with the devices.

6.7.1 Managing Alarm Reporting Templates

The UNM2000 supports creating, modifying and deleting alarm reporting templates.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

Creating Alarm Reporting Templates

1. In the NE Manager window, select .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Alarm Management→Alarm Report Manage

Profile and Bind→Alarm Report Manage Profile.

3. On the Alarm Report Manage Profile tab, click .

Version: A 287
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the number of new alarm reporting templates
and click OK.

5. Set the template name and object type in the left pane.

6. Set whether to report the alarm upon occurrence in the right pane.

Modifying Templates in a Batch Manner

1. Click .

2. Select the desired template in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box and
modify the parameters in the Configuration Item pane.

Deleting a Template

Select a template and click .

6.7.2 Binding Alarm Reporting Templates

The UNM2000 supports binding alarm reporting templates with objects.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the NE Manager window, select .

288 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

2. In the Operational Tree, select Alarm Management→Alarm Report Manage

Profile and Bind→Alarm Report Manage Profile Bind.

3. Select the desired object in the left device tree and set the template name in the
drop-down list in the right pane.

4. Click to deliver the configuration to the device.

5. Batch settings: Select multiple objects, click and set the templates in the
Configure Template in Batch Manner dialog box.

6.8 Synchronizing Alarms

Synchronizing alarms includes synchronizing the current alarms of NEs and the
UNM2000. With this function, you can synchronize the alarms at the NE side with
those at the UNM2000 side and synchronize the current alarms of the UNM2000
with the alarms in the alarm database of the UNM2000. The UNM2000 supports
manual alarm synchronization.

6.8.1 Synchronizing Alarms Manually

In case of network interruption, the alarms at the UNM2000 side may be

inconsistent with those at the NE side. To actually reflect the alarm data of the NEs,
you can synchronize the alarms of the selected NEs to the UNM2000 so as to
ensure the alarm data at the UNM2000 and at the NE side are consistent.

Background Information

Generally, the UNM2000 will automatically synchronize the alarm data at the NE
side with those at the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. Right-click the object in the main topology and select Open NE Manager from
the shortcut menu to access the NE Manager GUI.

2. Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select Manual
Alarm Synchronization from the shortcut menu. Then click Close in the
displayed alert box. The manual alarm synchronization is completed.

Version: A 289
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.8.2 Synchronizing Alarms in Batches

In case of network interruption or other failures, alarm data on the UNM2000 may be
inconsistent with those on NEs. In this version, NE alarms can be synchronized to
the UNM2000 in a batch manner at the scheduled time, and reported to a third-party
platform via northbound interfaces.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides default alarm batch synchronization tasks, which cannot be
deleted. You can modify the attributes of a task as needed.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Administrator Group authority or higher.

u You have turned on the switch for synchronizing alarms in batches as follows.

1) Access the D:\unm2000\server\etc directory and open the platform-

options.ini file.

2) Search for BatchSyncAlarm and set enable to true.

3) After the parameters are set, restart the EMS services.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Batch Sync Alarm Task in the left pane to

view existing alarm batch synchronization tasks.

3. Select one of the following access methods to open the Property dialog box of
an alarm batch synchronization task.

4 Double-click a desired alarm batch synchronization task in the right pane.

4 Right-click a desired alarm batch synchronization task in the right pane

and select Attribute from the shortcut menu.

290 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4 Click before Batch Sync Alarm Task in the left pane, right-click a
desired alarm batch synchronization alarm task in the right pane and select
Attribute from the shortcut menu.

4. Set the attributes of the alarm batch synchronization task referring to Table 6-5,
and click OK.

Table 6-5 Settings of an Alarm Batch Synchronization Task

Parameter Description

Task name Name of the alarm batch synchronization task, which cannot be edited.

Status of the task. It is disabled by default.

Enable u Select: Enable the task.
u Deselect: Disable the task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 365.
Task Type
u Every week: Select the effective days in every week.
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every month.

Execution time of a periodic task.

Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

End time of a periodic task. It is valid after being selected.

End time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

5. (Optional) After the task is executed successfully, you can view the execution
result in the lower right pane.

6.9 Monitoring Network Alarms

By monitoring the network alarms, you can know the operating status of the network
in a timely manner.

The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the current alarms and the alarm history
according to the alarm statuses.

u Current alarm: The alarm data saved in the current alarm database of the
UNM2000.

Version: A 291
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The same alarm frequently generated by an object will be displayed as one

entry in the current alarm list. You can view the alarm log to query all the alarm
records.

u Alarm history: The current alarms that have been cleared and those confirmed
and cleared will be added into the alarm history after a preset period.

The alarm history will be saved into the alarm history database from the current
alarm database. See Setting the Definition of the Alarm History regarding how
to set the delay time for transferring the current alarms to the alarm history.

6.9.1 Viewing Current Alarms

You can view the current alarms of the entire network or a certain object, so as to
analyze the alarm information and perform the troubleshooting.

Procedure

1. Select one of the access methods in Table 6-6 to open the Query Current
Alarm dialog box.

Note:

If you have set a default template for querying current alarms, you can
select one of the following access methods to directly open the Current
Alarm tab and display alarm information queried by the default template.

Table 6-6 Access Methods for Viewing Current Alarms

Operation Access Method

Select Alarm→Current Alarm from the main menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane, and select Current
Alarm from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the topology view, and select Current
Viewing Alarm from the shortcut menu.
current alarms In the NE manager window, select Alarm→Current Alarm from the main
menu.
In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card or port, and select Current Alarm from the shortcut
menu.

292 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Table 6-6 Access Methods for Viewing Current Alarms (Continued)

Operation Access Method

In the Subrack View pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card, and select Current Alarm from the shortcut menu.

2. Set query conditions in the Query Current Alarm dialog box and click OK.

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Query Current Alarm dialog box,
you can click Save As template to save the query conditions as a
template. You can use this template directly for querying according to the
same conditions next time, without repeated settings.

3. Re-set the query condition to view the current alarms.

4 Select a template to query current alarms.

a) On the Current Alarm tab, click Query by Template in the lower part.

b) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding template

and click OK to view the alarm information queried by the selected
template.

4 Set the query condition to view the current alarms.

a) On the Current Alarm tab, click Query in the lower part.

b) Reset the query conditions in the Query Current Alarm dialog box as
needed.

c) After completing the settings, click OK to view the current alarms

meeting the conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper left corner of the Current Alarm tab to
perform the following operations.

4 Click to set whether to automatically report updated alarms.

Version: A 293
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Click to set whether the system automatically scrolls the alarm display
table when the alarms are reported.

4 Click to select the corresponding template for query.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the critical
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the major
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the minor
alarms.

4 Click to set whether the current alarm window displays only the
warning alarms.

u Click the buttons at the bottom-right corner of the Current Alarm tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected
alarm.

In Additional Information of the current alarm details, you can view the
threshold values and current performance value when a threshold-
crossing alarm is generated.

4 Select an alarm and click Confirm Alarm. The Confirmation Status of

the alarm becomes User Confirmation.

4 Select an alarm and click Clear Alarm. The Clear Status of the alarm
becomes User Clearance.

6.9.2 Viewing Alarm History

You can view the alarm history of a certain object or all objects in the entire network
to understand the alarms that occurred so as to facilitate failure analysis.

294 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Background Information

u The current alarm that is cleared and confirmed on the UNM2000 is converted
into a history alarm and saved in the history alarm after the specified time lapse
is due. For details about the time lapse settings, see Setting the Definition of
the Alarm History.

u Due to the limit of rows in the table, when the number of alarms exceeds the
limit, only the latest history alarms in compliance with the rules are displayed.
You can query non-displayed alarms by setting filter conditions.

Procedure

1. Select one of the access methods in Table 6-7 to open the Alarm History
Query dialog box.

Note:

If a default history alarm query template is set for the current user, you
can select one of the following access methods to directly open the
Alarm History tab and display alarm information queried by the default
template.

Table 6-7 Access Methods for Viewing the Alarm History

Operation Access Method

In the Subrack View pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card and select History Alarm from the shortcut menu.

Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select History
Alarm from the shortcut menu.
Right-click the corresponding NE in the topology view and select History
Viewing Alarm
Alarm from the shortcut menu.
History
Select Alarm→History Alarm from the main menu in the NE manager
window.
In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card or port and select History Alarm from the shortcut menu.

Select Alarm→Alarm History from the main menu.

2. Set query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box and click OK.

Version: A 295
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box,
you can click Save As template to save the query conditions as a
template. You can use this template directly for querying according to the
same conditions next time, without repeated settings.

3. Re-set the query conditions to query history alarms.

4 Select a template to query history alarms.

a) On the Alarm History tab, click Query by Template in the lower part.

b) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding template

and click OK to view the history alarm information queried by the
selected template.

4 Set the query conditions to query history alarms.

a) On the Alarm History tab, click Query in the lower part.

b) Reset the query conditions in the Alarm History Query dialog box as
needed.

c) After completing the settings, click OK to view the alarm history

meeting the set conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Alarm History tab to
perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to display only the critical alarms on the alarm history tab.

4 Click to display only the major alarms on the alarm history tab.

4 Click to display only the minor alarms on the alarm history tab.

4 Click to display only the warning alarms on the alarm history tab.

u Perform operations by clicking buttons. Click the buttons at the lower right
corner of the tab to perform the following operations.

296 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected
alarm.

In Additional Information of the history alarm details, you can view the
performance threshold values and current values at the beginning and end
of a threshold-crossing alarm.

4 Click Refresh to refresh the alarms.

4 Right-click an alarm, and you can perform the following operations via the
shortcut menu: locating, refreshing, exporting, etc. For operations related
to alarm handling, see Handling Alarms.

6.9.3 Viewing Related Alarms

You can view the NE alarms to understand the running status of the NE.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select View Current Alarm of

Attributed NE / View NE Alarm History to view the current alarm / alarm
history of the NE corresponding to the alarm.

Version: A 297
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.9.4 Viewing Alarm Details

By viewing the alarm details, you can obtain the alarm name, alarm reason,
processing suggestion and location.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm / Alarm History tab.

2. Select an alarm and click View Details in the lower right corner to view the
details of the selected alarm.

3. Right-click the alarm and select Details from the shortcut menu to view the
alarm details in text. You can click Copy to copy the alarm details to the
clipboard.

298 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Subsequent Operation

You can process the alarm according to the processing suggestions on the
Maintenance Information tab in the alarm details pane.

6.9.5 Viewing Alarm Logs

You can query the log information for the alarms of the entire network or the
selected object via viewing the alarm logs.

Background Information

u The alarm log records all alarms received by the UNM2000. Each alarm is
displayed as a record.

u Current alarms are combined alarms. When an object reports an alarm for
multiple times, these same alarms are combined for display. The alarm ID
remains unchanged, but the alarm frequency increases.

u You can view each alarm entry on the Alarm Log tab, which includes current
alarm logs and history alarm logs.

Version: A 299
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Due to the limit of rows in the table, when the number of alarm logs exceeds the
limit, only the latest current alarm logs in compliance with the rules are
displayed. You can query non-displayed alarm logs by setting filter conditions.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Query Alarm Log from the main menu to open
the Query Alarm Logs dialog box.

Note:

If you have set a default template for querying alarm logs, the preceding
access method directly opens the Query Alarm Logs tab and displays
alarm log information queried by the default template.

2. Set the query conditions in the Query Alarm Logs dialog box and click OK.

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Alarm log query dialog box, you
can click Save as template to save the query conditions as a profile.
When querying according to the same conditions, you can select this
profile directly, without repeated settings.

3. Reset the query condition to view alarm logs.

4 Select a template to query alarm logs.

a) On the Query Alarm Log tab, click Query by Template in the lower
part.

b) In the Select Template dialog box, select the corresponding template

and click OK to view the alarm log information queried by the selected
template.

4 Set the query condition to view alarm logs.

a) On the Query Alarm Log tab, click Query in the lower part.

b) Reset the query conditions in the Query Alarm Logs dialog box as
needed.

c) Click OK to view the alarm logs meeting the conditions.

300 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Subsequent Operation

You can also perform the following operations as required after completing the
alarm log query information.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Alarm Log tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of critical alarms only on the Alarm
Log tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of major alarms only on the Alarm
Log tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of minor alarms only on the Alarm
Log tab.

4 Click to set whether to display logs of prompt alarms only on the Alarm
Log tab.

u Click the buttons at the bottom-right corner of the Alarm Log tab to perform the
corresponding operations.

4 Select an alarm and click View Details to view the details of the selected
alarm. For specific information, see Viewing Alarm Details.

In Additional Information of the alarm log details, you can view the
performance threshold values and current values at the beginning and
ending of a threshold-crossing alarm.

4 Click Refresh to refresh the alarms.

4 Click Query by the Template to select another template for query.

4 Click Query to open the Query Alarm Logs dialog box. Then reset the
query condition for query.

Version: A 301
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Select the shortcut menus. Right-click an alarm and select the corresponding
shortcut menu item to confirm, clear or locate the alarm. For operations related
to alarm handling, see Handling Alarms.

6.9.6 Viewing Alarm Log Statistics

You can set the statistics conditions to gather statistics of alarm logs.

Procedure

The procedures of gathering the alarm log statistics are similar. The following takes
gathering the current alarm log statistics as an example.

1. Select Alarm→Alarm Log→Current Alarm Log Statistics from the main

menu to open the Query Alarm Log Statistics dialog box.

Note:

If the default alarm log statistics template has been set, the system will
query according to the default template. For the operations of setting the
default alarm query template, see Alarm Template.

2. Set the statistics conditions in the Query Alarm Log Statistics dialog box, and
then click OK.

302 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Note:

After setting the query conditions in the Query Alarm Log Statistics
dialog box, you can click Save As template to save the query conditions
as a template. When querying according to the same conditions next time,
you can select this template directly, without repeated settings.

3. After completing the settings, click OK to view the statistics information of alarm
logs meeting the set conditions.

Subsequent Operation

You can perform the following operations as needed.

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Gather Current Alarm
Log Statistics tab to perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to select a different template for query.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a table.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a chart. You can select
different display and output modes by clicking different buttons.

¡ Click to print the current page.

¡ Click to export the current page as an image.

¡ Click to select the alarm levels displayed on the current page.

¡ Click to select the time points displayed in the chart from the
displayed list.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a curve chart.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a bar chart.

¡ Click to display the alarm log statistics in a pie chart.

4 Click to display the alarm log statistics in a curve comparison chart.

Version: A 303
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.9.7 Viewing Alarm Statistics

The following introduces how to view the alarm statistics through the alarm panel.

Procedure

1. Click on the shortcut toolbar of the main menu to open the Alarm
Statistics dialog box.

Note:

In the Alarm Statistics dialog box, the statistics are displayed in the way
you have selected.

Subsequent Operation

u Select Table Display.

Click the Table Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring template
and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm statistical
information is displayed in a table.

4 Select Flashing Alarm Indicator LED to flicker the corresponding LED

automatically on the toolbar when an alarm occurs.

4 Click the Select Template or right-click in the table display area to select
Select Template. In the displayed Select Template dialog box, select the
corresponding template and view its statistical information.

4 Select the corresponding row in the table and click Cancel Statistics or
right-click the row and select Cancel Statistics to cancel calculating the
alarm information.

304 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4 Select the corresponding row in the table and click Set to Current or right-
click the row and select Set to Current. After setting the selected template
as the current one, the four-color alarm indicator LEDs on the toolbar will
display the corresponding information of the current template.

4 Right-click in the table display area to select Alarm Query Template to

open the Alarm Query Template Management tab. Then add, delete or
modify the alarm query template as needed. For details, see Alarm
Template.

u Select Bar Chart Display.

Click the Bar Chart Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring
template and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm
statistical information is displayed in a bar chart.

u Select Pie Chart Display.

Click the Pie Chart Display tab, and select the corresponding monitoring
template and the statistical classification item. In the display pane, the alarm
statistical information is displayed in a pie chart.

Version: A 305
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.9.8 Viewing Reported Alarms

This section introduces how to view the reported alarms.

Prerequisite

The alarm reporting rules have been set and enabled.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→View the Reported Alarms from the main menu.

2. On the View Reported Alarm tab, view the information on the alarms meeting
the reporting conditions.

Note:

For the related operations of the buttons, shortcut icons, and shortcut
menus on the View Reported Alarm tab, see Viewing Current Alarms.

306 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

3. Click Report Setting at the bottom-right part of the tab, and access the Alarm
Report Setting tab to re-configure the alarm reporting rules.

4. Click Clear All Records at the bottom-right part of the tab to clear all the
records on the current tab. Then the tab will display the alarm information
reported after the records are cleared.

6.9.9 Querying Reported Events

By querying the reported events, you can obtain the running status of the system.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Query Reported Events from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Query Reported Events dialog box that
appears and click OK.

Note:

u If the default template has been set, the system will query according
to the default template.

u You can click Copy from Another Template in the Query Reported
Events dialog box to select an existing template for query.

u After setting the query conditions, you can click Save as Template
to save the current query conditions as a template.

3. On the Query Reported Events tab, view the query results.

Version: A 307
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

u Click the shortcut icons at the upper-left corner of the Query Reported Events
tab to perform the corresponding operations.

4 Click to set whether to automatically report updated events.

4 Click to set whether the system automatically scrolls the event display
table when the events are reported.

4 Click to select the corresponding template for query.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the critical
events.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the major
events.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the minor
events.

4 Click to set whether the current event window displays only the
warning events.

u Click the buttons at the bottom of the Query Reported Events tab to perform
the corresponding operations.

4 Click Query to re-set the query conditions in the Query Reported Events
dialog box and then click OK.

4 Click Query by Template, select the desired template in the Select

Template dialog box and then click OK.

4 Select an event entry and click View Details to view the detailed
information of the selected event.

u Right-click an event entry on the Query Reported Events tab and select the
shortcut menu items to perform the corresponding operations.

u Select Topology Location to locate the source NE that triggered the event in
the topology view so as to ascertain the physical position of the corresponding
NE in the network.

u Select View Event Report of the NE to display all the events that occurred on
the NE so as to analyze the running status of the NE.

u Select Remark to type the remark information of the selected event.

308 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

u Select Copy Cell to copy the information in the selected table cell to the
clipboard.

u Select Print to print the event logs.

u Select Export→Export All Records to export all reported events in format of

TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML to the specified directory.

u Select Export→Export Selected Record to export the selected events in

format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML to the specified directory.

6.10 Handling Alarms

When an alarm occurs, you should handle the alarm following certain procedures to
eliminate the fault, including viewing the detailed alarm information, isolating the
alarm, confirming the alarm and clearing the alarm.

6.10.1 Confirming Alarms

The UNM2000 supports manual and automatic confirmation of cleared alarms. The
manual alarm confirmation indicates that the alarm has been followed up.

Background Information

You can batch confirm alarms by specifying alarm names, levels, and types.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

u Confirm alarms manually.

1) Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2) Confirm alarms via one of the following ways:

¡ Select the corresponding alarm and click Confirm Alarm in the lower
right part of the tab or right-click the corresponding alarm and select
Confirm Alarm from the shortcut menu.

Version: A 309
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

¡ Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Confirm and Mark the
Alarms from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, enter the
remarks and click OK.

¡ Right-click an area on the corresponding tab and select Batch

Confirm Alarm from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box,
set the alarm confirmation conditions and click OK.

3) After manual alarm confirmation, the Confirmation Status of the

corresponding alarm is changed to User Confirmation.

u Confirm alarms automatically.

See Setting the Alarm Automatic Confirmation Rules for setting the automatic
confirmation rules of the cleared alarms.

By default, the system, at 00:00, automatically confirms the alarms that have
been cleared for one day and the Confirmation Status of the alarms is
changed to Auto Confirm.

Related Operation

If any alarm is to be re-focused, you can right-click this alarm and select Unconfirm
the Alarm. The Confirmation Status of this alarm will subsequently change to
Unconfirmed.

310 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

Note:

You can only confirm alarms on the Alarm Log tab and cannot cancel
any alarm confirmation on this tab.

6.10.2 Clearing Alarms Manually

After a failure is eliminated, the corresponding alarms will be cleared automatically.

If the alarms cannot be cleared automatically, you can remove them manually.

Background Information

u For automatically cleared alarms, the "Cleared By" item displays the name of
the NE which the alarm object belongs to.

u For manually cleared alarms, the "Cleared By" item displays the user who
cleared the alarms.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Clear Alarm, or click Clear
Alarm at the lower right corner of the tab. The Clear Status of the
corresponding alarm changes to User Clearance.

6.10.3 Confirming and Clearing Alarms

When a device is faulty, you can confirm and clear alarms with one click.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: A 311
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings→Alarm Settings→Server Settings→

Alarm Basic Setting from the main menu.

2. In the Alarm Basic Setting dialog box, select Show Confirming and Clearing
Alarm Function.

3. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

4. Select the corresponding alarm and click Confirm and Clear Alarm in the
lower right part of the tab, or right-click the corresponding alarm and select
Confirm and Clear Alarm from the shortcut menu.

6.10.4 Clearing Alarms From the Device

After a failure is eliminated, the corresponding alarms will be cleared automatically.

If the alarms cannot be cleared automatically, you can remove them manually.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Clear Alarm From Device.

6.10.5 Disabling the Event-to-Alarm Conversion

The following introduces how to convert the alarms that are previously converted
from events back to events.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm or Alarm Log tab.

312 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

2. Select one or more alarms and right-click to select Disable Event to Alarm.

6.10.6 Locating Alarms

This function enables you to locate the topological object, ONU list, card or port that
generates this alarm.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm, Alarm History or Alarm Log tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Topology Location / Locate to

Card or Port / Locate to ONU List.

6.10.7 Shielding Alarms

The following introduces how to shield a certain alarm in the current alarm query
GUI. When some alarms do not need to be handled, you can shield these alarms.

Background Information

u The shielding rules do not apply to the alarms already reported. They are only
applicable to the subsequent alarms matching the shielding rules.

u The shielded alarms are neither saved in the alarm database nor displayed.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Filter.

3. In the Shield Alarm dialog box, set the filter rules.

Version: A 313
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click OK to add an alarm shielding rule and shield the alarm matching the
specified condition.

Note:

u The newly added alarm shielding rules can be viewed on the Alarm
Shield Rule tab.

u To cancel an alarm shielding rule, clear the Enable option or delete

the shielding rule. See Viewing Alarm Shielding Rules.

6.10.8 Modifying Alarm Levels

You can set the alarm level in the UNM2000 to improve the alarm monitoring
efficiency.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Modify the Level.

3. In the Modify Alarm Level dialog box, select the desired radio button in
Modify Range and Modify the Level to respectively.

314 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

6.10.9 Editing Alarm Remarks

You can edit the alarm remarks to record additional information about the alarm for
maintenance.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Modify the Remark from the
shortcut menu.

3. Enter alarm remarks in the Edit Alarm Remark dialog box.

4. Click OK. The alarm remarks are displayed in the Remark column.

6.10.10 Exporting the Alarm Information

This section introduces how to print or export the alarm information.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm, Alarm History or Alarm Log tab.

2. Export the alarm Information.

4 Print alarms.

a) Select the alarm information entry and right-click to select Print.

b) In the Print Preview dialog box, set the page setup and other print
options.

c) Click Print and select a printer and other printing settings in the
displayed Print dialog box.

d) Click OK.

Version: A 315
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Export alarms.

¡ Export all alarm entries. Right-click anywhere on the tab and select
Export→Export All Records to export all the alarm entries as a TXT,
Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file.

¡ Export the selected alarm entry. Select the alarm entry and right-click
to select Export→Export Selected Record to export the selected
alarm entries as a TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file.

6.10.11 Editing Alarm Maintenance Experience

By recording the alarm maintenance experience, you can handle the alarms of the
same type quickly and conveniently.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Open the Current Alarm tab.

2. Right-click the corresponding alarm and select Maintenance Experience from

the shortcut menu.

3. In the Edit Maintenance Experience dialog box, select the applicable range,
enter the maintenance experience and click OK.

Note:

The recorded maintenance experience can be viewed in the

corresponding detailed alarm information. Besides, you can manage the
maintenance experience according to Managing Maintenance
Experience.

316 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.10.12 Managing Maintenance Experience

By managing the maintenance experience, you can refer to the maintenance

experience for handling the alarms of the same type.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Alarm Maintenance Experience Management from

the main menu.

2. View the alarm maintenance experience on the Alarm Maintenance

Experience tab.

3. Do as follows:

4 In the right pane, select an entry and click the desired button at the lower
right part of the tab, or right-click an entry and select a desired option such
as Edit, Delete, Copy Cell, Print or Export from the shortcut menu to
perform the corresponding operation.

4 Filter the maintenance experience entries. Click at the top of the left
pane to switch the tree structure and sort alarms by alarm name or type.
Then click the tree node to filter the maintenance experience entries in the
right pane.

4 Click the Import / Export button at the top of the right pane to import /
export the maintenance experience in the XML format.

4 If no applicable maintenance experience exists in the maintenance

experience library, you can create the new maintenance experience
according to step 4.

4. Create the maintenance experience.

1) In the right pane of the Alarm Maintenance Experience tab, click New, or
right-click the blank area in the right pane of the tab and select New from
the shortcut menu.

Version: A 317
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2) In the New Alarm Maintenance Experience dialog box, set Equipment

Type and Alarm Name, enter the maintenance experience information
and click OK.

6.11 Customizing Alarms

Customize the alarm names or levels according to the maintenance requirements

for convenient management and efficient alarm monitoring.

6.11.1 Customizing Alarm Names

To monitor the physical environment of devices, you can customize environmental

alarms for devices, such as the fire alarm, water alarm, and overtemperature /
undertemperature alarm.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Custom Alarm Name from the main menu.

2. In the Please Select a NE dialog box, select the NE whose alarms are to be
customized and click OK.

3. In the left pane of the Custom Alarm Name tab, select the PUBA card or ONU
whose alarms are to be customized, click the English Alarm Name column
and select the corresponding name.

318 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4. Click Save to save the settings to the database.

Other Operations

u Clear the customized alarm: Select the customized alarm entry and click Clear
to clear the customized alarm information. Then click Save.

u Define the alarm for objects of the same type quickly: Click the Apply to
Objects of the Same Type button to make the setting valid and apply the
changes to the cards of the same type.

u Display / hide the undefined alarm: Click Show Alarms Without Custom
Names / Hide Uncustomized Alarm to display or hide the alarms not defined
on the GUI.

u Set the custom alarm row by row: Click Hide Uncustomized Alarm, click Add
to set the alarm name, and click Save.

6.11.2 Re-Defining Alarm Names

The UNM2000 supports redefinition of alarm names. You can modify the pre-
defined alarm names to your desired ones according to the maintenance
requirements.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→The Alarm Name Redefinefrom the main menu.

2. On the Redefine the Alarm Name tab, click Create.

3. In the Add the Define Alarm Name dialog box, click Select and select the
desired alarm.

4. Enter the new alarm name and click OK.

Version: A 319
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5. Click Save All to save the settings.

6. On the Current Alarm tab, view that the name of the alarm is changed to the
customized alarm name set in the above steps.

7. Delete the customized alarm name: On the Redefine the Alarm Name tab,
select an entry and click Delete→Save All.

Related Operation

1. On the Current Alarm tab, right-click an entry and select Modify the Level
from the shortcut menu.

2. Re-define the alarm name in the displayed dialog box.

6.11.3 Customizing Alarm Levels

You can adjust the alarm levels of all objects, the designated types of devices, or
the designated equipment as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Setting→Custom Alarm Level from the main menu.

2. At the lower right corner of the Customize Alarm Level tab, click Create; or
right-click in the blank area of the tab, and select Create from the shortcut
menu.

3. In the New Customized Rule of the Alarm Level dialog box, set Alarm
Source.

320 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4 Select All Objects, and the customized alarm levels apply to all objects.

4 Select Select Equipment, click on the right side of Object

Name, and select the desired card of a certain device in the Select Object
dialog box. Then click OK.

4 Select Select Equipment Type and click on the right side of

Equipment Type. In the displayed Select Equipment Type dialog box,
select the specific equipment type and then click OK.

Note:

The priorities of custom alarm levels are as follows: equipment >

equipment type > all objects.

4. Click Select to select the desired alarms in the Select Alarm Name dialog box,
and click OK.

5. Set ONU Service Level.

6. Click the Custom Level column of the corresponding alarm, and select the
desired alarm level. Then click OK.

7. On the Customize Alarm Level tab, check and confirm the information related
to the custom alarm levels, and then click Save.

Other Operations

u Delete the custom alarm level: On the Customize Alarm Level tab, select the
alarm level concerned and click Delete.

u Modify the custom alarm level: On the Customize Alarm Level tab, click the
Custom Level column of the corresponding alarm entry to reset the alarm level.
Then click Save.

6.11.4 Customizing Special Alarms

Through custom special alarm settings, the UNM2000 can display different types of
alarms based on how much users pay attention to these alarms or how users find
these alarms. In this way, the maintenance engineers can better monitor the
equipment, and quickly isolate the failure and solve the problems.

Version: A 321
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.11.4.1 Viewing Custom Special Alarms

This function helps you understand the defined special alarm types.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the

left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Click the Custom Special Alarms tab to view the special alarms already
defined.

322 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

6.11.4.2 Customizing Special Alarms

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the

left pane to open the dialog box.

3. Click the Custom Special Alarms tab.

4. Click Create, select the NE type, alarm name, and special alarm name in the
Custom Special Alarms dialog box, and then click OK.

5. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

Subsequent Operation

Select the useless custom special alarms, and click Delete to delete them.

Version: A 323
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.11.4.3 Setting Special Alarm Icons

Background Information

By setting the special alarm icons, you can view the special alarm icon at the upper-
right corner of the NE icon when the corresponding alarm occurs at the NE, so as to
obtain the alarm information in a timely manner.

u When multiple alarms occur at the NE, the special icon of the alarm with the
highest priority will be displayed at the upper-right corner of the NE icon.

u The priority of an alarm ranges from 1 to 22, with 22 being the highest.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Alarm Settings→Server Settings→Special Icon of the Alarm in the

left pane to open the dialog box.

324 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

3. In the Special Alarm Icon Display tab, and select Enable, Hide after
Confirmation or Hide after Clearing as required.

4 If Enable is selected, the special icon of this alarm appears at the upper-
right corner of the NE icon upon the occurrence of the alarm.

Note:

For enabling the custom alarms, see Customizing Special Alarms.

4 If Hide after confirmation is selected, after the corresponding alarm is

confirmed, the special icon of this alarm at the upper-right corner of the NE
will be hidden.

4 If Hide after Clearing is selected, after the corresponding alarm is cleared,

the special icon of this alarm at the upper-right corner of the NE will be
hidden.

4. Click Apply after the settings are completed, and the settings will be valid.

6.12 Managing the Alarm / Event Data

If the alarm history data stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the
UNM2000 operation will be influenced. The alarm data saving function can save the
alarm history data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as to
improve the UNM2000 operation performance. The UNM2000 supports manual
saving and overflow saving.

u Overflow saving:You can set the maximum alarm saving capacity and the
UNM2000 will regularly check the alarm history data. When the alarm history
data reach the preset capacity, the UNM2000 will save the data to a specified
file to decrease its load.

u Manual saving:You can save the alarm history data in the UNM2000 to a
specified file folder manually at anytime. You can set the manual saving period.
When the alarm history data saved in the database reach the preset time
period, the UNM2000 will save the data to a designated file folder. You can
mark the saving time in the name of the folder where the file is saved.

Version: A 325
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6.12.1 Setting the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving

Set the alarm / event overflow saving task. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether
the alarm / event history data in the database meets the preset conditions. If the
overflow saving conditions are met, the UNM2000 saves the alarm / event history
data automatically. The saved alarm / eventhistory data history will be deleted from
the database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which
cannot be deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the
corresponding task as needed.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→Save Alarm History

Overflow / Save Event Overflow in the left pane to view the existing alarm
history / event overflow saving task.

3. Select one of the following access methods to open the Attribute dialog box of
the corresponding overflow saving task.

4 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

4 Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and
select Attribute.

4 In the left pane, click before Overflow Saving, right-click the

corresponding overflow saving task and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

326 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4. Set the attributes of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 6-8.

Table 6-8 Descriptions of the Alarm / Event Overflow Saving Task Settings

Parameter Description

Indicates the name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be

Task Name
edited by users.

Enable Select it to enable the task.

Basic Execution Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is "Every 2
Informa- Cycle days".
tion Execution
Sets the execution time of the task.
Time
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
You can convert the data history into CSV files and save
Saving Mode
them into the server harddisk or the FTP server.
u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets
Extend
the overflow saving conditions directly.
Informa-
If the data history exceeds the maximum number of stored entries
tion
Overflow Limit or exceeds the record threshold, a preset proportion of data will
be saved and removed from the database.
The data history that exceeds the database preservation days will
Capacity Limit be saved and removed from the database when the saving task is
executed.

5. After completing the settings, click OK.

Version: A 327
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click
Execute Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom
right pane.

6.12.2 Setting the Manual Alarm / Event Saving

The UNM2000 supports saving alarm history and performance history manually,
preventing insufficient space in database.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of alarm history / events,
which cannot be deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding
saving task as needed.

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time.
You can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the
saved file by modifying the background configuration file. For specific
operations, contact the FiberHome technical engineer.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→Save Alarm History / Save

Event from the left pane to view the existing manual saving task of alarm /
performance history.

3. Select one of the following access methods to open the Attribute dialog box of
a manual saving task.

4 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

4 Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and
select Attribute from the shortcut menu.

328 Version: A
 6 Alarm Management

4 In the left pane, click before Save Manually, right-click the

corresponding manual saving task and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

4. Set the attribute of the manual saving task, referring to Table 6-9.

Table 6-9 Parameters of the Alarm / Event Manual Saving Task

Parameter Description

Indicates the name of the saving task, which cannot be edited

Basic Task Name
by users.
Informa-
Enable Select it to enable the task.
tion
Execution Cycle Sets the execution cycle of the task.

u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets

the manual saving conditions into files.
You can convert the data history into CSV files and save
Saving Mode
them into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
Extend u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that
Informa- meets the manual saving conditions directly.
tion Data Generation
Sets the generation time and end time of the data.
Time
Records that
Displays the number of the data entries that comply with the
Match the Saving
saving conditions. This item cannot be edited.
Conditions

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute
Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

6.13 Gathering Statistics of Device Failures

This section introduces how to gather statistics on device failures.

Background Information

The failure alarm that supports statistics collection is System Communication

Interruption.

Procedure

1. Select Alarm→Device Failure Rate Statistic from the main menu.

Version: A 329
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. In the Query Device Failure Statistic dialog box, set the statistical information
and alarm source, and click OK.

Note:

Alarm Source is required.

3. View the statistical result on the Device Failure Statistic tab.

Related Operation

Click to view the failure rate statistical result in the comparison curve chart.

330 Version: A
7 Performance Management

The UNM2000 performs strong performance management functions. By monitoring

the performance, you can detect the silent failures during network running to
prevent network failures.

Basic Concepts

Setting Performance-related Parameters

Managing Performance Query Templates

Managing Performance Configurations

Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a Batch Manner

Monitoring Performance Data

Managing Performance Collection

Managing Performance Data

Managing Statistics Export Tasks

Version: A 331
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.1 Basic Concepts

Performance management can help you identify potential network running risks in
advance and prevent network failures. The following introduces basic concepts
involved in performance monitoring.

Current Performance and Performance History

The performance data include the current performance data and performance
history data. You can check whether the service is running normally in a specified
time period by browsing the performance data.

u Current Performance

The current performance refers to the data saved in the current performance
register of the NE. The monitoring period of current performance data is 15
minutes. When browsing the current performance, the UNM2000 queries the
performance data directly from the current performance register at the NE side.

u Performance History

The performance history refers to the performance data of NEs detected in the
past specified time period. According to different monitoring periods, the
performance history data is classified into 15-minute performance history and
24-hour performance history. When querying the performance history data, you
can select whether to query the performance history data at the NE side or at
the UNM2000 side according to the location where the data are stored.

The current performance data whose saved time exceeds the specified time
period will be saved to the NE performance history register.

Performance Threshold

By setting the performance threshold, you can filter the performance events that
change in the normal value range so that you can focus the critical performance
events.

332 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

The threshold is also called tolerance, which indicates a performance limit within
which a device can work properly. If a performance indicator exceeds the
performance threshold, the performance deterioration must be concerned and
handled. In normal situations, a margin must be reserved for a configured
performance threshold to ensure that issues can be identified in advance.

Performance Comparison

You can compare the performance data of the specified object in different time
periods to view the corresponding running status.

7.2 Setting Performance-related Parameters

7.2.1 Setting Display of the Performance Value

You can set the unit of the performance value to Bit or Byte by setting display of the
performance value.

Background Information

This setting takes effect immediately for the client end. After logging into the server
from the current client end, all the users can view the setting result.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Local Settings→Switch Setting→PM Show Unit Setting in the left

pane to open the PM Show Unit Setting dialog box.

3. Select the unit of the performance value and click Apply. The settings take
effect immediately.

Version: A 333
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

It is recommended to use the default setting: Show Bit by Byte.

Other Operations

Click Restore Default Configurations to restore to the default configuration.

7.2.2 Setting the Performance Collection Sever

You can set the collection time and ONU performance collection range of the 24-
hour performance as required.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Select Performance Settings→Server Settings in the left pane to open the

dialog box.

3. Set the 24-hour performance collection time and ONU performance collection
range and then click Apply to apply the settings.

7.2.3 Setting the PAS Saving

If the data history stored in the UNM2000 exceeds the threshold, the UNM2000
operation will be influenced. The performance data saving function can save the
performance history data in the UNM2000 as files to the designated file folder, so as
to improve the UNM2000 operation performance. The PAS saving settings are used
to set the saving mode of the performance history.

334 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings from the main menu to open the

Parameter Settings dialog box.

2. Select Performance Settings→Save Pas in the left pane to open the dialog
box.

3. Set the start time, end time, saving mode, and saving day limitations according
to Table 7-1, and click OK. The settings will immediately take effect.

Table 7-1 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates the start time for

Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Start time saving PAS.
buttons.
Time format: HH:mm:ss
Indicates the end time for
Enter it manually or set it by the spin
End Time saving PAS.
buttons.
Time format: HH:mm:ss
Indicates that the PAS can
Select an item from the drop-down
Save Mode be saved into a file or directly
list.
deleted.
Enter it manually or set it by the spin
Limit on Saving Days Value range: 1 to 90
buttons.

7.3 Managing Performance Query Templates

The UNM2000 supports setting the performance query conditions or statistical

conditions as templates. You can use the preset template to quickly query the
performance data.

Version: A 335
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.3.1 Viewing Performance Templates

The following introduces how to view the performance template.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to

open the Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Click before Performance History Query Template to select the

corresponding template and view the details of the template in the right pane.

7.3.2 Creating a Performance Query Template

To avoid setting query criteria repetitively, you can save the commonly used
performance query criteria as a template so that it can be used for querying
performance information subsequently. The following introduces how to create a
performance query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to

open the Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Historical
Performance Query Template dialog box.

336 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

No. Path

1 On the PAS Performance Query Template Management tab, click the

button at the upper left corner.

Select Performance History Query Template in the left pane, right-click the
2 blank area in the right pane and select New Performance History Query
Template from the shortcut menu.

Right-click Performance History Query Template in the left pane and select
3
New Performance History Query Template from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Historical Performance Query Template dialog box, set the
parameters on the Template Information, Basic Information and Advanced
Information tabs referring to Table 7-2.

Table 7-2 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates the name of Enter it manually.

Template Name
Template the new template. This field is required.
Information Indicates the remark
Template Remark Enter it manually.
entered.
1. Select the Latest Time radio
button.
Indicates the time period
2. Select a time period from the drop-
Basic Time during which the
Latest Time down list.
Information Range performance history is to
3. If you select Custom, enter the time
be queried.
manually or set the time by the spin
buttons.

Version: A 337
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-2 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

1. Select the Time Range radio

button.
2. Select the Start Time check box.
3. Set the time:

4 Enter it manually.
4 Set it by the spin buttons.
Indicates the start time of
4 Click :
Start the period of which the
Time performance history is to a) Enter the year manually
be queried. or set it by the spin
buttons.

b) Select a month from the

drop-down list.

c) Enter the time manually or

set it by the spin buttons.
Time
Range d) Click to select the date.

1. Select the End time check box.

2. Set the time:

4 Enter it manually.
4 Set it by the spin buttons.
4 Click :
Indicates the end time of
End the period of which the a) Enter the year manually
Time performance history is to or set it by the spin
be queried. buttons.

b) Select a month from the

drop-down list.

c) Enter the time manually or

set it by the spin buttons.

d) Click to select the date.

Query Maximum Value

Performance Code, and
Performance Code Type Select the check box(es).
Query Minimum Value
Performance Code

338 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-2 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Setting

Indicates the value 1. Select the check box.

Performance Value Range range of the 2. Enter the minimum and maximum
performance. value ranges manually.

u 15-Minute
Performance
PM Type Select the corresponding radio button.
u 24-hour
Performance
1. Select the check boxes before >=
and <=.
Sets the display range of 2. Enter the performance value
Performance Value Range
the performance value. manually.
3. Select Display Zero Value
Performance.
1. Click Add.
Indicates the list of
2. Select an NE or an object under
selected objects whose
Selected Object List the NE in the corresponding dialog
performance is to be
box.
queried.
3. Click OK.
1. Click Select.
2. Select performance codes in the
Advanced
Performance Code to be
Information Indicates the list of
Selected pane of the Select
selected performance
Performance Code dialog box.
List of Selected PM Codes codes of which the
performance is to be 3. Click to move the selected
queried.
to the right pane, or click
to move all.
4. Click OK.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Historical Performance Query Template, and

select a template in the Select Template dialog box to copy the basic
information and advanced information of the selected template, improving
the setting efficiency.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

Version: A 339
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Set as / Cancel
Default Template, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

7.3.3 Modifying a Performance Query Template

When setting the performance query template, you can modify the settings in case
the query condition setting error occurs.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Performance→Performance Query Template to

open the Performance Query Template Management tab.

2. Click before Performance History Query Template to select the

corresponding template in the left pane and view the details of the template in
the right pane.

3. Modify the settings of the template in the right pane as needed and click Save
All.

Other Operations

In the right pane, click the button at the lower part of the corresponding entry, or
right-click the entry, and select operations such as Delete, Refresh, Set as / Cancel
Default Template, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

7.4 Managing Performance Configurations

The UNM2000 supports managing performance threshold templates and binding

the performance threshold templates with the devices.

340 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

7.4.1 Managing Performance Threshold Templates

The UNM2000 supports creating, modifying and deleting performance threshold

templates.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Configuring Performance Threshold Templates

1. In the NE Manager window, click .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Performance Management→Threshold

Profile and Bind→PM Threshold Profile.

3. On the PM Threshold Profile tab, click .

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the number of new performance threshold
templates and click OK.

5. Set the template name and object type in the left pane.

6. Set whether to turn on the alarm threshold switch upon occurrence of the alarm
in the right pane.

Modifying Templates in a Batch Manner

1. Click .

2. Select the desired template in the Modify in a batch manner dialog box and
modify the parameters in the Configuration Item pane.

Deleting a Template

Select a template and click .

Version: A 341
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.4.2 Binding Performance Threshold Templates

The UNM2000 supports binding performance threshold templates with objects.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the NE Manager window, click .

2. In the Operational Tree, select Performance Management→Threshold

Profile and Bind→PM Threshold Profile Bind.

3. Select the desired object in the left device tree and set the template name in the
drop-down list in the right pane.

4. Click to deliver the configuration to the device.

5. Batch settings: Select multiple objects, click and then set the templates in
the Configure Template in Batch Manner dialog box.

7.5 Configuring the Performance Classification

Switch in a Batch Manner

The UNM2000 is added with the new function of configuring performance

classification switches in a batch manner. You can view the performance switch of
the designated OLT NE, modify the existing switches in a batch manner, and deliver
the configurations to the device via the UNM2000.

Procedure

1. In the UNM2000 main menu, select Performance→Performance Sort Switch

Config to open the Pm Sort Switch Management tab.

2. Click Create NE Object to open the Add Object dialog box and then select
one or multiple NEs.

3. Click OK. The UNM2000 reads the performance classification switch status of
the selected device(s).

342 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

4. Modify the performance classification switches in a batch manner and then

click Save Config.

7.6 Monitoring Performance Data

This section introduces how to monitor the performance data, including viewing the
current performance, performance history, performance comparison, real-time
performance and performance history trend.

u Current performance: Views the current 15-minute performance and the

performance of the latest sixteen 15-minute time intervals. These data are not
saved in the database.

u Performance history: Views the performance history data of the selected object
in the designated time range.

u Real-time performance: Views the real-time performance data of the selected

object. The collection period can be 10 seconds or 30 seconds; the collection
interval can be 15 minutes, 30 minutes, one hour, or 24 hours.

u Performance comparison: Compares the performance data in designated

period of an designated object, so as to understand the operating status of this
object in different periods.

u Performance history trend: Views the change trend of the performance history
data of the designated object.

Version: A 343
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.6.1 Viewing Current Performance

You can query the current performance so as to understand the running status of
devices.

Prerequisite

u The performance classification function of the corresponding device is

Enabled.

u You are an EMS user with Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main
Topology tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open
NE Manager from the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following ways to view the current performance.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or

port, and select Current Performance from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window,right-click a card, and select

Current Performance from the shortcut menu.

344 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

3. (Optional) Right-click on the current performance tab, select 15-minute

Performance from the shortcut menu and select the corresponding menu item
to query the 1st to 16th 15-minute performance.

4. (Optional) Right-click in the current performance tab and select Print, Copy
Cell or Export.

Subsequent Operation

Set the query conditions for current performance and then query again.

1. Click Query to display the Current Performance Query dialog box.

2. In the Current Performance Query dialog box, set Select the 15-minute
Performance, Performance Code Type, Object and Performance Code, and
then click OK.

7.6.2 Viewing Performance History

View the performance history to obtain the abnormal performance data of the
equipment, so as to instruct the current maintenance.

Prerequisite

u The performance classification function of the corresponding device is

Enabled.

u The performance collection task has been set, and the system has waited for
one test period (15 minutes or 24 hours) at least.

u You are an EMS user with Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select the access method mentioned in Table 7-3 to open the Performance
History Query dialog box.

Table 7-3 Access Method of Viewing the Performance History

Operation Access Method

Viewing the
performance Select Performance→Performance History from the main menu.
history

Version: A 345
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-3 Access Method of Viewing the Performance History (Continued)

Operation Access Method

Right-click the corresponding NE in the object tree pane and select
Performance History from the shortcut menu.

In the Device Tree pane of the NE manager window, right-click the

corresponding card or port and select Performance History from the
shortcut menu.
In the Diagram pane of the NE manager window, right-click the
corresponding card and select Performance History from the shortcut
menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Performance History Query dialog box.

Note:

u In the Advance Information tab, you can select 10 query objects at

most.

u To avoid repeated setting of query conditions, you can click Save as

Template to save the current performance history query conditions
as a template, which can be selected for query by clicking Query
According to Template later.

3. After completing the settings, click OK; then the query results will be displayed
in the Performance History tab.

7.6.3 Viewing the Performance Comparison

You can compare the performance data of the specified object in different time
periods to view the corresponding running status.

Prerequisite

u Wait until at least two measurement periods (15 minutes for each measurement
period) expireabove the list.

u The performance statistics function is enabled.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

346 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main
Topology tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open
NE Manager from the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following methods to open the Performance Comparison

Query dialog box.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or

port, and select Performance Comparison from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window,right-click a card, and select

Performance Comparison from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Performance Comparison Query dialog box, set performance

comparison query conditions.

Note:

Select at least two periods from the 15 Minutes drop-down list.

4. Click OK and view the performance comparison result in the Card

Performance Comparison tab.

Note:

The system displays the comparison result in List View, Compare

Based on the Object and Histogram by default. You can select other
display modes as needed.

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print the comparison results or export
them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

7.6.4 Viewing Real-Time Performance

You can monitor performance data of the selected resources in real time.

Version: A 347
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Right-click a desired NE from the object tree on the left side of the Main
Topology tab, or in the physical topology view on the right side. Select Open
NE Manager from the shortcut menu.

2. Select one of the following methods to open the Real-time Performance

Query dialog box.

4 In the Device Tree pane of the NE Manager window, right-click a card or

port, and select Real-time Performance from the shortcut menu.

4 In Subrack View of the NE Manager window, right-click a card, and select

Real-time Performance from the shortcut menu.

3. In the dialog box that appears, set Collection Cycle, Time Length, Object and
Performance Code.

4. Click OK. After a while, you can view the real-time performance of the selected
object in the Real-time Performance tab.

Note:

u The system displays the real-time performance in List View and

Curve Chart by default. You can select other display modes as
needed.

u Click Stop to stop collecting real-time performance.

u The curve chart displays the data units in the vertical coordinate. At
most five units can be displayed in the vertical coordinate. You can
set the performance unit according to Setting Display of the
Performance Value.

348 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Subsequent Operation

u Click or at the top of the right pane to print real-time performance

results, or export them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

u Click and select the desired performance parameters in the displayed

window.

7.6.5 Viewing the Performance History Trend

You can view the performance history charts so as to understand the performance
data change trend of the specified object and the running status of the network.

Prerequisite

u The object to be queried has its performance history data.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Version: A 349
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Performance→View Performance History Trend from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Performance History Query dialog box.

Note:

u In the Advance Information tab, you can select 10 query objects at

most.

u To avoid repeated setting of query conditions, you can click Save as

Template to save the current performance history query conditions
as a template, which can be selected for query by clicking Query
According to Template later.

3. After completing the settings, click OK; then the query results will be displayed
in the History property trend tab.

Note:

The system displays the performance history in the List view or Curve
Chart mode by default. You can select other display modes as required.

Subsequent Operation

Click or at the top of the right pane to print real-time performance results or
export them in *.jpeg files and save them to a specified directory.

7.7 Managing Performance Collection

You can use the scheduled performance collection to query or process the
performance data of the NE. The UNM2000 enables you to collect the performance
data through NE Performance Indicator Collection and NE Performance
Threshold Collection and export the result as a file to reduce repeated work.

350 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

7.7.1 Managing Performance Indicator Sets

The following introduces how to view and set the performance indicator sets.

7.7.1.1 Viewing Performance Indicator Sets

View the existing performance indicator sets so as to quickly set the collection
indicator of the performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, click Indicator Set and view the
existing indicator sets in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired indicator set
to view the details of the indicator set, including Basic Information and
Member.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the indicator set

In the left pane, select the corresponding indicator set, modify the relevant
information if necessary in the right pane. Click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the
bottom, or simply right-click the entry and select Delete, Print, Copy Cell or
Export from the shortcut menu.

Version: A 351
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.7.1.2 Creating a Performance Indicator Set

Set the performance indicator set so as to quickly set the collection indicator of the
performance collection task.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→PAS Collection Task Management from the main

menu to open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Indicator Set
tab.

No. Path
Click Collection Task Management in the left pane and then right-click in the
right pane to select Create Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.
Creating a
Right-click Indicator Set in the left pane and select Create Indicator Set from
perfor-
the shortcut menu.
mance
Click Indicator Set in the left pane and click Create Indicator Set in the right
indicator
pane.
set
Click Indicator Set in the left pane, right-click in the right pane and select Create
Indicator Set from the shortcut menu.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic Information and Member tabs of the Create
Indicator Set dialog box, referring to Table 7-4.

352 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-4 Parameter Settings

Name Description Setting

Indicates the name of the

Index Set Name Enter it manually.
indicator set.
Basic
Indicates the type of the Select an item from the drop-
Informa- NE Type
NE. down list.
tion
Indicates the remark
Remark Enter it manually.
entered.
1. Click the Select button.
2. Select performance codes in
the Performance Code to
be Selected pane of the
Indicates the list of selected Select Performance Code
List of Selected
Member objects whose performance dialog box.
PM Codes
is to be queried.
3. Click to move the
selected to the right pane, or

click to move all.

4. Click OK.

Note:

Click Copy from Other Indicator Set to open the Select Indicator Set
dialog box. Then select the desired indicator set to copy its parameter
settings, so as to improve setting efficiency.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

7.7.2 Managing Performance Threshold Sets

The following introduces how to view, create and use the performance threshold
sets.

7.7.2.1 Viewing the Performance Threshold Set

View the performance threshold sets already set and select the desired threshold
set to quickly complete the statistics and query of performance threshold.

Version: A 353
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, select Threshold Set and view the
existing threshold sets in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired performance

threshold set to view the details of the threshold set, including Basic
Information and Member.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the performance threshold set

In the left pane, select the corresponding performance threshold set, modify the
relevant information in the right pane and then click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the
bottom, or simply right-click the entry and select Delete, Print, Copy Cell or
Export from the shortcut menu.

7.7.2.2 Creating a Performance Threshold Set

You can monitor the performance data by setting the performance threshold. When
the performance data exceed the preset threshold value, the threshold-crossing
alarm will be generated.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

354 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Procedure

1. Select Performance→PAS Collection Task Management from the main

menu to open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Threshold Set
tab.

Operation Path
Click Collection Task Management in the left pane and then right-click in
the right pane to select Create Threshold Set from the shortcut menu.

Click Threshold Set in the left pane and then right-click in the right pane to
Creating a
select Create Threshold Set from the shortcut menu.
performance
Right-click Threshold Set in the left pane and select Create Threshold Set
threshold set
from the shortcut menu.
Click Threshold Set in the left pane and then click the Create Threshold
Set button in the right pane.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic Information and Member tabs, referring to
Table 7-5.

Table 7-5 Threshold Set Parameters

Parameter Description Setting

Threshold
Basic Sets a name for the threshold set. Set it manually.
Set Name
Infor-
Selects the corresponding NE Select an item from the drop-down
ma- NE Type
type. list.
tion
Enters the remark information for
Remark Enter it manually.
the threshold set.
Click Select to select the
Click Select, select the desired
performance codes for which the
PM Code performance code in the dialog
performance threshold is to be
box that appears and click OK.
set.
Mem- Upper
Sets the upper limit for the Enter it manually or set it by the
ber Threshold
corresponding performance code. spin buttons.
Value
Lower
Sets the lower limit for the Enter it manually or set it by the
Threshold
corresponding performance code. spin buttons.
Value

Version: A 355
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-5 Threshold Set Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the upper clearing limit for

the corresponding performance
Upper Clear Enter it manually or set it by the
code. The upper clearing limit
Limit spin buttons.
must be smaller than the upper
limit.
Sets the Lower clearing limit for
the corresponding performance
Lower Clear Enter it manually or set it by the
code. The lower clearing limit
Limit spin buttons.
must be greater than the lower
limit.
Sets the threshold-crossing alarm
code for the corresponding
performance code. The following
options are available:
u PM_THRESHOLD_CRITI- Click it and select an item from the
Alarm Code
CAL drop-down list.
u PM_THRESHOLD_MAJOR
u PM_THRESHOLD_MINOR
u PM_THRESHOLD_WARN-
ING
Sets the applied object of the
corresponding performance code.
The following options are
available:

u All Click it and select an item from the

Object Type
drop-down list.
u Local Board

u Local Board Port

u ONU

u ONU Port
Note: The performance threshold parameters must meet the following conditions: Upper limit >
upper clearing limit > lower clearing limit > lower limit.

4. Click OK after the setting is completed.

7.7.3 Managing Performance Collection Tasks

The following introduces how to view and create performance collection tasks.

356 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

7.7.3.1 Viewing Performance Collection Task

View the performance collection task already set and select the desired task set to
collect the performance.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. In the Collection Task Management tab, select Collection Task and view the
existing collection tasks in the right pane.

3. In the Collection Task Management tab, double-click the desired collection

task in the right pane to view the details of the task, including Basic
Information, Collection Object & PM-Code, Advance Information and
Collection Cycle.

Subsequent Operation

u Modify the performance collection task.

In the left pane, select the corresponding performance collection task, modify
the relevant information in the right pane and then click Save All.

u Other Operations

In the right pane, select the corresponding entry and click the button at the
bottom, or simply right-click the entry and select Disable, Delete, Print, Copy
Cell or Export from the shortcut menu.

7.7.3.2 Creating a Performance Collection Task

You can monitor the performance data by setting the performance collection task.

Version: A 357
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

u The NE time is synchronized with the EMS time.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Select one of the following access methods to open the Create Collection
Task tab.

No. Access Method

Click Performance Collection Management in the left pane and click
1
Create Collection Task in the right pane.

Select Performance Collection Management in the left pane and then right-
2 click in the right pane to select Create Collection Task from the shortcut
menu.
Click Collection Task in the left pane and click Create Collection Task in
3
the right pane.

Click Collection Task in the left pane and then right-click in the right pane to
4
select Create Collection Task from the shortcut menu.
Right-click Collection Task in the left pane and select Create Collection
5
Task from the shortcut menu.

3. Set Basic Information, Collection Object and Index, and Advanced

Information in the Create Collection Task dialog box. See Table 7-6.

Table 7-6 Parameter Settings

Name Description Settings

Task Indicates the name of the Enter it manually.

name task. This field is required.

Enable or Indicates whether to enable

Select / deselect Enable Or Not.
disable this task.
Basic Indicates the type of the task,
Info including collecting
Select an item from the drop-down
Task Type performance data and
list.
monitoring performance
quality.

Remarks Indicates the remark entered. Enter it manually.

358 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-6 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Settings

Indicates whether to gather

Data Type statistics on 15-minute or 24- Select the check box(es).
hour performance.

1. Click Add.
2. Select NE or Object in NE from
the drop-down list.
Note: When FTP Mode is
selected in the advanced
information, you can only
select NE from the drop-down
list. Only when Normal Mode is
Collection selected can Object in NE be
Selects the collection object.
Object selected.
3. In the Select NE or Select
Collec- Object dialog box, select the
tion corresponding collection object.
Object & Note: The ONU WAN
PM- connection interface can be
Code selected as the collection
object.
4. Click OK.
1. Click the Select button.
2. Select performance codes in the
Performance Code to be
Collection Selected pane of the Select
Select the collection
Specifica- Performance Code dialog box.
specification.
tion 3. Click to move the selected
to the right pane, or click to
move all.
4. Click OK.
Select the corresponding radio
Ad- button.
PON Flow
vance Indicates the collection mode: Note: The switch does not support
Collect
Informa- normal mode or FTP mode. collecting performance by the FTP
Mode
tion mode, and therefore you need to
select Normal Mode for the switch.

Version: A 359
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-6 Parameter Settings (Continued)

Name Description Settings

1. Select the Start Time/End Time

check box.
2. Set the time:

4 Enter it manually.
4 Set it by the spin buttons.
4 Click :
Effective
Indicates the time period a) Enter the year manually
Time
during which the performance or set it by the spin
Range
history is to be queried. buttons.
Collec-
tion b) Select a month from the

Cycle drop-down list.

c) Enter the time manually

or set it by the spin
buttons.

d) Click it to select the

date.
Perfor-
mance Indicates the time period
Enter the start and end time manually
Collection during which the performance
or set them by the spin buttons.
Time data are to be collected.
Range

Note:

Click Copy from Other Collection Task, select the collection task in the
Select Collection Task dialog box, and copy the parameter settings of
the corresponding task to improve the setting efficiency.

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

7.8 Managing Performance Data

This section introduces the related operations of performance data statistics.

360 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

7.8.1 Analysis of PON traffic statistics

The analysis of PON traffic statistics function supports analyzing traffic, optical
power and device health. It provides abundant reports for analyzing and monitoring
services and device running status so as to provide detailed data for network
planning.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Analysis of PON Traffic Statistics from the main menu

to open the Query Traffic Statistical dialog box.

2. Set the statistical type, period, object, performance code and then click OK.
The Traffic Statistical Chart tab appears, displaying the statistical result.

Other Operations

By clicking the buttons on the toolbar of the Traffic Statistical Chart tab, you can
print or export the statistical result or display the statistical result in different charts.

7.8.2 Enabling / disabling FTP Report

After the FTP report is enabled, you can collect the traffic data and back them up to
a specified FTP server.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is set (click System→Parameter Settings and then select
Service ConfigurationFTP Server Management).

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Pm FTP Switch Management from the main menu to

open the Pm FTP Report Switch Set tab.

Version: A 361
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Click Synchronized From Device to synchronize the device data.

3. Click Add NE to open the Please Select NE dialog box and then select desired
NEs.

4. Click OK.

5. Click in the Traffic Switch Set column to open the Traffic Switch Set
dialog box. Set the FTP server parameters, enable the traffic function and click
OK.

6. Click Save All.

Other Operations

Right-click the NE object in the list or click the button at the bottom of the GUI to
execute operations such as Delete.

Subsequent Operation

After enabling the FTP report, create a performance collection task to collect the
performance such as traffic, optical power and ONU distance. The following takes
collecting PON traffic data as an example.

1. Select Performance→Collection Task Management from the main menu to

open the Collection Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Collection Task and select Create Collection Task from the
shortcut menu.

3. In the Create Collection Task dialog box, set the task parameters and set
PON Traffic Collection to Yes to enable the FTP collection.

362 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

4. Click Create to complete the settings.

7.8.3 Top Ranking Statistics

Top Ranking Statistics supports PON traffic ranking and equipment health degree
ranking, providing users with specialized and abundant reports.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Performance→Top Rank Statistics from the main menu to open the
Query Traffic Top Ranking dialog box.

2. Set the statistical type, ranking number, statistical cycle, object type and
performance code, and then click OK. The Traffic Statistical Top Ranking tab
appears, displaying the statistical result.

Other Operations

By clicking the buttons on the toolbar of the Traffic Statistical Top Ranking tab,
you can Print or Export the statistical result or display the statistical result in
different charts.

Version: A 363
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

7.9 Managing Statistics Export Tasks

This task facilitates users to analyze traffic data of the equipment and supports
exporting the analysis data. The statistics export task supports exporting traffic
analysis, TopN traffic ranking, 15-minute performance, and 15-minute performance
data of equipment traffic and health degree.

7.9.1 Traffic Analysis Export Tasks

The export task of traffic analysis supports exporting the PON Traffic Analysis,
Equipment Health Degree Analysis and Optical Power Analysis reports to the
FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic Statistic in the left pane to view the
existing export task of traffic analysis.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters on the Basic Information, Object Source, and Extend
Information tabs in the dialog box that appears and click OK.

Table 7-7 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Performance Traffic Analysis

Parameter Description

Indicates the name of the traffic analysis export task, which

Task Name
cannot be edited by users.

Basic Enable Enables the task.

Informa- Statistical Type Sets the analysis cycle of the exported report.
tion Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.

364 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

Table 7-7 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Performance Traffic Analysis
(Continued)

Parameter Description

Object
Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.
Source
Extend XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.
Informa-
Report Template Sets the template used by the exported report.
tion

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.2 TopN Traffic Ranking Export Tasks

This task supports exporting the reports of TopN Traffic Ranking and TopN
Equipment Health Degree Ranking to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized
and abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic TopN Ranking Statistic in the left

pane to view the existing export task of TopN traffic ranking.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears.
Click OK.

Table 7-8 Parameter Description of the Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking

Parameter Description

Basic Indicates the name of the TopN traffic ranking export

Task Name
Information task, which cannot be edited by users.

Version: A 365
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 7-8 Parameter Description of the Export Task of TopN Traffic Ranking (Continued)

Parameter Description

Enable Selects it to enable the task.

Statistical Type Sets the analysis cycle of the exported report.

Execution Time Sets the execution time of the task.

Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Object Source Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.

XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.

Report Template Sets the template used by the exported report.

Extend Object Type Sets the object type in the exported report.
Information Performance Sets the performance specification in the exported
Specification report.

Ranking Number Sets the ranking number in the exported report.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.3 15-Minute Performance Export Tasks

The export task of 15-minute performance supports exporting the 15-minute

performance report to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and abundant
report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→15 Minute Performance Export Task in the

left pane to view the existing export task of 15-minute performance.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

366 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears
and click OK.

Table 7-9 Parameter Description of the Export Task of 15-minute Performance

Parameter Description

Indicates the name of the 15-minute performance export

Task Name
Basic task, which cannot be edited by users.

Information Enable Selects it to enable the task.

Execution Cycle Sets the execution cycle of the report export task.

XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.

File Type Sets the file type of the exported report.
Extend
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
Information
End Time Sets the end time of the task.
Cycle Sets the cycle of the report exporting.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.4 Export Tasks of Equipment Traffic and 15-Minute

Performance of Health Degree

The UNM2000 supports exporting the equipment flow and the 15-minute
performance of health degree to the FTP server, so as to provide specialized and
abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→Traffic and Health Degree 15 Minute

Performance Export Task in the left pane to view the existing export task of
equipment traffic and the 15-minute performance of health degree.

Version: A 367
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click Create in the right pane.

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears
and click OK.

Table 7-10 Parameter Description of the Export Task of Equipment Traffic and 15-minute
Performance of Health Degree

Parameter Description

Indicates the name of the export task of equipment

Basic Task Name traffic and 15-minute performance of health degree. The
Information name cannot be edited.
Enable Selects it to enable the task.
Object Source Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.

XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.

Extend
Start Time Sets the start time of the task.
Information
End Time Sets the end time of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

7.9.5 Optical Module Information Export Tasks

The UNM2000 supports exporting the information of the optical module to the FTP
server, so as to provide specialized and abundant report service to users.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→OptModule Information Export Task in the

left pane to view the existing information export tasks of the optical module.

3. Click Create in the right pane.

368 Version: A
 7 Performance Management

4. Set the parameters such as basic information in the dialog box that appears
and click OK.

Table 7-11 Information Export Task Settings of the Optical Module

Parameter Description

Sets the name of the optical module information export

Task Name
Basic task, which cannot be edited by users.

Information Enable Selects it to enable the task.

Execution Cycle Sets the execution cycle of the report export task.

Object Source Select Object Sets the range of objects to be exported.

Extend XFTP Server Sets the FTP server to save files.

Information Report Template Sets the template of the task report.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

Version: A 369
8 Log Management

The logs record the operation information of the UNM2000 users and the important
events occurred in the system. By querying, gathering statistics of and saving logs
regularly, the administrator can detect illegal login and operations, and analyze the
failures. By browsing and gathering statistics of login, the administrator can query
the operation information of the EMS and save the logs.

Log Management Policy

Log Type

Log Statistics

Managing System Logs

Managing Operation Logs

Managing Security Logs

Managing Northbound Interface Command Logs

Managing Log Data

370 Version: A
 8 Log Management

8.1 Log Management Policy

The log management policy includes UNM2000 log management, northbound

interface command log management, log saving management, log forwarding
management and log export management.

UNM2000 Logs

The UNM2000 logs include system logs, operation logs and security logs.

u The UNM2000 system logs record the tasks that influence the running of the
UNM2000. By viewing the UNM2000 system logs, you can detect the failure
that may influence the running of the UNM2000 and process it in a timely
manner so as to ensure the normal running of the UNM2000.

u The operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client
end (such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms)
except the operations that influence the security of the UNM2000. By viewing
the operation logs, you can understand the operation performed at the
UNM2000 client end so as to trace and audit the operations. This provides
support to elimination of the influence caused by misoperation.

u The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end
that influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout
and unlocking. By viewing the UNM2000 security logs, you can understand the
operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence the security of
the UNM2000. Querying the security logs on a regular basis can effectively
ensure the security of the UNM2000.

Northbound Interface Command Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
device by the users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound interface
commands. You can view the northbound command logs to understand the
northbound interface command operations performed on the device and obtain the
device running information. The northbound interface command logs include the
TL1 command logs and Web service command logs.

Version: A 371
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Log Saving

By setting the scheduled save task of logs, the UNM2000 will save the logs to the
specified directory regularly, which provides convenience for viewing logs and
reduces the records in the database so as to improve the running speed of the
system.

Log Forwarding

The UNM2000 supports forwarding the UNM2000 logs to the FTP server to save
various logs, providing reference for maintenance and relieving the storage
pressure of the UNM2000 sever.

Log Export

The UNM2000 enables you to export the UNM2000 logs to the specified directory
so as to reduce the storage pressure on the UNM2000 server. The logs can be
exported as a TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML file.

8.2 Log Type

The UNM2000 log types include system logs, operation logs, security logs and
northbound interface command logs.

8.2.1 System Logs

The UNM2000 system logs record the running status of the UNM2000. By viewing
the UNM2000 system logs, you can detect the failure that may influence the running
of the UNM2000 and process it in a timely manner so as to ensure the normal
running of the UNM2000.

The system logs are stored in the database. You can query the operation logs via
the client end.

372 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning,
Danger Level
Normal and Danger.

Source The UNM2000 module in which the operations are performed.

Time Time of the operation execution.

Operation
The operational terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
The operation result:Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.
u Succeeded:The operation is successful and all the operation results
Operation are returned.
Result u Failed:The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded:The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all
the operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

8.2.2 Operation Logs

The UNM2000 operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000
client end (such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms)
except the operations that influence the security of the UNM2000. By viewing the
operation logs, you can understand the operation performed at the UNM2000 client
end so as to trace and audit the operations.

The operation logs are stored in the database. You can view the operation logs via
the client end.

Log Meaning

The operation logs record all the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end
(such as creating logical domains, creating NEs and confirming alarms) except the
operations that influence the security of the UNM2000.

Version: A 373
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
Operation
The name of the operation performed by users in the UNM2000.
Name
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning,
Danger Level
Normal and Danger.

Username The UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

The login mode of the user who performs the operation, including Login to
Login Mode
NMS and Login to Northbound Interface.

User Type The type of the UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

Operation
Time of the operation execution.
Time
Operation
The IP address of the terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

The operation result:Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.

u Succeeded:The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation returned.
Result u Failed:The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded:The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all
the operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

8.2.3 Security Logs

The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that
influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and
unlocking. By viewing the security logs, you can understand the operations
performed at the UNM2000 client end that influence the security of the UNM2000.
Querying the security logs on a regular basis can effectively ensure the security of
the UNM2000.

The security logs are stored in the database. You can view the security logs via the
client end.

374 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Log Meaning

The security logs record the operations performed at the UNM2000 client end that
influence the security of the UNM2000, for example, user login, user logout and
unlocking.

Description of Log Parameters

Parameter Parameters
Security
The security-related operations in the UNM2000.
Event
The danger level of the operation for the UNM2000, including Warning,
Danger Level
Normal and Danger.

Username The UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

The login mode of the user who performs the operation, including Login to
Login Mode
NMS and Login to Northbound Interface.

User Type The type of the UNM2000 user who performs the operation.

Operation
Time of the operation execution.
Time
Operation
The IP address of the terminal used for operation execution.
Terminal
Operation
Object of the operation.
Object

The operation result:Succeeded, Failed and Part Succeeded.

u Succeeded:The operation is successful and all the operation results are
Operation returned.
Result u Failed:The operation is failed.
u Part Succeeded:The operation is partly successful and partly failed; all
the operation results are returned.

Details Other information of the operation.

8.2.4 Northbound Interface Command Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
device by the users on the UNM2000 client via the northbound interface commands.
You can view the northbound command logs to understand the northbound interface
command operations performed and obtain the device running information. The
northbound interface command logs include the TL1 command logs, Web service
command logs, Socket operation logs and alarm logs.

Version: A 375
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Log Meaning

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
equipment by the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client via the northbound
interface commands.

Description of Log Parameters

u Parameters of the TL1 Command Logs

Parameter Description

No. The number of the TL1 command log

NE IP Address The IP address of the NE

Terminal IP The terminal IP address of the TL1 interface command
Terminal Port The terminal port number of the TL1 interface command

The operation result includes Succeeded, Failed and Part

Succeeded.
u Success: The operation is successful and all the operation
Operation Result
results are returned.
u Failed: The operation failed.
u Part Succeeded: The operation is partly successful.

Start time The time when the TL1 interface command starts
End time The time when the TL1 interface command ends
Duration The time duration that the TL1 interface command lasts
Details The error information of TL1 interface command
Operation Name The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users

Operation Object Object of the operation

Deliver Command The TL1 commands delivered to NEs by NE users

u Parameters of Web Service Command Logs

Parameter Description

No. The number of the Web service command log

NE IP Address The IP address of the NE

The operation result includes Succeeded and Failed.
u Success: The operation is successful and all the operation
Operation Result
results are returned.
u Failed: The operation failed.

The start time of the range in which the desired Web service interface
Start time
commands were delivered

376 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Parameter Description

The end time of the range in which the desired Web service interface
End time
commands were delivered
The time duration that the desired Web service interface commands
Duration
lasted
The details recording the query errors of Web service interface
Details
commands
ONU MAC/SN The MAC address or SN of the ONU in the Web service command log

HG MAC The MAC address of the HG in the Web service command log

Failure Reason The reason why the operation failed

Operation Name The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users

Operation Object Object of the operation

Command issued The Web service commands delivered by NE users to the NE

u Parameters of Socket Operation Logs

Parameter Description

No. The number of the Socket interface logs

Client IP Address The IP address of the client

The operation result includes Succeeded and Failed.
u Success: The operation is successful and all the operation
Operation Result
results are returned.
u Failed: The operation failed.

Connection Time The connection time of the Socket interface command

Disconnect Time The disconnection time of the Socket interface command
Duration The duration of the Socket interface command
Details The error information of Socket interface command
User Name The username of the Socket interface command
Operation Name The name of the operation performed on NEs by NE users

Channel ID The channel ID of the Socket interface command

Deliver Command The Socket interface commands delivered by NE users to the NE

u Parameters of the Alarm List Logs

Parameter Description

List ID List ID of the alarm logs

Alarm Title Title of the alarm

Channel ID Channel ID of the alarm
Alarm Status Status of the alarm: active alarm or cleared alarm

Version: A 377
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Parameter Description

Alarm Type Type of the alarm

Level of the alarm:

u Level-1 alarm
Original Level u Level-2 alarm
u Level-3 alarm
u Level-4 alarm
Event Happen Time The alarm occurrence time or clearing time

Alarm Unique Mark ID of the device alarm

Alarm Reason The reason that triggers the alarm

Alarm NE UID The UID of the alarmed device

Alarm NE Name The name of the alarmed NE
Alarm NE Device Type The type of the alarmed NE

Alarm Location Object UID The UID of the alarmed object

Alarm Location Object

The name of the alarmed object
Name
Alarm Location Object
The resource type of the alarmed object
Source Type

The location information of the alarm, such as shelf number, slot

Alarm Location Info
number and card number
Alarm Info Help Used for customized information, including names and values

8.3 Log Statistics

The UNM2000 supports gathering the statistics of the system logs, operation logs,
security logs and northbound interface command logs. You can gather statistics and
perform analysis for logs by setting System Log Statistics Conditions and Query
Filtering Conditions, so as to understand the statistics conditions of relevant
operation quickly.

Procedure

The procedures of gathering statistics of logs of different types are similar. The
following takes the system log as an example.

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical System Logs.

2. Set the query conditions according to Table 8-1 and click OK.

378 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-1 Parameter Description of the statistical system logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the items to be

Row Select the items to be displayed in the drop-
displayed in the row of
Statistics down menu of Row Statistics.
Basic the statistics result.
Info Sets the items to be
Column Select the items to be displayed in the drop-
displayed in the column
Statistics down menu of Column Statistics.
of the statistics result.

Select Source, click and then select

the system to be queried in the Select
Select the query objects
Source Info Source dialog box.
of the system log.
Note:
u The system logs of all users are queried
by default.

Queries the operation In the Operation Result group box, select

Operation Result record according to the one or more options. By default, all the
operation result. options are selected.

Queries the operation In the Danger Level group box, select one or
Danger Level record according to more options. By default, all the options are
danger level. selected.
Sets the time range to
query the operation logs
Select Start Time or End Time and set time
Time Range in this time range. If no
in the following text box.
time range is set, it will
query all logs.

Filter the operation logs

by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details in the text box at the
Details contain text right side.
box.

3. View the result in the Statistical System Logs tab.

Other Operation

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

Version: A 379
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

8.4 Managing System Logs

The system logs records the automatic operations of the UNM2000, facilitating
users to understand the UNM2000 running status. The following introduces how to
manage the system log templates and query system logs.

8.4.1 Managing System Log Templates

To query the system logs conveniently and quickly, you can set the most concerned
system log types as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query System Logs.

2. Click Query on the System Logs tab to bring up the Query System Logs
dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the system log query requirement,
referring to Table 8-2.

Table 8-2 Parameter Description of the Query System Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select Source, click and then select the

system to be queried in the Select Source
Select the query objects of
Source Info dialog box.
the system log.
Note:
u The system logs of all users are queried by
default.
Queries the operation In the Operation Result group box, select one
Operation
record according to the or more options. By default, all the options are
Result
operation result. selected.

380 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-2 Parameter Description of the Query System Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

In the Danger Level group box, select one or

Query the operation record
Danger Level more options. By default, all the options are
according to danger level.
selected.
Sets the time range to
query the operation logs in
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Time Range this time range. If no time
the following text box.
range is set, it will query all
logs.

Filter the operation logs by

Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details querying the information in
contained in the Details in the text box at the
contain the Details contain text
right side.
box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the system log query template.

Other Operation

On the System Logs tab, right-click the entry to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

8.4.2 Querying System Logs

The system logs record the automatic operations of the UNM2000, facilitating you to
understand the UNM2000 running status.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query System Logs.

2. View the query result on the System Logs tab. All the system logs of the
current day are queried by default.

Version: A 381
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Double-click the selected system log on the System Logs tab to view the
detailed information.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u Buttons on the GUI

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result. Managing
System Log Templates shows the parameters of the query conditions.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menu

382 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Right-click the System Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

u Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

u Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

u Template Management: Manages the log query template. You can edit or
delete the existing log template.

u Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

u Print: Prints the queried log.

u Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

u Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.5 Managing Operation Logs

The operation logs record the operation information of users, enabling you to trace
and check user operations. The following introduces how to manage the operation
log templates and query operation logs.

8.5.1 Managing Operation Log Templates

To query the user operations conveniently and quickly, you can set the most
concerned operation log types as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Operation Logs.

2. Click Query on the Operation Logs tab to bring up the Query Operation Logs
dialog box.

Version: A 383
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the query conditions according to the operation log query requirement,
referring to Table 8-3.

Table 8-3 Parameters in the Query Operation Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select User Name, click , and select the

user to be queried in the Select User dialog
box.
User Select users to query Note:
Name their operation logs. u The operation logs of all users will be
queried by default.
u The Select User dialog box only shows
User
the users that logged into the UNM2000
Info
and performed operations.

Select the operation Select Operation Terminal, click , and

Opera-
terminal and query select the operation terminal to be queried in
tion
operation records the Select Operation Terminal dialog box.
Termin-
according to the Note:
al
operation terminal. The operation logs of all operation terminals will
be queried by default.

Query the operation Select one or multiple check boxes for

Operation Result record according to Operation Result. All check boxes are
the operation result. selected by default.

Query the operation

Select one or multiple check boxes for Danger
Danger Level record according to
Level. All check boxes are selected by default.
danger level.

Set the time range to

query the operation
Select Start Time or End Time and set time in
Start Time Range records in this range.
the following text box.
If this item is not set,
query logs in all times.

Filter the operation

logs by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details in the text box at the
Details contain text right side.
box.

384 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-3 Parameters in the Query Operation Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Click Select under the Operation Name box

Sets the operations to
Operation Name and select the desired operation name from the
be queried.
Select Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object box.

Sets the operation
Operation Object Select the operation object to be queried in the
object to be queried.
Select Operation Object dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the operation log query template.

Other Operations

On the Operation Logs tab, right-click the entry to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

8.5.2 Querying Operation Logs

The operation logs record the operation information of users, enabling you to trace
and check user operations.

Background Information

u Filter according to username when querying operation logs. The Unselected

Value Filter pane in the Select User dialog box only displays the names of
users that have performed operations.

u The range of operation logs that users of different groups can view:

4 Users in Administrators group can view the operation logs of all the
users.

4 Users in Security Administrator Group with the Query Operation Logs

authority can view the operation logs of all users.

4 The common users that have the Query Operation Logs authority but
belong to neither the Security Administrator Group nor the
Administrators group can only view their own operation logs.

Version: A 385
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Operation Logs.

2. View the query result on the Operation Logs tab. All the operation logs of the
current day are queried by default.

3. Double-click the selected operation log on the Operation Logs tab to view the
detailed information.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icon

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

386 Version: A
 8 Log Management

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result. Managing
Operation Log Templates shows the parameter descriptions of the query
condition.

4 Delete: Deletes the selected operation log.

4 View Data: Views the data information of operation records in the

corresponding operation logs.

Note:

The View Data function is only available for viewing the operation logs of
writing service configuration to device.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menu

Right-click the Operation Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Operation Log
Templates.

4 View Data: Views the data information of operation records in the

corresponding operation logs.

4 Delete: Deletes the selected operation log.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Template Management: Manages the log query template. You can edit or
delete the existing log template.

4 Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

4 Print: Prints the queried operation log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

Version: A 387
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

8.6 Managing Security Logs

The security logs record the information on the security operations performed by the
UNM2000. Querying security logs regularly helps ensuring the security of the
network management system effectively. The following introduces how to manage
security log templates and query the security logs.

8.6.1 Managing Security Log Templates

To query the UNM2000 security logs conveniently and quickly, you can set the most
concerned security log types as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Security Logs.

2. Click Query on the Security Logs tab to bring up the Query Security Logs
dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions according to the security log query requirement,
referring to Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Parameter Description of the Query Security Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select User Name, click , and select

the user to be queried in the Select User
dialog box.
User User Selects users to query
Note:
Info Name their security logs.
u The security logs of all users will be
queried by default.
u The Select User dialog box only shows
the users that logged into the UNM2000.

388 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-4 Parameter Description of the Query Security Logs Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Select Operation Terminal, click , and

Selects the operation
Opera- select the operation terminal to be queried in
terminal. Query security
tion the Select Operation Terminal dialog box.
records according to the
Terminal Note:
operation terminal.
The security logs of all operation terminals
will be queried by default.

Queries the security

Select one or multiple check boxes for
operation record
Operation Result Operation Result. All check boxes are
according to the
selected by default.
operation result.

Queries the security Select one or multiple check boxes for

Danger Level record according to Danger Level. All check boxes are selected
danger level. by default.

Sets the time range to

query the security
Select Start Time or End Time and set time
Start Time Range records in this range. If
in the following text box.
this item is not set, query
logs in all times.

Filters the security logs

by querying the Select Details contain and enter the fields
Details contain information in the contained in the Details in the text box at the
Details contain text right side.
box.
Click Select under the Select Security
Select Security Sets the security event Event box. Select the name of operation to
Event to be queried. be queried in the Select Security Event
dialog box.

Click Select under the Select Operation

Select Operation Sets the operation object Object box. Select the operation object to be
Object to be queried. queried in the Select Operation Object
dialog box.

4. Click Save as Template to complete setting the security log query template.

Other Operations

On the Security Logs tab, right-click the entry to be queried and select Template
Management from the shortcut menu to edit or delete the existing log template.

Version: A 389
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

8.6.2 Querying Security Logs

The security logs record the information related to the security operations on the
UNM2000. Querying security logs regularly helps ensure the security of the network
management system effectively.

Background Information

The user with the Query Security Logs authority can view the security logs of all
users.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Security Logs.

2. On the Security Logs tab, view the query result. The system displays all the
security logs of the current day by default.

3. On the Security Logs tab, double-click the desired security log to view the log
details.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects the existing template and obtains

the logs that comply with the conditions.

390 Version: A
 8 Log Management

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Security Log
Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Security Logs tab to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Security Log
Templates.

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Template management: Manages the log query templates or edits / deletes

the existing log query template. See Managing Security Log Templates.

4 Copy Cell: Copies the existing log template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

4 Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7 Managing Northbound Interface Command

Logs

The northbound interface command logs record the operations performed on the
device by the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the northbound
interface commands. You can view the northbound command logs to understand
the northbound interface command operations received by the device and obtain
the device running information.

Version: A 391
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

8.7.1 Managing TL1 Command Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the TL1 commands accepted and executed by
the NEs, you can set the most concerned TL1 commands as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select
TL1 Command Logs tab and click Query to open the Query TL1 Command
Log dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed, referring to Table 8-5.

Table 8-5 Description of the Parameters in the Query TL1 Command Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Queries the operation In the Operation Result group box, select

Operation Result record according to the one or more options. By default, all the
operation result. options are selected.

Sets the time range to

query the security
operation logs in this Select Start Time or End Time and set time
Start Time Range
time range. If no time in the following text box.
range is set, it will query
all logs.

Filters the TL1 command

logs according to the Select Send Commands contain and enter
Send Commands
information in the Send the fields contained in the Send Commands
contain
Commands contain in the text box at the right side.
textbox.
Selects the operation Click Select under the Operation Name box
Select Operation
commands to be and select the desired operation name from
Name
queried. the Select Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object

Select Operation Sets the operation object
box. Select the operation object to be queried
Object to be queried.
in the Select Operation Object dialog box.

392 Version: A
 8 Log Management

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

8.7.2 Querying TL1 Command Logs

The TL1 command logs record the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the TL1 commands. You can view
the TL1 command logs to understand the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users via the TL1 commands and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
TL1 Command Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all the
TL1 command logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click a TL1 command log entry to view the details of theTL1 command
log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

Version: A 393
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing TL1 Command Log
Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the TL1 Command Logs tab to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing TL1 Command Log
Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.3 Collecting Statistics of TL1 Command Logs

The TL1 command logs record the operations performed on the device by the
UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the TL1 commands. You can
collect statistics on TL1 command logs to understand the operations performed on
the device by the UNM2000 users via the TL1 commands and obtain the device
running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical Northbound Interface

Command Logs from the main menu.

394 Version: A
 8 Log Management

2. In the lower left corner of the Statistical Northbound Interface Command

Logs window, select the TL1 Command Logs tab.

3. Click Query on the right to open the Statistical TL1 Command Log dialog
box.

4. You can set the parameters for collecting statistics on TL1 command logs. For
setting the parameters, see Table 8-6.

5. Click OK to view the statistics result.

Table 8-6 Description of the Parameters in the Statistical TL1 Command Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the items to be

Select the items to be displayed in the drop-down
Row Statistics displayed in the row of the
menu of Row Statistics.
statistics result.
Basic Sets the items to be
Statistical Select the items to be displayed in the drop-down
Informa- Note 1
displayed in the column of
Column menu of Column Statistics.
tion the statistics result.
If it is selected, the pattern of
The pattern of this table depends on the values of
Preview the statistical output table is
the statistical row and column.
displayed.

Queries the operation record

In the Operation Result group box, select one or
Operation Result according to the operation
more options. By default, all the options are selected.
result.
Sets the time range to query
the operation logs in this time Select Latest Time or Time Range to set the
Start Time Range
range. If no time range is set, statistical time of TL1 command logs.
it will query all logs.

Addition- Filters the TL1 command

al logs according to the Select Send Commands contain and enter the
Send Commands
Informa- information in the Send fields contained in the Send Commands in the text
contain
tion Commands contain box at the right side.
textbox.
Click Select under the Operation Name box and
Select Operation Selects the operation
select the desired operation name from the Select
Name commands to be queried.
Operation Name dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object box. Select

Select Operation Sets the operation object to
the operation object to be queried in the Select
Object be queried.
Operation Object dialog box.

Note 1: The values of the statistical low data and column data cannot be the same; otherwise, errors may occur.

Version: A 395
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the TL1 Command Logs tab to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the log statistics.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the log statistics into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.4 Managing Web Service Command Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the Web service commands accepted and
executed by the NEs, you can set the most concerned Web service commands as a
query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

396 Version: A
 8 Log Management

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Web Service Command Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Web
Service Command Log dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed. See Table 8-7.

Table 8-7 Description of the Parameters in the Query Web Service Command Log Dialog
Box

Parameter Description Setting

In the Operation Result group

Queries the operation record box, select one or more options.
Operation Result
according to the operation result. By default, all the options are
selected.
Sets the time range to query the
Select Latest Time or Time
security operation logs in this time
Start Time Range Range and set time in the
range. If no time range is set, it
following text box.
will query all logs.

Sets the IP address of the OLT in

OLT IP Enter it manually.
the Web service command log.

Sets the MAC address or SN of

ONU MAC/SN the ONU in the Web service Enter it manually.
command log.

Sets the MAC address of the HG

HG MAC Enter it manually.
in the Web service command log.

Queries the operation records

Failure Reason according to the operation failure Enter it manually.
reason.
Select Send Commands
Filters the TL1 command logs
contain and enter the fields
Send Commands according to the information in the
contained in the Send
contain Send Commands contain text
Commands in the text box at
box.
the right side.

Click Select under the

Operation Name box and select
Select Operation Selects the operation commands
the desired operation name from
Name to be queried.
the Select Operation Name
dialog box.

Click Select under the

Operation Object box. Select
Select Operation Sets the operation object to be
the operation object to be
Object queried.
queried in the Select Operation
Object dialog box.

Version: A 397
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.

8.7.5 Querying Web Service Command Logs

The Web service command logs record the operations performed on the device by
the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client end via the Web service commands.
You can view the Web service command logs to understand the operations
performed on the device by the UNM2000 users via the Web Service commands
and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Web Service Command Logs tab to view the query result. The system
queries all the Web service command logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click a Web service command log to view the details of the Web service
command log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

398 Version: A
 8 Log Management

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Web Service
Command Log Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Web Service Command Logs dialog box to bring up the
shortcut menu. The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Web Service
Command Log Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.6 Querying Web Service Command Logs

The Web service command logs record the operations performed on the device by
the UNM2000 users on the UNM2000 client via the Web service commands. You
can collect statistics on Web service command logs to understand the operations
performed and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Statistical Northbound Interface

Command Logs from the main menu.

Version: A 399
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. In the lower left corner of the Statistical Northbound Interface Command

Logs window, select the Web Service Command Logs tab.

3. Click Query on the right to open the Statistical Web Service Command Log
dialog box.

4. You can set the parameters for collecting statistics on Web service command
logs. For setting the parameters, see Table 8-8.

5. Click OK to view the statistics result.

Table 8-8 Description of the Parameters in the Statistical Web Service Command Log
Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the items to be displayed in the Select the items to be displayed in the
Row Statistics
row of the statistics result. drop-down menu of Row Statistics.

Statistical Sets the items to be displayed in the Select the items to be displayed in the
Basic Info
ColumnNote 1 column of the statistics result. drop-down menu of Column Statistics.

If it is selected, the pattern of the The pattern of this table depends on the
Preview
statistical output table is displayed. values of the statistical row and column.
In the Operation Result group box,
Queries the operation record
Operation Result select one or more options. By default, all
according to the operation result.
the options are selected.

Sets the time range to query the

Select Latest Time or Time Range to
operation logs in this time range. If
Start Time Range set the statistical time of Web service
no time range is set, it will query all
command logs.
logs.

Sets the IP address of the OLT in

OLT IP Enter it manually.
the Web service command log.
Additional Sets the MAC address or SN of the
Informa- ONU MAC/SN ONU in the Web service command Enter it manually.
tion log.

Sets the MAC address of the HG in

HG MAC Enter it manually.
the Web service command log.

Queries the operation records

Failure Reason according to the operation failure Enter it manually.
reason.
Filters the Web service command Select Send Commands contain and
Send Commands logs according to the information in enter the fields contained in the Send
contain the Send Commands contain text Commands in the text box at the right
box. side.

400 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-8 Description of the Parameters in the Statistical Web Service Command Log
Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Click Select under the Operation Name

Select Operation Selects the operation commands to box and select the desired operation
Name be queried. name from the Select Operation Name
dialog box.

Click Select under the Operation Object

Select Operation Sets the operation object to be box. Select the operation object to be
Object queried. queried in the Select Operation Object
dialog box.

Note 1: The values of the statistical row data and column data cannot be the same; otherwise, errors may occur.

Other Operation

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client.

4 Query: Sets the query conditions to view the query result.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Web Service Command Logs dialog box to bring up the
shortcut menu. The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the log statistics.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the log statistics into the selected
directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log records into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

Version: A 401
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

8.7.7 Querying Socket Operation Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the Socket interface commands accepted and
executed by the NEs, you can set the most concerned Socket interface commands
as a query template.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select
Socket Operation Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Socket
Operation Log dialog box.

3. Set the query conditions as needed, referring to Table 8-9.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.
Table 8-9 Parameters in the Query Socket Operation Log Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Select User Name or Operation

User information related to the Terminal, click the selection button
User Info
operation interface command and set the options in the displayed
dialog box.

Queries the operation record In the Operation Result group box,

Operation Result according to the operation select one or more options. By
result. default, all the options are selected.

Sets the time range to query the Select Latest Time or Time Range
Start Time Range security operation records in this and set time in the following
range. textbox.
Sets the time range to query the
Select Start Time and End Time,
Disconnect Time security operation logs in this
and set time in the following text
Range time range. If no time range is
box.
set, it will query all logs.

402 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-9 Parameters in the Query Socket Operation Log Dialog Box (Continued)

Parameter Description Setting

Filters the Socket operation logs Select Send Commands contain

Send Commands according to the information in and enter the fields contained in the
contain the Send Commands contain Send Commands in the text box at
textbox. the right side.

Queries the channel ID of the

Channel ID Enter it manually.
Socket interface operation.

Click Select under the Operation

Select Operation Selects the operation Name box and select the desired
Name commands to be queried. operation name from the Select
Operation Name dialog box.

8.7.8 Querying Socket Operation Logs

The Socket operation logs record the Socket interface operations performed on the
UNM2000 client end by the UNM2000 users. You can view the Socket operation
logs to understand the Socket interface operations performed by the UNM2000
users and obtain the device running information.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Socket Operation Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all
Socket operation logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click a Socket operation log to view the details of the Socket interface
operation log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Version: A 403
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client end.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Querying Socket Operation Log
Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Socket Operation Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut
menu. The descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Querying Socket Operation Log
Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log record into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.7.9 Managing Alarm List Log Templates

To conveniently and quickly query the alarm list commands accepted and executed
by the NEs, you can set the most concerned alarm list commands as a query
template.

404 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Alarm List Logs tab and click Query to open the Query Alarm List Logs
dialog box.

3. Set the query criteria as needed, referring to Table 8-10.

4. Click Save as Template to open the Save as Template dialog box. Enter
Template Name and Remark, and click OK.
Table 8-10 Parameter Description of the Query Alarm List Logs Dialog Box

Parameter Description Setting

Sets the time range to query the Select Latest Time or Time Range
Start Time Range security operation records in this and set time in the following text
range. box.
Sets the alarm list ID Select List ID or Range to set the
Alarm List Info
information. list ID information.
Queries the channel ID of the
Channel ID Enter it manually.
alarm list ID.

8.7.10 Querying Alarm List Logs

Alarm list logs record the list of alarms triggered by user operations at the UNM2000
client. The alarm list logs include active alarms and cleared alarms.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. In the main menu, select Security→Query Northbound Interface Command

Logs.

Version: A 405
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. In the lower left corner of the View the TL1 Command Logs window, select the
Alarm List Logs tab to view the query result. The system queries all alarm list
logs of the current day by default.

3. Double-click an alarm list log to view the details of the alarm list log.

Note:

Click the title bar of the query result table to sequence the result.

Other Operation

u GUI icons

4 Refresh: Obtains the latest data from the database at the server end and
displays them at the client.

4 Query According to Template: Selects an existing template and queries the

logs that comply with the conditions.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Alarm List Log
Templates.

4 View / Hide Details: Displays / hides the details pane of the selected log.

u Shortcut menus

Right-click the Alarm List Logs dialog box to bring up the shortcut menu. The
descriptions of the menu items are as follows.

4 Query: Sets the query condition to view the query result. For the
description of the query parameters, see Managing Alarm List Log
Templates.

4 Copy: Selects to copy the cell or row and edits or deletes the existing log
template.

4 Print: Prints the queried log.

4 Export: Exports all records or the selected records.

¡ Export All Records: Exports all the queried log records into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

406 Version: A
 8 Log Management

¡ Export Selected Record: Exports the selected log records into the
selected directory in format of TXT, Excel, CSV, XML, PDF or HTML.

8.8 Managing Log Data

By saving logs, you can clear the unnecessary logs manually or on a regular basis
to avoid that the logs occupy too many resources. By exporting the logs as files, you
can view logs or locate failures.

8.8.1 Managing the Log Forwarding Server

By setting the log forwarding server, you can forward the logs of the UNM2000 to
other servers.

8.8.1.1 Viewing the Syslog Forwarding Server

Check whether the preset Syslog forwarding server meets the requirement.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→System Log Forwarding Server Management from the

main menu to open the System Log Forwarding Server Management tab,
and view the information of the existing Syslog forwarding server.

Other Operations

Click the button below or the right-click the corresponding entry to select Modify,
Stop / Enable, Delete, Refresh, Copy Cell, Print or Export.

8.8.1.2 Adding A Syslog Forwarding Server

You can add a new Syslog forwarding server if the existing server cannot meet the
requirement.

Version: A 407
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Supervisor Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Security→System Log Forwarding Server Management from the

main menu to open the System Log Forwarding Server Management tab.

2. Right-click in the blank area of the System Log Forwarding Server

Management tab and select Add to open the System Log Forwarding Server
Settings dialog box.

3. Set the parameters of the Syslog forwarding server, referring to Table 8-11.

Table 8-11 Description of the Syslog Forwarding Server

Parameter Description

Server Server IP Sets the IP address of the Syslog forwarding server.

Information
Server Port Sets the port of the Syslog forwarding server.

Sets the type of log to be forwarded, including:

u System Logs
u Security Logs
Log Type u Operation Logs
u NE Logs
u TL1 Logs
u Current Alarm Logs
Syslog Sets the level of logs to be forwarded, including:
Information u EMERG:the system is unavailable.
u ALERT:the event should be handled in a timely manner.
u CRIT:critical event.
Log Level u ERR:error event.
u WARNING:warning event.
u NOTICE:common but important event.
u INFO:useful information.
u DEBUG:debugging information.

408 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-11 Description of the Syslog Forwarding Server (Continued)

Parameter Description

Sets the facility level to be forwarded, consistent with the

setting on the Syslog forwarding server side. including:
u KERN:kernel log information.
u USER:random user log information.
u MAIL:mail system log information.
u DAEMON:system daemon process log information.
u AUTH:security management log information.
u SYSLOG:Syslog forwarding server log information.
Facility Level
u LPR:printer log information.
u NEWS:news service log information.
u UUCP:UUCP system log information.
u CRON:log information of the system daemon process
CRON.
u AUTHPRIV:private security management log information.
u DAEMON:system daemon process log information.
u LOCAL0 to 7:reserve for local.
Sets the transmission protocol type, including TCP and UDP,
protocol type which should be consistent with the setting of the Syslog
forwarding server.

Character Sets the character string, and the logs comply with the
Other
String Filtering character string filtering conditions will be forwarded.
Information
Comment Sets the remark information.
Enabled Sets whether to enable the current settings.

4. Click OK to add a new Syslog forwarding server.

8.8.2 Setting the Log Overflow Saving

Set the saving task of the log overflow. The UNM2000 regularly checks whether the
log data history (operation logs, TL1 logs, system logs, NE logs and security logs) of
the database meets the pre-set conditions. If the overflow saving conditions are
met, the UNM2000 saves the log data automatically. The saved log data history will
be deleted from the database.

Version: A 409
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default overflow saving tasks of history data, which
cannot be deleted. You can modify the overflow saving conditions of the
corresponding task as needed.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The procedures of setting log overflow saving are similar. The following takes
setting operation log overflow saving as an example.

1. Select System→Save Data to open the Save the Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Overflow Saving→Save Operation Log

Overflow from the left pane to view the existing saving task of operation log
overflow.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding saving task of alarm history overflow.

No. Access Method

1 Double-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding overflow saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click on the left side of Overflow Saving, and right-click the
3
corresponding overflow saving task to select Attribute.

4. Set the attribute of the overflow saving task, referring to Table 8-12.

Table 8-12 Description of the Overflow Saving Task Parameters

Parameter Description

The name of the overflow saving task, which cannot be edited by

Task Name
users.
Enabled Select it to enable the task.
Basic
Sets the execution cycle of the task. The default value is Every 2
Information Task Type
days.

Execution
Sets the execution time of the task.
Time

410 Version: A
 8 Log Management

Table 8-12 Description of the Overflow Saving Task Parameters (Continued)

Parameter Description

Start Time Sets the start time of the task.

End Time Sets the end time of the task.
u Select Save to File to save the data history that meets the
overflow saving conditions into files.
Saving You can convert the data history into CSV files and save
Mode them into the sever harddisk or into the FTP server.
u Select Delete Directly to delete the data history that meets
Extended the overflow saving conditions directly.
information
If the data history exceeds the maximum saving entry number or
Overflow
exceeds the record threshold, a pre-set proportion of the
Limit
database will be saved.
Capacity The data history that exceeds the reserving days of the database
Limit will be saved during the saving task.

5. Click OK.

6. Select the corresponding overflow saving task in the left pane and click
Execute Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom
right pane.

8.8.3 Setting the Manual Log Saving

To prevent insufficient space, the UNM2000 supports saving operation logs, system
logs, NE logs, security logs and TL1 logs manually

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides the default manual saving tasks of log data, which cannot
be deleted. You can modify the parameters of the corresponding saving task as
needed.

Version: A 411
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

The name of the manually saved file can be marked with the saving time.
You can turn on the switch to mark the saving time in the name of the
saved file by modifying the background configuration file. For specific
operations, contact the FiberHome technical engineer. The procedures
for setting manual saving of logs are the similar. The following uses the
operation logs as an example to introduce how to set the manual saving.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Save Data from the main menu to open the Save Data tab.

2. Select Save History Data→Save Manually→Save Operation Log from the

left pane to view the existing manual saving task of operation log.

3. Select any one access method from the table below to open the Attribute
dialog box of the corresponding manual saving task of data history.

No. Access Method

1 Double-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane.

Right-click the corresponding manual saving task in the right pane and select
2
Attribute.
In the left pane, click on the left side of Save Manually, and right-click the
3
corresponding manual saving task to select Attribute.

4. Modify the parameters of the corresponding task in the Attribute dialog box
according to requirement and click OK.

5. Select the corresponding manual saving task in the left pane and click Execute
Now in the upper right pane. View the execution result in the bottom right pane.

412 Version: A
9 Resource Statistics Management

Resource statistics management enables you to manage statistics of all physical

resources and logical resources in the network. The UNM2000 provides the unified
resource statistics and statistics export, which helps you understand the usage of all
network resources in real time, and supports service planning and network capacity
expansion.

Function Overview

Setting the Resource Statistics Policy

Managing Statistics Templates

Querying Statistical Reports in Real Time

Exporting Statistical Reports at Specified Time

Customizing Resource Statistics Reports

OLT Resource Statistics Report

Version: A 413
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

9.1 Function Overview

Resource statistics management mainly includes Resource Statistics, Statistics

Export and Statistical Template Management. You can gather statistics on all
network resources in real time or at the preset time and export the statistical result
as a report.

The function is described as shown in Table 9-1.

Table 9-1 Description of Resource Statistics Management

Statistical Report Generation

Function Name Function Description
Method
Sets the statistical range to gather
u Displays it on the UNM2000
statistics on physical resources and
Resource GUI in real time.
logical resources in the entire network.
Statistics u Exports it to the local
Filters the resources in the object tree
computer.
based on the statistical range.

Creates scheduled tasks to gather

statistics of physical resources and Automatically exports it to the
Export Statistics
logical resources in the entire network at FTP server.
specified time.

The UNM2000 enables you to manage

Statistical default and custom templates.
Template Upon creating statistical tasks, you can -
Management select statistical templates according to
statistical requirements.

Resource Statistical Report Panorama

Table 9-2 shows the resource statistical reports supported by the UNM2000.

414 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on information

Logical address, NE
of the specified NE in the
name, NE IP address,
specified area, including basic
NE type, NE version,
information, slot usage, service
NE Resource NE protocol type, slot
card usage, uplink card usage,
Statistics usage, service card
PON service card usage and
Report usage, uplink card
PON port usage.
usage, PON service
Gathers statistics on the number
card usage and PON
of NEs in the specified area
port usage.
based on NE type or NE version.

Gathers statistics on the

information of all cards under the
Card name, card type,
specified NE, including NE basic
slot address, card
information, card basic
Card Resource software version, card
Physical information, online status, card
Statistics hardware version,
Resource power-on time and PON port
Report number of used PON
Statistics usage.
ports and PON port
Report Gathers statistics on the number
usage.
of cards under the specified NEs
based on NE type or card type.

Gathers statistics on the

information of all ports under the
specified NE, including NE basic
information, card basic Card port name, card
information, online status, card port number, card port
Port Resource
power-on time and PON port type, port remark,
Statistics
usage. status, optical module
Report
Gathers statistics on the number type and PON port
of card ports under the specified running status.
NE based on slot address, card
type, card name or card port
type.

Version: A 415
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on the

ONU authorization
information of all ONUs under the
number, ONU name,
specified NE, including NE basic
ONU alias name, ONU
information, card basic
type, ONU category,
information, card port basic
ONU physical
information, ONU association
address, ONU logical
ONU Resource information, LAN port usage, E1
SN, ONU logical SN
Statistics port usage, voice port usage and
password, ONU
Report uplink / downlink bandwidth
management IP
usage.
address, ONU online
Gathers statistics on the number
status, ONU service
of ONUs under the specified NE
class, ONU firmware
based on NE basic information,
version and ONU
card basic information or ONU
hardware version.
basic information.
Gathers statistics on port
attributes of all ONUs under the
specified NE, including NE basic
information, card basic
ONU name, ONU alias
information, ONU basic
name, ONU type,
ONU Port information, ONU port basic
ONU authorization
Resource information, ONU data port
number, ONU port
Statistics information, ONU voice port
number, ONU port
ReportNote 2 information, bandwidth template
name, ONU port type
and WAN connection type.
and port status.
Gathers statistics on the number
of all ONU ports under the
specified NE based on ONU port
attributes.
Gathers statistics on MSAN port
attributes of the specified NE,
including the NE basic
MSAN Port Port type, port remark,
information, card basic
Resource port unique ID, service
information, MSAN port basic
Statistics type, CVLAN rule and
information, DSL port status
Report CVLAN mode.
information, MSAN VLAN
information and voice port
information.

416 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on the number

of MSAN ports under the
specified NE based on MSAN
port attributes.

Area name, total

Gathers statistics on PON quantities of PON
network resources in the ports, online PON
Area Statistical specified logical domain, ports, OLT uplink
Report including the PON port resource, ports, in-use OLT
OLT uplink port resource and uplink ports and ONUs
ONU resource. connected to the OLT,
and ONU online ratio.
Gathers statistics on quantities of
Equivalent NE
actual NEs and equivalent NEs in NE type and
Statistics
the network based on the NE equivalent coefficient.
Report Note 1
type or equivalent coefficient.

Device name, device

Gathers statistics on port
type, device IP
Switch Port attributes of the switch in the
address, device MAC
Resource specified area, including device
address, port index,
Statistics basic information, port basic
port type, port status,
Report information and port extension
port description,
information.
remark and rate.
Customizes statistical tasks
Customizes the
according to your own
statistical items as
Custom requirements. The statistical
needed, which should
Statistical items include NE information,
cover the NE, card,
Report card information, card port
card port, ONU and
information, ONU information
ONU port information.
and ONU port information.

Version: A 417
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on ONU user Card port number,

information of the specified NE, ONU authorization
including the NE basic number, ONU name,
information, card port number, ONU type, ONU
ONU User ONU basic information and ONU manufacturer, identify
Statistics user details. information,
Report community address,
Gathers statistics on the number
mobile number, post
of ONU users under the specified
code, device model
NE based on the ONU user
and ONU service
information.
class.
Gathers statistics on local VLAN
attributes of the specified NE,
including the NE basic
information, uplink interface Uplink interface
Local VLAN number, Trunk group number, number, Trunk group
Statistics Trunk information, VLAN and number, Trunk
Resource Report tag/untag attributes. information, VLAN and
Statistics Gathers statistics on the number tag/untag attributes.
Report of Other of local VLANs of the specified
Types NE based on local VLAN
attributes.
Gathers statistics on MGC
service attributes of the specified
NE, including the NE basic
information, MGC service
NE MGC attributes, primary / secondary MGC protocol type,
Service DNS server address, SIP registry MGC IP address /
Statistics server information and SIP proxy domain address and
Report server information. MGC port number.
Gathers statistics on the number
of MGC services of the specified
NE based on MGC service
attributes of the NE.
Gathers statistics on the device
Device Type
categories and types, including Device category and
Statistics
the basic information, device device type.
Report
category and device type.

418 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on the

quantities of various devices of
the specified NE based on the
device category or device type.

Gathers statistics on the

PON Device quantities of PON devices and
Capability PON ports under the specified Statistical category
Statistics NE based on the default and statistical name.
Note 1
Report statistical items (statistical
categories and names).

Gathers statistics on ONU WAN WAN connection

service attributes of the specified index, WAN
NE, including the NE basic connection name,
information, ONU basic WAN connection
information and WAN connection mode, WAN
service information. connection type,
Gathers statistics on the quantity VLAN ID of WAN
of ONU WAN connection connection, L3 rate
ONU WAN
services of the specified NE limit uplink min.
Service
based on ONU WAN service assured bandwidth, L3
Statistics
attributes. rate limit uplink max.
Report
allowed bandwidth, L3
rate limit downlink min.
assured bandwidth, L3
Gathers statistics on L3 service
rate limit downlink
rate limit based on ONU WAN
max. allowed
connection service attributes.
bandwidth and L3 rate
limit uplink fixed
bandwidth.
NE name, card name,
card port name, ONU
name, ONU alias
ONU Out-of- Gathers statistics on the out-of- name, out-of-service
Service Time service time of all ONUs under reason, ONU
Statistics the specified NE by setting the accumulative
Report querying conditions. interruption duration,
ONU interruption times
and last interruption
duration of ONU.

Version: A 419
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

Gathers statistics on
management VLAN attributes of
the specified NE, including the
NE basic information,
Management Management VLAN
management VLAN name,
VLAN name, management
management VLAN type and
Statistics VLAN type, VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Report and inner VLAN ID.
Gathers statistics on the number
of management VLANs of the
specified NE based on
management VLAN attributes.

Gathers statistics on LLDP local

LLDP information and LLDP remote LLDP status, LLDP
Information information, including the NE management IP
Statistics basic information, LLDP status address and LLDP
Note 1
Report and LLDP management IP startup time
address.
Gathers statistics on local
management interface
configuration attributes of all
ONUs under the specified NE,
including the NE basic
ONU physical
information, ONU basic
address, configuration
ONU Local information, serial port status,
enabling, serial port,
Manager Telnet user-side / network-side
Telnet user-side /
Configuration attributes and Web user-side /
network-side attributes
Statistics network-side attributes.
and Web user-side /
Report Gathers statistics on the quantity
network-side
of local management interfaces
attributes.
of all ONU ports under the
specified NE based on local
management interface
configuration attributes of the
ONU.

420 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-2 Resource Statistical Report Panorama (Continued)

Type Table Application Scenario Key Statistical Items

OLT PON port Tx

optical power, ONU
uplink port Rx / Tx
Gathers statistics on the optical
optical power, OLT
power information of the
uplink port Rx / Tx
specified NE, including the OLT
Optical Power optical power, optical
PON port optical power, ONU
Statistics module temperature,
uplink port optical power, OLT
Report Note 1Note optical module
3 uplink port optical power, number
voltage, maximum
of ONUs with low optical power
distance, PON port
and the optical modules of the
optical module
ONUs with low optical power.
presence status and
number of ONUs with
low optical power.

Logical domain, NE
name, NE IP address,
NE type, slot address,
card name, card type,
Gathers statistics on GPON
card port number, card
service bandwidth of ONU,
GPON Service port name, ONU
including fixed bandwidth,
Bandwidth authorization number,
assured bandwidth and
Statistics ONU name, ONU alias
maximum bandwidth of certain
name, ONU type,
service types.
service type, fixed
bandwidth, assured
bandwidth and
maximum bandwidth.
Note 1: Customizing statistical templates is not supported.
Note 2: Before executing the ONU port resource statistics, you need to set the rate limit
scheme according to Setting the Rate Limit Scheme for ONU Port Resource Statistics.
Note 3: Before executing the optical power statistical task, you need to set the statistical policy
and the low optical power threshold of ONUs according to Setting the Optical Power
Statistical Policy / ONU Low Optical Power Threshold.

Real-time Statistical Operation GUI

Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display the

Resource Statistics tab.

Version: A 421
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

(1) Access method of the real-time statistical (2) Operational pane of the real-time statistical
task task

Scheduled Export Operation GUI

Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display the

Statistics Export tab.

422 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

(1) Access method of the scheduled statistical (2) Operational pane of the scheduled
task statistical task

9.2 Setting the Resource Statistics Policy

Before executing a resource statistical task, you can set the related parameters to
control the statistical policy.

9.2.1 Setting the Optical Power Statistical Policy / ONU Low

Optical Power Threshold

Before executing the optical power statistical task, you need to set the statistical
policy and low optical power threshold.

Purpose

Set the optical power statistical policy and the ONU low optical power threshold.

Version: A 423
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

Upon executing an optical power statistical task, the UNM2000 will collect statistics
on ONU low optical power data according to the preset policy and ONU lower
optical power threshold. The function is detailed as follows:

u Supports only collecting statistics of PON ports with optical modules.

u Supports only displaying ONUs with low optical power.

u Supports setting the low optical power threshold for the ONU Rx optical power.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Expand Resource Statistics Settings and select Optical Power Statistics/

ONU Low Light Threshold.

3. Set the optical power statistical policy and the ONU low optical power threshold
according to the following table.

Parameter Value Range

EPON low light threshold(dBm) -27 to -3

10G EPON low light threshold
-28.5 to -10
(symmetric/asymmetric)(dBm)

GPON/XGPON/XGSPON low light

-28 to -8
threshold(dBm)

424 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Parameter Value Range

Only PON ports with light modules are

Select or deselect the check box.
counted
Displays only low light ONU records Select or deselect the check box.

4. Click OK to complete the settings.

9.2.2 Setting the Rate Limit Scheme for ONU Port Resource
Statistics

Before executing the ONU port resource statistical task, you need to set the rate
limit scheme.

Purpose

Set the rate limit scheme for the ONU port resource statistical task.

Background Information

Upon executing an ONU port resource statistical task, the UNM2000 collects
statistics on ONU port rate information according to the preset rate limit scheme.

The UNM2000 supports the rate limit schemes: ONU port service configuration,
ONU data port rate limit configuration, ONU data port configuration, ONU data
service configuration and service template binding.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Parameter Settings in the main menu to open the Parameter

Settings dialog box.

2. Expand Resource Statistics Settings and select ONU Port Resource

Statistics Speed Limit.

3. Select the rate limit scheme according to Prompt Information in the dialog
box.

Version: A 425
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click OK to complete the settings.

9.3 Managing Statistics Templates

The UNM2000 provides the unified statistical template management function, and
supports referencing, creating, modifying or deleting statistical templates.

9.3.1 Background Information

Overview

You need to select a statistical template during creating a statistical task. The
UNM2000 gathers statistics on and analyzes the specified logical domains and
specified NEs in the entire network according to the template attributes (template
types and statistical items).

The UNM2000 provides two statistical templates: Default Template and Custom
Template. When the default templates do not meet the requirements, you can
customize templates.

Template Type

Template Type Description Supported Operation

Default The template names and statistical items of

- Reference
templates default statistical templates cannot be modified.

Gathers statistics on attributes highly related to

Information
the target resource based on the specified
Custom statistics Create, reference, modify
statistical items.
templates and delete
Quantity Gathers statistics on quantity of the target
statistics resources based on the specified statistical items.

426 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Differences Between Information Statistics and Quantity Statistics

The following uses Card Resource Statistics as an example to introduce the

differences between information statistics and quantity statistics.

Table 9-3 Differences Between Information Statistics and Quantity Statistics

Item Information Statistics Quantity Statistics

Gathers statistics on the quantities of cards with

Statistics Gathers statistics on attributes highly related to different attributes and sum them up
Target the card. automatically based on the specified statistical
items.
u NE information: NE name, NE IP address
and NE type
u NE information: NE name, NE IP address
u Slot information: slot address
and NE type
Statistics Item u Card information: card name, card type and
u Card information: card type and card
card software / hardware version
software / hardware version
u PON port information: number of used PON
ports and PON port usage

Displays the information of the statistical items

Displays the information of the statistical items
and quantity of cards calculated based on the
as shown below.
statistical items.
Statistical
Result

9.3.2 Viewing Statistical Templates

This section introduces how to view statistical templates.

Background Information

The UNM2000 provides independent template management windows for different

resource statistical objects. When a user selects resource statistical tasks, you can
enter the corresponding template management window.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Version: A 427
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

The following introduces how to view NE statistical templates.

1. Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→NE Resource

Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2. Click to open the Custom Template dialog box and view

details of the current template.

9.3.3 Creating Statistical Templates

When the default templates cannot meet the requirements for statistics, you can
create statistical templates.

428 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Background Information

u The UNM2000 provides independent template management windows for

different resource statistical objects. When a user selects resource statistical
tasks, you can enter the corresponding template management window.

u The following resource statistical tasks do not support creating statistical

templates: equivalent NE statistics, PON device capability statistics, LLDP
information statistics and optical power statistics.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Procedure

The following introduces how to create a card resource statistical template.

1. Click it to open the Custom Template dialog box.

1) Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card

Resource Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2) Click to open the Custom Template dialog box.

2. Create a template.

1) Click to display the Create Template dialog box.

Version: A 429
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2) Setting template attributes according to Table 9-4.

Table 9-4 Template Configuration Description

Item Operation Description

Template The template name cannot be empty.

Indicates the name of the template.
Name It contains up to 30 bytes.

u Select Info Statistics: Gathers

statistics on attributes highly
related to the target resource
based on the specified statistical See Table 9-3 for the difference
Template
items. between the information statistics and
Type
u Select Quantity Statistics: quantity statistics.
Gathers statistics on quantity of
the target resources based on the
specified statistical items.

Statistics The content displayed under

Select the statistical items according
Combination Statistics Combination Items varies
to user requirements.
Item with different template types.

3) Click OK.

430 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

9.3.4 Modifying Statistical Templates

This section introduces how to modify statistical templates.

Precautions

The UNM2000 only supports modifying custom statistical templates.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The custom statistical template is available.

Procedure

The following introduces how to modify a card resource statistical template.

1. Click it to open the Custom Template dialog box.

1) Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card

Resource Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2) Click to open the Custom Template dialog box.

2. Modify a template.

1) Select a custom template and click to open the Modify

Template dialog box.

2) Modify template attributes according to Table 9-4.

Version: A 431
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3) Click OK.

9.3.5 Deleting Statistical Templates

This section introduces how to delete statistical templates.

Precautions

The UNM2000 only supports deleting custom statistical templates.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The custom statistical template is available.

Procedure

The following introduces how to delete a card resource statistical template.

1. Click it to open the Custom Template dialog box.

1) Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card

Resource Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2) Click to open the Custom Template dialog box.

2. Delete a template.

1) Select a custom template and click .

432 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

2) Click Yes in the alert box that appears.

9.4 Querying Statistical Reports in Real Time

The UNM2000 supports collecting statistics on all physical resources and logical
resources in the network in real time and presents the statistical result as reports.

The key procedures for collecting statistics on physical resources and logical
resources are the same. The following introduces how to query the card resource
statistical report.

Purpose

This function helps you quickly obtain the usage of all resources in the network and
understand the status of network resources in real time.

Background Information

The report format supports .txt/.xml/.csv/.pdf/.xls/.html.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

u The statistical template is planned.

Configuration Example

Statistical Task Name Statistical Template Name Template Type

Card Resource Statistics Card Information List Information Statistics

Procedure

1. Select a statistical task.

Select Resource Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Card

Resource Statistics in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

Version: A 433
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select a statistical template.

Expand the drop-down list on the right of Statistics Template and select Card
Information List.

Note:

If the existing templates cannot meet the requirements for statistics, you
can customize statistical templates according to Creating Statistical
Templates.

3. Select the statistical range.

1) Click Statistics Range to open the Select Object dialog box.

2) (Optional) Select the statistical type.

Note:

The statistical type should be selected for some resource statistical tasks.

434 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

¡ NE Statistics: The minimum granularity of statistics is the NE.

¡ Range Statistics: The minimum granularity of statistics is the logical

domain.

3) Select the statistical object.

4) Click OK. The system automatically starts the statistical task.

4. View the real-time statistical result.

Version: A 435
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Subsequent Operation

After collecting statistics is completed, you can export the statistical report.

u Export the specified records: Select multiple entries and select Export→
Export Selected Record from the shortcut menu.

u Export all records: Select any entry and select Export→Export All Records
from the shortcut menu.

9.5 Exporting Statistical Reports at Specified

Time

The UNM2000 supports creating scheduled tasks, which will gather statistics
physical and logical resources in the entire network at the preset time and
automatically export the statistical report to the XFTP server.

The key procedures for exporting physical resources and logical resources at the
preset time are the same. The following introduces how to export the card resource
statistics.

436 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Purpose

You can create scheduled statistical tasks, which will export the statistical results to
the specified FTP server at the preset time. This helps you obtain physical resource
statistics on a regular basis and analyze the network status.

Background Information

u The exported files are classified by resource names and automatically saved to
the root directory of the XFTP server. For example, the exported file of NE
resource statistics is stored in the \Resource_Statistics\NE_Export directory.

u The supported report formats include .xml and .csv.

Prerequisite

u The statistical template is created. For procedures, see Creating Statistical

Templates.

u The XFTP server is set. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u You have the authority of Inspector Group or higher authority.

Configuration Example

Table 9-5 Configuration Example of Exporting NE Resource Statistics

Attribute Configuration Item Example

Task Name Test01

Enable Select Enable
Execution Cycle Every day
Basic Information
Execution Time 9:44:01 AM
Start Time 2019-10-16 09:43:51
End Time 2019-10-18 09:43:51
Statistical NE / objects under the NE (the new
Statistical policy NEs will not be automatically added into the
Object Source
statistical task)

Statistical Object Custom

XFTP Server FTP:111(10.170.161.161)

Statistical Template List of NE information.

Extend Information
File (statistical report)
XML
type

Version: A 437
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select a statistics export task.

Select Export Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics Export→NE

Resource Statistics Export in the Browse tree to open the operational pane.

2. Create a statistical export task according to the configuration example in this

section.

1) Click Create to open the Create NE Resource Statistics Export dialog

box.

2) Set Basic Information according to Table 9-6 and Figure 9-1.

Table 9-6 Parameters in Basic Information

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

Task Name Set it manually.

u Selected: Activate the scheduled task.

Enable u Deselected: Deactivate the scheduled
task.
u One time: The task will be executed once
it takes effect.
u Every (days): Enter a value ranging from
Basic Information 1 to 365.
Execution CycleNote 1
u Every week: Select a day during a week
to execute the task.
u Every month: Select a day during a
month to execute the task.
Set the task execution time in the execution
Execution Time cycle.
The format is hh:mm:ss.

438 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-6 Parameters in Basic Information (Continued)

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

Set the time when the periodical statistical

Start Time task starts.
The format is yyyy-hh-dd hh:mm:ss.

Set the time when the periodical statistical

End Time task ends. Check it and it takes effect.
The format is yyyy-hh-dd hh:mm:ss.

Note 1: When the execution cycle is set to One time, Execution Time/Start Time/End Time in
Basic Information is hidden.

Figure 9-1 The Basic Information Configuration GUI

3) Set Object Source according to Table 9-7 and Figure 9-2.

Table 9-7 Parameters in Object Source

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

u Gathers statistics on all NEs in the logical

domain (the new NE will be automatically
added to the statistical task).
Statistical policy
u Statistical NE / objects under the NE (the
Object Source
new NEs will not be automatically added
into the statistical task)

Selects the object based on the statistical

Statistical Object
policy.

Version: A 439
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Figure 9-2 The Object Source Configuration GUI

4) Set Extend Information according to Table 9-8 and Figure 9-3.

Table 9-8 Parameters in Extend Information

Attribute Configuration Item Settings

Select the export path from the drop-down list

XFTP Server
for the statistical report.

Select a statistical template from the drop-

Extend Information Statistical Template
down list.
File (statistical report) Select the statistical report format from the
type drop-down list.

Figure 9-3 The Extend Information Configuration GUI

5) Click OK to view the creation result.

3. Execute the task.

4 Scheduled execution: The system executes the task automatically

according to the execution cycle and time set at Step 2.

440 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

4 Manual execution: Click Execute Now.

4. View the execution result.

1) Select the task entry and view Execution Result.

¡ Task progress: 100%

¡ Task result: success

2) Click View Details to view the export result of the statistical report.

5. View the exported information.

4 View details now: In the View Details pane, right-click the first data entry
and select Open File.

4 View details by accessing the XFTP server: In the View Details pane,
access the XFTP server according to the path displayed in the second
data row.

Other Operations

u Export task records:

4 Export the specified records: Select multiple entries and select Export→
Export Selected Record from the shortcut menu.

4 Export all records: Select any entry and select Export→Export All
Records from the shortcut menu.

Version: A 441
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u View task attributes: Right-click a task and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

9.6 Customizing Resource Statistics Reports

You can customize resource statistics reports in the UNM2000, and query and
export all related resource information required in project scenarios in a unified
manner. This brings improved working efficiency.

Background Information

Earlier UNM2000 versions support collecting classified statistics of multiple physical

inventories and exporting classified resource reports. However, in actual projects,
users need to query the related resource report as required by specific scenarios. In
this case, it is time consuming and arduous to manually combine multiple classified
resource reports into one. To solve the problem, this UNM2000 version supports
customizing resource statistics reports. You can select multiple statistics items
across object layers to customize a statistics report template. In this way, you can
query and export all required resource information in a unified manner.

The custom resource statistics report function provides a default ONU Port
Business List statistics template. The table below describes its related statistics
items and resource objects. You can use this default template to obtain multi-layer
resource information such as ONU port, device type and card type.

Statistics Item Resource Object Category

Logical Address

NE
NE Basic information
NE IP Address
NE Type

Slot Address Card Basic information

Card Port Number Card port Basic information
ONU Authorization Number
ONU Type ONU Basic information
ONU Physical Address

ONU Port Name ONU port

Basic information
ONU Port Number ONU port

Service type ONU port Data port service

442 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Statistics Item Resource Object Category

CVLAN Mode
CVLAN ID Data port service

Public Network IP
Endpoint User Name/SIP
Telephone No. ONU port Voice port service
Physical Phone Number

Voice CVLAN
ONU Online Status
ONU Last Offline Time Status information
ONU
ONU Last Offline Duration
ONU Firmware Version ONU version information
WAN Connected Type ONU port Basic service information

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The XFTP server is configured.

Procedure

u Customize resource statistics.

1) Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display

the Resource Statistics tab.

2) In the left pane of the Resource Statistics tab, select Resource

Statistics→Physical Resource Statistics→Custom Statistics.

3) (Optional) If the default statistics template ONU Port Business List

cannot meet the requirement, you can customize a statistics template.

a) Click Custom to open the Custom Template dialog box.

b) Click Create to display the Create Template dialog box.

Version: A 443
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

c) In the Create Template dialog box, set the template name, select
required statistics items, and click OK.

d) In the Custom Template dialog box, click Close.

4) Select a desired statistics template in the statistics template drop-down list.

Click Statistics Range to open the Select Object dialog box.

5) Select the desired resource object in the Select Object dialog box, and
click OK.

6) View the real-time statistics result in the right pane.

7) (Optional) In the statistics result, select the desired entry(ies), right-click to

select Export→Export All Records / Export Selected Record from the
shortcut menu to export a custom statistics report.

u Customize a resource statistics export task.

1) Select Resource→Resource Statistics from the main menu to display

the Resource Statistics tab.

444 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

2) In the left pane of the Resource Statistics tab, select Export Statistics→
Physical Resource Statistics Export→Custom Statistics Export.

3) In the right pane, click Create to open the Create Custom Statistics
Export dialog box.

4) Set the related parameters in the Create Custom Statistics Export dialog
box referring to the table below. Then click OK.

Table 9-9 Setting of Creating a Custom Statistics Export Task

Parameter Description

Task name Name of the custom statistics export task.

Status of the task. It is selected by default.

Enable u Select: Enable the task.
u Deselect: Disable the task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u One time: The task is executed immediately after it
takes effect.
Execution u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 365.
CycleNote 1 u Every week: Select the effective days in every
Basic
week.
information
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every
month.
Execution time of a periodic task.
Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic statistics task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

End time of a periodic statistics task. It is valid after

End time being selected.
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Sets whether new NEs are added to the statistics task

automatically.
u Gather statistics of all NEs in the logical domain
(new NEs are added to the statistics task
Statistics Policy
Object Source automatically)
u Gather statistics of NEs and objects on them (new
NEs are not added to the statistics task
automatically)

Statistical Object Customized based on the statistics policy

Extend Select an XFTP server from the drop-down list.

XFTP Server
information Statistics reports are exported to this server.

Version: A 445
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 9-9 Setting of Creating a Custom Statistics Export Task (Continued)

Parameter Description

Statistical Select an existing statistical template from the drop-

Template down list.
Select XML / CSV from the drop-down list as the type of
File Type
exported files.

Note 1: When One time is selected for execution cycle, Execution Time / Start Time / End
Time will be automatically hidden on the Basic Information tab.

5) (Optional) After the task is executed successfully, you can open the
statistics report via the shortcut menu in the task details pane, or access
the XFTP server to view the exported custom statistics report.

9.7 OLT Resource Statistics Report

You can gather statistics of OLT comprehensive resources and export

corresponding reports through creating policy tasks with custom statistics items in
the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The XFTP server is configured.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Statistics Export Task→OLT Comprehensive Resource Statistics

Export Task in the left pane to view existing export tasks of OLT
comprehensive resource statistics.

3. In the right pane, click Create to open the Create OLT Comprehensive
Resource Statistics Export Task dialog box.

4. Set the related parameters in the Create OLT Comprehensive Resource

Statistics Export Task dialog box referring to the table below. Then click OK.

446 Version: A
 9 Resource Statistics Management

Table 9-10 Settings of Creating an OLT Comprehensive Resource Statistics Export Task

Parameter Description

Task name Name of the custom statistics export task.

Status of the task. It is selected by default.

Enable u Select: Enable the scheduled task.
u Deselect: Disable the scheduled task.
Execution cycle of the task.
u One time: The task is executed immediately after it
takes effect.
Execution u Every (day): Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 365.
CycleNote 1 u Every week: Select the effective days in every
Basic
week.
information
u Every month: Select the effective dates in every
month.
Execution time of a periodic task.
Execution time
Input format: hh:mm:ss

Start time of a periodic statistics task.

Start time
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

End time of a periodic statistics task. It is valid after

End time being selected.
Input format: yyyy-mm-dd hh:mm:ss

Object Source Statistical Object Customized based on the statistics policy

Select an XFTP server from the drop-down list.

XFTP Server
Statistics reports are exported to this server.

Select XML / CSV from the drop-down list as the type of

File Type
exported files.

u When All Statistics is selected, all comprehensive

Extend
resource statistics items related to OLT are
information
selected by default.
Statistics Item u When Customize Select is selected, you can
select desired statistics items as needed in addition
to the mandatory statistics items Logic Address,
NE Name, NE IP, NE Type and Shelf.

Note 1: When One time is selected for execution cycle, Execution Time / Start Time / End
Time will be automatically hidden on the Basic Information tab.

5. (Optional) After the task is executed successfully, you can access the XFTP
server to view the exported OLT comprehensive resource statistics report.

Version: A 447
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operation

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

448 Version: A
10 Resource Management

Resource management enables you to manage all physical resources and logical
resources in the network. The UNM2000 provides overall resource management,
which helps you understand the usage of all resources in the network timely.

Modifying Object Names in a Batch Manner

Modifying ONU Names by Importing EXCEL

Importing the ODN NSM Information

ONU Query Management

Querying the MDU Phone Number

Querying Cards By Serial Number

Querying ONU RMS Error Information

Querying the ONU Network Access Interception Logs

Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner

Configuring the Gateway Type

Checking the List of Registered ONUs

Unauthorized ONU List

Managing Customized Attributes

Version: A 449
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

10.1 Modifying Object Names in a Batch Manner

The UNM2000 supports modifying object names in a batch manner. Supported

object types include logical domain, NE, card port and ONU.

10.1.1 Modifying Logical Domain Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify logical domain names in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u New logical domain names are planned.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to

open the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select Logical Domain in the left pane to query logical domains.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired logical domains. Click OK to display the
query result.

3. Modify the logical domain names in a batch manner by either of the following
ways.

4 Modify the logical domain names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000

screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new logical
domain names one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

450 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

4 Modify the logical domain names in a batch manner by importing an Excel

file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE

entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

d) Click Open File, enter the new logical domain names one by one in
the Modify Name column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up

the Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is

successful. Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.1.2 Modifying NE Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify NE names in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 451
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u New NE names are planned and unique in the entire network.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to

open the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select NE in the left pane to query NEs.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired NEs. Click OK to display the query result.

3. Modify the NE names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

4 Modify the NE names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000 screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new NE

names one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the NE names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE

entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, and click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

d) Click Open File, enter the new NE names one by one in the Modify
Name column, and save the Excel file.

452 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up

the Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is

successful. Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.1.3 Modifying Port Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify port names in a batch manner.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u New port names are planned.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to

open the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select Board Pon in the left pane to query card ports of a specified NE.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired NEs. Click OK to display the query result.

3. Modify the port names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

4 Modify the port names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000 screen.

Version: A 453
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new port
names one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the port names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE

entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

c) Select the storage path, and click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

d) Click Open File, enter the new port names one by one in the Modify
Name column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up

the Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is

successful. Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.1.4 Modifying ONU Names in a Batch Manner

This section introduces how to modify ONU names in a batch manner.

454 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The object to be modified cannot be empty.

u The ONU names are planned.

Precautions

The file to be imported / exported must be in .xls format.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Batch Modifying Object Names from the main menu to

open the Batch Modifying Object Names tab.

2. Select ONU in the left pane to query ONUs.

1) Click Query to display the Set Object Query Conditions dialog box.

2) Search and select the desired NEs. Click OK to display the query result.

3. Modify the ONU names in a batch manner by either of the following ways.

4 Modify the ONU names in a batch manner directly in a UNM2000 screen.

a) Double-click cells in the Modify Name column and enter new ONU
names one by one.

b) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

4 Modify the ONU names in a batch manner by importing an Excel file.

a) Click Excel Export to bring up the Is all rows exported? alert box.

b) Click Yes or No to bring up the Save dialog box.

• In the query result pane, if you do not select any NE entry,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to cancel exporting NE entries.

• In the query result pane, if you have selected one or more NE

entries,

• click Yes to export all entries.

• click No to export the selected entry (entries).

Version: A 455
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

c) Select the storage path, click Save to bring up the Tip dialog box.

d) Click Open File, enter the new ONU names one by one in the Modify
Name column, and save the Excel file.

Note:
Columns marked by * of the table cannot be modified.

e) Go back to the UNM2000 screen, and click Excel Import to bring up

the Open dialog box.

f) Select the edited Excel worksheet and click Open.

g) A Message dialog box appears to tell you that the importing is

successful. Click OK.

h) Click Save to complete the batch modification.

10.2 Modifying ONU Names by Importing EXCEL

You can modify the ONU name by importing into Excel, improving the configuration
efficiency.

Prerequisite

u The ONU name has been planned.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Modify ONU Names by Importing EXCEL in the main

menu.

2. Click Open File to bring up the Import Data dialog box.

3. Click Download Template to save the Excel template into the designated
directory on the UNM2000 client end.

4. Enter the planned information in the Excel and save it.

5. Click View File to open the Save dialog box.

6. Select the configured Excel file and click Save.

456 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

7. Click Confirm to import the data into the UNM2000.

10.3 Importing the ODN NSM Information

Manual creation of ODN view is inefficient and may cause errors. By importing the
ODN NMS information, you can quickly establish the ODN network view. After the
information is imported, the relationship among NEs (OLT PON port, splitter and
ONU) is displayed in the topology. This improves the operation and maintenance
efficiency.

Background Information

The ODN provides optical transmission channel between the OLT and ONU.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Import ODN NSM Information from the main menu.

2. Click Open File in the lower right corner to bring up the Import Data dialog
box.

Version: A 457
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Click Download Template to save the ODN imported information template to

the local computer and then complete the information according the actual
project requirement.

Note:

The items marked with * in the template file are required. Please enter the
items correctly; otherwise, the file may be failed to be imported.

4. Click Browse File, select the ODN information file preset and click OK to
import the data.

10.4 ONU Query Management

By querying the system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU,
you can quickly acquaint yourself with the distribution of the ONU.

10.4.1 Querying ONUs

With the ONU query function, you can find the desired ONU quickly and view the
system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU.

The UNM2000 supports querying the ONU by different ONU attributes. It also
supports fuzzy query and complete match. The ONU query conditions fall into two
parts:

u Common query conditions: Include the logical domain, device type, ONU PON
type, device name, friendly name, logical ID, physical address, OLT IP address,
management IP address, and voice service and data service of the ONU.

u Advanced query conditions: Include the slot number, ONU number, ONU
password, logical SN password, optical splitter number, optical splitter port
number, ONU identifier, ONU user information and ONU service type.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

458 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Set the query conditions in the Set ONU Query Conditions dialog box.

3. After completing the settings, click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs
meeting the query conditions.

4. On the Query ONU tab, select one or more entries and click Service
Configuration at the lower-right corner to go to the NE Manager window. Then
you can query the service configuration information of the ONU.

Subsequent Operation

Right-click an ONU, select Service Configuration or Locate to ONU List from the
shortcut menu.

10.4.2 Querying ONUs in a Batch Manner

You can query ONU information in a batch manner by importing an ONU identifier
template. And you can handle the query result, including de-authorization and
shielding alarms, in a batch manner.

Procedure

1. On the main menu, select Resource→Batch Query ONU to open the Set
Query Condition dialog box.

2. Select an ONU identifier type and import a query template.

1) Select an ONU identifier type.

Version: A 459
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

ONU identifiers are grouped into three categories: physical identifier,

logical identifier and password. You can select one of them as needed.

2) Click Download Example Template to download the specified ONU

identifier template to the local host.

3) Enter the ONU identifier to be queried in the template by referring to the

following table. Save the template file.

ONU Identifier
Data Length (Byte) Value Range
Type

u For a MAC address, the value ranges from 0

to 9 or from a to f.
u For a physical SN, the first four digits are an
physical address 12
ASCII character string (case-sensitive) and
the last 8 digits range from 0 to 9 or from a
to f (lower-case letters).

It cannot begin or end with the following

characters:
u Special characters from NULL to / (0x00 to
logical identifier 24
0x2f).
u Punctuation marks such as ;, : and ?.
u The @ sign (0x40) and DEL (0x7f).

password 10 No limit

4) Click Import Template to view the result of importing.

460 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

3. Click OK in the Set Query Condition dialog box.

4. View the query result on the Batch Query ONU tab.

Related Operation

u ONU deauthorization

1) Select one or more ONU entries, right-click them and select ONU
Deauthorization from the shortcut menu. For specific operations, see
Deauthorizing ONUs.

u ONU alarms shielding

1) Select one or more ONU entries, right-click them and select Alarm shield
from the shortcut menu. For specific operations, see Setting Alarm Filter
Rules.

10.4.3 Viewing the ONU List

You can view the ONU details and configure the ONUs.

Procedure

1. In the main menu of the NE Manager GUI, select Configuration→ONU List, or

right-click an NE in the left browsing tree of the main topology and select ONU
List from the shortcut menu to open the ONU List tab.

Version: A 461
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. You can perform the following operations as required.

Note:

The following uses Port Service Config, Service Configuration and

View Details as an example to introduce how to perform the operations.

4 Port service configuration

On the ONU List tab, select a port and click Port Service Config to view
the port type of the ONU service and the number of ports of different types.

4 Service Configuration

462 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

On the ONU List tab, select a port and click Service Configuration to
access the designated ONU service configuration tab and perform the
service configuration of the ONU.

Note:

Right-click the designated configuration option in the Operational Tree

and select Favorite from the shortcut menu to save this option in the
favorite folder, so that the user can find it quickly next time. Select Cancel
Favorite to remove this option from the favorite folder.

4 Viewing Details

Click View Details to view the detailed information of the specified ONU,
including ONU Port Panel, ONU Information, ONU Service Information,
Port Status Information, ONU MAC address, ONU Callback
Information, QINQ Domain Attach Information, Under ONU and Parent
ONU.

Version: A 463
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

10.4.4 ONU Query Example

With the ONU query function, you can find the desired ONU quickly and view the
system, slot number, PON port number and logical ID of the ONU.

Background

The UNM2000 supports querying ONUs by different ONU attributes. It supports

both fuzzy match and complete match. The ONU query conditions fall into two parts:

u General query conditions:Include the logical domain, device type, ONU PON
type, device name, friendly name, logical ID, physical address, OLT IP address,
management IP address, and voice service and data service of the ONU.

u Advanced query conditions:Include slot No., ONU No., ONU password, logical
SN password, optical splitter No., optical splitter port No., ONU label, ONU user
information and ONU service class.

The following introduces how to perform the ONU query via setting different query
conditions:

Querying the ONU Object by MAC Address

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Enter the MAC address of the ONU in the Physical Address field.

3. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the MAC address.

464 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Querying the ONU by ONU Data Service

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Enter the IP address of the OLT in the OLT IP field.

3. Set Service Condition to Data and specify the values of CVLAN ID and
SVLAN ID.

4. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the set conditions.

Querying the ONU by ONU Location

1. Select Resource→Query ONU from the main menu.

2. Select the logical domain where the desired ONU resides from the drop-down
list on the right of Logical Domain.

3. Click the Advanced tab in the Set ONU Query Conditions dialog box.

4. Specify Slot Number and ONU Number in the Advanced tab.

5. Click OK. The Query ONU tab displays the ONUs matching the set conditions.

10.5 Querying the MDU Phone Number

With the Query MDU Phone Number function, you can navigate to the
corresponding card and port according to the telephone number of the port. At
present, this function only supports querying the SIP voice port of the AN5006-20
and AN5006-30.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query MDU Phone Number from the UNM2000 main

menu.

2. In the Set Query Conditions dialog box, enter the Phone Number.

Version: A 465
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

u If you select Full Field Matching, enter a complete phone number.

u If you deselect Full Field Matching, fuzzy query is supported.

3. Click OK. The Query MDU Phone Number tab displays the query result.

10.6 Querying Cards By Serial Number

You can query the name and management IP of the OLT where the card belongs
and the slot number where the card locates according to the serial number of the
card. The query range can be all the OLT devices in the network.

Prerequisite

The serial number of the card is obtained.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Query Board by Serial Number from the UNM2000 main

menu.

2. In the Set Query Conditions dialog box, enter the serial number of the card
and select one or more OLT device(s).

466 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Note:

u If you select Full Field Matching, enter a complete serial number of

the card.

u If you deselect Full Field Matching, fuzzy query is supported.

3. Click OK. The Query Board by Serial Number tab displays the query result.

10.7 Querying ONU RMS Error Information

You can filer and query the failure information of the ONU RMS and print / export the
content in the failure information table.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→ONU RMS Error

Information Query to open the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog
box.

2. In the Query ONU RMS Error Information dialog box, set Basic Information
and Advanced Information.

3. Click OK. The ONU RMS Error Information tab displays the failure details.

Version: A 467
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the ONU RMS Error Information tab, right-click an entry and select Print or
Export.

10.8 Querying the ONU Network Access

Interception Logs

You can query the ONU network access interception logs through the UNM2000
and print / export the log content.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→ONU Network Intercept Log

Query to open the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box.

2. In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query dialog box, set Basic Information
and Advanced Information.

3. Click OK. The ONU Network Intercept Log Query tab displays the log
information.

Other Operations

In the ONU Network Intercept Log Query tab, right-click an entry and select Print
or Export.

10.9 Importing GIS Data in a Batch Manner

You can modify the coordinate of an NE by importing into Excel, improving the
configuration efficiency.

Prerequisite

u You have obtained the NE coordinate data.

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

468 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Procedure

1. Select Resource→GIS Batch Import from the main menu.

2. Click Download Template to save the Excel template into the designated
directory on the UNM2000 client end.

3. Enter the Longitude and Latitude of the NE in the Excel and save it.

4. Click Import to bring up the Open dialog box.

5. Select the saved Excel file and click Open.

6. Click OK to import the data into the UNM2000.

10.10 Configuring the Gateway Type

You can configure the gateway types, actual models and manufacturer names of
ONU devices of different manufacturers through the UNM2000 so that the gateway
types of the ONU devices can be identified when the resource management system
delivers the network access configuration of enterprise gateway.

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. On the UNM2000 main menu, select Resource→Gateway Type Config to

open the Gateway Type Config dialog box.

2. In the Gateway Type Config dialog box, click Add to open the Add dialog box.

3. In the Add dialog box, enter the ONU Vendor and ONU Realno and select the
gateway type.

4. Click Yes to save the gateway type configuration into the database.

10.11 Checking the List of Registered ONUs

You can export data of abnormal ONUs to a specified directory and apply for
registration of those ONUs again. This improves the troubleshooting efficiency.

Version: A 469
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Onu Online Check Task from the functional tree on the left to open the
Onu Online Check Task dialog box.

3. Click Create to open the Create Onu Online Check Task dialog box and set
the parameters.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

1) Set Basic information, including Task name (required), Enable (select or

clear the check box), Execution Cycle, Execution time, Start time and End
time.

470 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

2) Set Object source by selecting the object to be checked.

Version: A 471
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3) Set Extend information by selecting a path to export the data to be

checked.

472 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

4. Click Create and Continue to continue to create the next task.

5. Click OK to complete creating the current task and close the Create Onu
Online Check Task dialog box.

10.12 Unauthorized ONU List

You can obtain the information of all unauthorized ONUs under one or more OLT
devices through the UNM2000. The information of unauthorized ONUs includes
system IP address, slot number, PON port number, ONU type, physical address,
physical password, logical ID and logical password.

Version: A 473
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Unauthorized ONU List from the main menu to open the
Select NE dialog box.

2. In the Select NE dialog box, select the object.

3. Click OK to query the unauthorized ONU list.

10.13 Managing Customized Attributes

You can set the custom attributes of the NE, PON port and ONU. The custom
attributes of the NE can be used to define the hot-spot regions and the carried
service.

Procedure

1. Select Resource→Custom Attributes Management in the main menu.

2. Add custom attribute:

474 Version: A
 10 Resource Management

Note:

Three attributes of NEs, PON ports and ONUs can be customized..

1. Select NE Custom Attribute / PON Custom Attribute / ONU Custom

Attribute in the drop-down list at the left side of the Custom Attributes
Management tab.

Note:

The following describe the configuration method taking the NE Custom

Attribute as an example.

2. Modify the attribute name: right-click an attribute name in the browsing tree
below, select Modify Property Name and set the new attribute in the
Modify Custom Attribute Name dialog box. Click OK.

3. Right-click an attribute name, and select Create Property Value from the
shortcut menu.

4. Set Property Value and Select Object in the Create Property Value
dialog box, and click OK.

Version: A 475
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

You can set up to three hot-spot regions for a single NE.

Related Operation

View the customized attributes:

1. Right-click an NE in the main topology and select Attribute from the shortcut
menu.

2. In the Attribute Page pane, view or modify the customized attribute values.

476 Version: A
11 Managing the Operation
Maintenance

Using the Network Management Tool

Managing Configuration Backup Tasks

Managing Upgrade Tasks

Managing Data Synchronization Tasks

Managing Test Tasks

Managing Deployment Tasks

Automatic Inspection

PON Traffic Analysis

Failure Isolation

Managing Device Users

Version: A 477
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.1 Using the Network Management Tool

You can rapidly log in to the Network Management Tool through the entrance on the
UNM2000 GUI to perform process management, resource management, data
history management, query of network management operation logs, system warning
setting, and import/export of network management configuration for the UNM2000
system.

11.1.1 Basic Operations

The following describes basic operations of the network management tool, including
logging in, logging out, switching the displayed language, changing a password, and
resetting the password of the query user.

Prerequisite

Note:

Only the "Admin" user and the users belonging to the "Security
Administrator Group" can operate the network management tool. For
other users, the menus of the Network Management Tool are greyed
out.
The "Admin" user and the users belonging to the "Security Administrator
Group" can assign the Network Management Tool operation privileges
to other users.

u The UNMCMService and UNMCMAgent services are started on the UNM2000

server.

u The UNM2000 client is connected to the server.

u Only one Admin user is allowed to log into the network management tool at a
time.

478 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Login

1. Log into the UNM2000 client. Select System→NMS Management Tool from
the main menu to display the login window.

2. Type the username and password according to Table 11-1, and click Login.

Note:

When a user's login attempts reach three times, the system will prompt
the user and lock the user for one minute.

Table 11-1 Default Account Information

User Type Username Password

Admin user Admin Admin
Query user Query Query

Switching Display Languages

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner
of the main GUI.

2. Select Chinese or English from the drop-down menu.

Version: A 479
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Modifying the Password

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner
of the main GUI.

2. Select modify password from the drop-down list box to open the modify
password dialog box.

3. Enter the old password and new password and click OK.

4. On the system prompt GUI, click OK.

Resetting the Password of the Query User

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner
of the main GUI.

2. Select reset Query user password from the drop-down menu to open the
reset Query user password dialog box.

3. Enter your current login password and click OK.

4. When the system prompts reset Query password success, click OK.

Logout

1. Click the drop-down button of the icon at the upper right corner
of the main GUI.

2. Click logoff from the drop-down menu.

11.1.2 Managing Processes

The Process GUI displays the UNM2000 process information in lists. When users of
different types log into the NMS Management Tool, the operation GUI and operation
items displayed are different.

The Process Window

u Managing a User

480 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

u Querying a User

Version: A 481
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Process Management

User Type Operation Item Procedure

Start Select a service in the disabled state and click start.
select a service in the enabled or initialized state,
Stop
and click stop.

Restart Select the desired service and click restart.

Start NMS Click start all to start all NMS services.
Admin User Stop NMS Click stop all to stop all NMS services.

Restart NMS Click restart all to restart all NMS services.

Select a service and click the One-click Export of
Export Dump / Log Dump/Log button to manually generate the dump /
with One Click log of the service and export it to the specified FTP
server.
Click Refresh to display the latest service state and
Refresh
process details.

Filter by state Click in the status column and select the desired
status type.
Admin user /
query user Filter by Startup Click in the startup mode column and select the
Mode desired startup mode.

Query details Click in the service column to view the

details of the specified process.

11.1.3 Managing Resources

You can view the resource usage of the operating system, UNM2000 system and
database in the Resource window. The administrator and query user have the
same management authority.

The Resource Management Window

482 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Managing Resources

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Click the Operation System tab to view the

View resource usage CPU, memory and disk usage of the host where

of the OS the operating system is installed.

2. Click to view the usage of the disk.

Admin user / Click the Network Management System tab to view
View resource usage
query user the CPU usage, memory usage and handle quantity
of the NMS
of the NMS service.
View resource usage Click the Database tab to view the total space, used
of the database space and use rate of databases.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the latest resource usage.

11.1.4 Managing History Data

You can set search conditions and filter conditions to query history data of
Operation System, Network Management System, and Database. The
UNM2000 can display the history data and query results in curve graphs. The
administrator and query user have the same management authority.

Version: A 483
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

History Data Management GUI

Managing History Data

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Click the Operation System tab.
2. Select the query time range from the time range
Query history data of drop-down list box.
the operating system. 3. Select a server from the server drop-down list
box.
4. Click Query.
Admin user /
1. Click the Network Management System tab.
query user
2. Select the query time range from the time range
Query history data of drop-down list box.
the network 3. Select the service name (no more than three
management system. items can be selected once) from the service
drop-down list box.
4. Click Query.

484 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Click the Database tab.
2. Select the query time range from the time range
drop-down list box.
Query history data of
3. Select the database name (no more than three
the database.
items can be selected once) from the Database
drop-down list box.
4. Click Query.

Zoom in the curve Press and hold the cursor to frame a specified area
graph. on the curve graph.

Reset the curve Click reset to restore the curve graph to the default
graph. size.

11.1.5 Managing Logs

You can set search conditions and filter conditions to query operation logs of users
who log in to the system through the Network Management Tool. The administrator
and query user have the same management authority.

Log Management GUI

Managing Logs

User Type Operation Item Procedure

1. Select the query time range from the time range
drop-down list box.
Admin user / Query logs.
2. Click refresh to display logs within the specified
query user
time range.

Refresh Click Refresh to display the latest logs.

Version: A 485
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.1.6 Setting Management Parameters

The UNM2000 supports setting the threshold-crossing alarm levels and alarm clear
thresholds of CPU occupation ratio / memory occupation ratio / disk utilization
ratio of the operation system, CPU occupation ratio / memory occupation ratio
of the UNM2000 and database space utilization ratio / log space utilization
ratio using the management tool.

Procedure

1. In the Network Management Tool, click Settings.

2. Click behind each alarm threshold to change it to .

3. You can set the following threshold-crossing alarm levels and alarm clear
thresholds in the Settings GUI.

4 Operation system alarm thresholds: CPU occupation ratio, memory

occupation ratio and disk utilization ratio.

4 UNM2000 alarm thresholds: CPU occupation ratio and memory

occupation ratio.

4 Database alarm thresholds: database space utilization ratio and log space
utilization ratio.

486 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. Set the data saving time and click Save.

Version: A 487
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Management Parameter Settings

User Type Operation Item Procedure

Set the alarm In the alarm threshold text box, enter an integer
threshold. ranging from 20 to 99, and click Save.

Set the data saving In the data saving time text box, enter an integer
Admin User
time. ranging from 1 to 90, and click Save.

Click Reset to restore all parameters to the default

Set the resetting.
values.
Query parameter
On the main GUI of the NMS Management Tool, click
Query user settings of the NMS
Settings.
Management Tool.

11.1.7 Importing / Exporting the Configuration File

By the network management tool, you can import / export configuration files to
synchronize or back up device configurations.

11.1.7.1 Setting the Timer

This section introduces how to set the timer in the network management tool.

1. In the network management tool, click import / export from the main menu to
open the import / export GUI.

2. Click set timer to open the following GUI.

488 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Set timer parameters by referring to the following table.

Item Setting

Interval time The format is 1–364 day(s).

Yes
Enable timer Execution time The format is [0–23] h [0–59] min.

No - -

4. Click OK.

11.1.7.2 Setting a Backup Server

This section introduces how to set a backup server.

Prerequisite

You have logged into the UNM Management Tool as an administrator.

Procedure

1. In the UNM Management Tool, click Import / Export from the main menu to
open the Import / Export window.

2. Click set backup server to open the following window.

Version: A 489
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set parameters of the backup server referring to the following table.

Parameter Description

Export file name Enter a custom file name.

Enter the path where backup files are saved on the
Local backup
UNM2000 server. The default path is
folder
Local D:/UNM2000/emsback on the UNM2000 server.
backup Maximum
number of local Enter an integer ranging from 1 to 50.
backup file
Backup
XFTP IP
type Enter the IP address of the XFTP server.
address
Protocol type Select FTP or SFTP as needed.
FTP
Enter the communication port between the XFTP
backup Port
server and the UNM2000 server.
FTP username Enter the user name for XFTP server login.

FTP password Enter the password for XFTP server login.

4. Click OK. An alert box appears, prompting successful saving.

5. Click OK to go back to the Import / Export window.

490 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.1.7.3 Exporting Dump or Log Files by One Click

This section introduces how to export dump or log files to the specified XFTP server
by one click.

Prerequisite

u You have logged into the UNM Management Tool as an administrator.

u You have set the backup server.

Procedure

1. In the UNM Management Tool, click Import / Export from the main menu to
open the Import / Export window.

2. Click one-click export of dump/log to open the following window.

Version: A 491
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the parameters for exporting dump or log files referring to the following
table.

Parameter Description

Export the file

Basic Select Dump File or Log File as needed.
type manually
parameter
Export the
settings
switch Enables or disables automatic export as needed.
automatically

XFTP IP
Enter the IP address of the XFTP server.
address
XFTP server Protocol type Select FTP or SFTP as needed.
parameter
Enter the communication port between the XFTP server
settings Port
and the UNM2000 server.
FTP username Enter the user name for XFTP server login.

FTP password Enter the password for XFTP server login.

4. Click OK. An alert box appears, prompting successful saving.

5. Click OK to go back to the Import / Export window.

Other Operations

u Click test to test whether the XFTP server can be connected normally.

u Click export history Dump/Log file to manually export historical dump or log
files to the specified XFTP server.

11.1.7.4 Importing Configuration Data

This section introduces how to import configuration files in the network management
tool.

492 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

1. In the network management tool, click import / export.

2. Click import to open the parameter settings window.

Caution:
Before importing a configuration file, close all the network management
services.

3. Select local backup or FTP backup from the drop-down list of import type.

4. Select the configuration file to be imported in import file.

5. Click OK.

11.1.7.5 Exporting the Configuration File

This section introduces how to export configuration files in the network management
tool.

Version: A 493
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

1. In the network management tool, click import / export.

2. Click export to open the following GUI.

3. Enter the description information of the configuration file in the file description
text box.

4. Click OK.

11.2 Managing Configuration Backup Tasks

To ensure security of the NE data, you can back up the NE data so that you can
restore the data when the severe failure occurs in the network. You can manage the
configuration backup tasks, including managing software backup tasks and
configuration export tasks.

11.2.1 Managing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view, create and execute the software backup tasks.

11.2.1.1 Viewing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view software backup tasks.

494 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task in the left pane to

view the existing software backup tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.2.1.2 Creating Software Backup Tasks

If the existing software backup task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can
create new tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Software Backup Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Version: A 495
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.1.3 Executing Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to execute software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Software Backup Task in the left pane to

view the existing software backup tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the
software backup task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the
software backup task.

11.2.2 Managing Configuration Export Tasks

This section introduces how to view the data export task information, and how to
create a new task and execute operations.

496 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.2.2.1 Viewing Configuration Export Tasks

By viewing configuration export tasks, you can confirm whether the exported data
need to be saved externally.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task in the left pane to

view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.2.2.2 Creating a Configuration Export Task

If the existing configuration export task fails to meet the backup requirement, you
can create new configuration export tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 497
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Configuration Export Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.2.3 Executing Configuration Export Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the configuration export tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Configuration Export Task in the left pane to

view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether
the configuration export task meets the requirements.

498 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the
configuration.

11.2.3 Managing Card Software Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to view, create and execute the card software backup
tasks.

11.2.3.1 Viewing Card Software Batch Backup Tasks

By viewing the card software backup tasks, you can confirm whether it is necessary
to add or delete card software backup tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the

left pane to view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

Version: A 499
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.2.3.2 Creating Card Software Batch Backup Tasks

If the existing card software backup task fails to meet the backup requirement, you
can create new tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the

left pane.

3. In the right pane, click Create to open the Create Board Software Batch
Backup Task dialog box.

4. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.3.3 Executing Card Software Batch Backup Tasks

The following introduces how to execute the card software batch backup tasks.

500 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→Board Software Batch Backup Task in the

left pane to view the existing tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration export
task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the
configuration.

11.2.4 Managing MAC Address Table Export Tasks

The MAC address table export task support exporting the MAC address table of the
PON port or OLT, which can be set by the MAC address type. The following mainly
introduces how to view, create and execute the MAC address table export tasks.

11.2.4.1 Viewing MAC Address Table Export Tasks

By viewing the MAC address table export tasks, you can confirm whether it is
needed to add or delete MAC address table export tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Version: A 501
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left

pane to view the existing configuration export tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Attribute to view the MAC
address type of the task.

11.2.4.2 Adding an Export Task of MAC Address Table

If the existing task fails to meet the backup requirement, you can create new MAC
address table export tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left

pane.

502 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Click Create in the right pane to open the dialog box.

4. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

5. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.2.4.3 Executing MAC Address Table Export Tasks

The following introduces how to execute MAC address table export tasks.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The service for transmitting files between the client and the server is running
normally.

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Configuration Backup→MAC Address Table Export Task in the left

pane to view the existing tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether
the configuration export task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to export the
configuration.

Version: A 503
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.3 Managing Upgrade Tasks

You can create tasks for the upgrade operations required for OLT system cards
(system cards, service cards, TDM cards, voice cards and OLT firmware) and the
ONU system software and firmware so as to implement automatic upgrade.

Caution:

The upgrade of NE software is risky, which may cause interruption of NE

services. Please upgrade the NE software in strict accordance with the
published upgrade guide of the corresponding NE. It is recommended to
contact the FiberHome Technical Engineer for NE software upgrade.

11.3.1 Managing System Software Upgrade Tasks

You can create the system software upgrade task to upgrade the system software of
multiple objects. By selecting the file type of the object source, you can upgrade the
core switch card, IDM software, voice interface card, OLT firmware, time card
software and OTDR card. The following introduces how to view, create and execute
the upgrade task of the system software.

11.3.1.1 Viewing System Software Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to

view the existing system software upgrade tasks.

504 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.1.2 Creating System Software Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the
right pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the upgrade requirement, and click OK. The new
task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Version: A 505
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.3.1.3 Executing System Software Upgrade Tasks

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks with Execution Cycle set to One
time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click
Execute Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→System Software Upgrade Task in the left pane to

view the existing system software upgrade tasks.

3. Right-click a task that meets the system software upgrade requirement and
select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the system
software upgrade task.

11.3.2 Managing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

You can select different object sources in the ONU batch upgrade task to upgrade
the CPU / IAD software and firmware of the ONU in a batch manner.

506 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.3.2.1 Viewing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing ONU batch upgrade tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.2.2 Creating ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

Version: A 507
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the upgrade task requirement, and click OK. The
new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.2.3 Executing ONU Batch Upgrade Tasks

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks with Execution Cycle set to One
time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click
Execute Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→ONU Batch Upgrade Task in the left pane to view the
existing ONU batch upgrade tasks.

3. Right-click a task that meets the ONU batch upgrade requirement and select
Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click Execute
Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the ONU batch upgrade
task.

508 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.3.3 Managing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

You can upgrade the service cards of multiple objects in a batch manner via the task
of upgrading the service cards in a batch manner.

11.3.3.1 Viewing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left
pane to view the existing upgrade task of the service card.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.3.2 Creating Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

Version: A 509
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Right-click Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left pane or right-
click in the right pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the
dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the service card upgrade task requirement, and
click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.3.3 Executing Service Card Batch Upgrade Tasks

This operation applies only to the upgrade tasks with Execution Cycle set to One
time.

Caution:

For the tasks that are automatically executed periodically, do not click
Execute Now. Wrong operation may interrupt services.

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Batch Upgrade Task of the Service Card in the left
pane to view the existing upgrade task of the service card.

3. Right-click a task that meets the batch upgrade requirements for service cards
and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click

510 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the batch upgrade
task for service cards.

11.3.4 Managing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

You can upgrade cards and ONUs in a batch manner using the whole package
upgrade task.

11.3.4.1 Viewing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Whole Package Upgrade Task in the left pane to view
the existing whole package upgrade tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.3.4.2 Creating Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

Version: A 511
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Whole Package Upgrade Task in the left pane or right-click in the
right pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs according to the whole package upgrade task requirement,
and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.3.4.3 Executing Whole Package Upgrade Tasks

Prerequisite

u The FTP server is configured. See Setting the XFTP Server.

u The upgrade package has been saved in the FTP server directory.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Upgrade Task→Whole Package Upgrade Task in the left pane to view
the existing whole package upgrade tasks.

3. Right-click a task that meets the whole package upgrade requirement and
select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the whole package
upgrade task.

512 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.4 Managing Data Synchronization Tasks

Data synchronization indicates synchronizing the device data with the UNM2000
data. Managing the data synchronization tasks including managing the software /
hardware version upgrade tasks, configuration upload tasks and automatic
discovery of NEs.

11.4.1 Managing Software / Hardware Version Upgrade Tasks

The software and hardware version upgrade indicates upgrading the software and
hardware versions to the UNM2000 database.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Software&Hardware Version Update Task to

view the existing software and hardware version upgrade tasks.

3. Do as follows:

4 If the existing tasks can meet the requirements, right-click a task and
select Execute Now, or select the task and click Execute Now at the
lower right corner of the tab to execute the software / hardware version
upgrade task.

4 Right-click the task to Delete, or view / modify Attribute.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information, status and failure
reason of the task.

11.4.2 Managing Configuration Upload Tasks

Due to NE maintenance or upgrade / downgrade requirements, you can back up the

NE data to the UNM2000 server, client or the third-party FTP server to avoid
damage or loss of NE data caused by upgrade / downgrade or unexpected reason.

Version: A 513
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

The configuration upload tasks are used to synchronize the device configuration to
the UNM2000 database to ensure consistency of the UNM2000 data and the device
data.

11.4.2.1 Viewing Configuration Upload Tasks

By viewing the configuration upload tasks, you can confirm whether the time of
uploading the device configuration to the UNM2000 database and the execution
object meet the requirements for data synchronization.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Configure Upload Task in the left pane to

view the existing configuration upload tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

514 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.4.2.2 Creating a Configuration Upload Task

If the existing configuration upload task fails to meet the data synchronization
requirement, you can create new configuration upload tasks as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click Configure Upload Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information and Object source tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.4.2.3 Executing Configuration Upload Tasks

You can execute the configuration upload tasks to synchronize the device
configuration to the UNM2000 database so as to ensure security and correctness of
the UNM2000 data.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

Version: A 515
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Select Data Synchronization→Configure Upload Task in the left pane to

view the existing configuration upload tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the Object Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether
the configuration upload task meets the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or select a
task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the
configuration upload task.

11.4.3 Managing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

11.4.3.1 Viewing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

The NE automatic discovery function is used to search NEs automatically, based on

which you can create NEs in the UNM2000.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task in the left pane to view

the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

516 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.4.3.2 Creating NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

If the existing NE automatic discovery task does not meet the data synchronization
requirement, you can create new ones as required.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click Auto Detect NE Task in the left pane and select Create, or right-
click in the right pane and then select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information and Extend information tabs as
required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.4.3.3 Executing NE Automatic Discovery Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 517
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→Auto Detect NE Task in the left pane to view

the existing NE automatic discovery tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration upload
task meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the configuration
upload task.

11.4.4 Managing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

11.4.4.1 Viewing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane
to view the existing ONU port enabling rule tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View from the shortcut
menu to query the object information and status of the task.

518 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.4.4.2 Creating ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

If the existing rule task of enabling the ONU port does to meet the data
synchronization requirement, you can create new tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane and select Create, or
right-click in the right pane and then select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Version: A 519
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

4. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and status of the task.

11.4.4.3 Executing ONU Port Enabling Rule Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Select Data Synchronization→ONU Port Enable Rule Task in the left pane
to view the existing configuration upload tasks.

3. In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select View to query the Object
Info and Status of the task so as to confirm whether the configuration upload
task meet the requirements.

4. Right-click a task and select Execute Now, or select the task and click
Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to execute the configuration
upload task.

11.5 Managing Test Tasks

The test task includes the POTS port external / internal line task and the VoIP
pinging test task.

520 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.5.1 Managing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test

Tasks

Via the task of the POTS port internal / external line test, you can detect whether the
POTS port of the ONU is normal.

11.5.1.1 Viewing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Inspector Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→POTS Port Inter & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane to
view the current POTS port internal / external line test tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.5.1.2 Creating POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

Version: A 521
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

2. Right-click POTS Port Inner & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane or right-
click in the right pane and then select Create from the shortcut menu to open
the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.5.1.3 Executing POTS Port Internal / External Line Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Note:

The execution of the test task will influence the normal operation of
services and therefore it is recommended to execute the test task when
service traffic is at a relatively low volume.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→POTS Port Inter & Outer Line Test Task in the left pane to
view the current POTS port internal / external line test tasks.

3. Right-click the desired test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut
menu, or click the task and then click the Execute Now button at the bottom of
the tab to execute the POTS port internal / external line test task.

522 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.5.2 Managing VOIP PING Tasks

The VoIP PING task can be used to detect the MGC IP address corresponding to
the ONU, helping isolate failures.

11.5.2.1 Viewing Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→VOIP PING Task in the left pane to view the existing VOIP
PING tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.5.2.2 Creating VOIP PING Tasks

The VOIP PING test is used to check whether the network management system can
ping the IP address of the MGC related to the ONU. This function is used to isolate
the fault in failure detection.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 523
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Right-click VOIP PING Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and
select Create from the shortcut menu to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters on the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required. Table 11-2 describes Parameter Settings on
the Extend information tab. Then, click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Table 11-2 Description of VOIP PING Parameters

Parameter Description

-n Sends the ECHO data packets with the number specified by COUNT

-w The timeout interval, unit: ms

-l Sends the ECHO data packets with the assigned traffic

-i Sets the TTL field to the assigned value

-v Sets the TOS field to the assigned value

Assigns the number of routes to be passed through in the Recorded Route

-r
field
-s The time stamp of the hop number assigned by the COUNT

-t Pings the specified computer continuously

-a Resolutes the address into the NetBios name of the computer

If the Not-Section flag is transmitted in a packet, this packet will not be

-f
sectioned by the gateways at the route

-j Sets TTL to the given value

-k Uses the computer list assigned by "computer-list" to route the packet

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

524 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.5.2.3 Executing VOIP PING Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. Select Test Task→VOIP PING Task in the left pane to view the existing VOIP
PING tasks.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to
execute the VOIP PING test task.

11.5.3 Managing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

11.5.3.1 Viewing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select Test Task→HCU Discharge Test Task to view the
existing HCU automatic discharge test tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Version: A 525
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Other Operations

u In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute
Now, Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding
operation.

u Right-click any task selected at the previous step and select Test Data.

u View test result:

526 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

11.5.3.2 Creating HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click HCU Discharge Test Task in the left pane or right-click in the right
pane and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Version: A 527
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Other Operations

When the HCU automatic discharge test task does not meet the upgrade
requirements or is expired, you can right-click the task to delete / disable the task,
or view / modify the attribute.

11.5.3.3 Executing HCU Automatic Discharge Test Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. In the left pane, select Test Task→HCU Discharge Test Task to view the
existing HCU automatic discharge test tasks.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to
execute the HCU automatic discharge test tasks.

11.6 Managing Deployment Tasks

11.6.1 Managing Configuration Script Tasks

11.6.1.1 Viewing Configuration Script Tasks

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

528 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management from the main menu to open the
Policy Task Management tab.

2. In the left pane, select PreConfig Task→Config Script Task to view the
existing configuration script task.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the object information and execution status
of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.6.1.2 Creating Configuration Script Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. Right-click Config Script Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane
and select Create to open the dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

Version: A 529
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.6.1.3 Executing Configuration Script Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select System→Policy Task Management in the main menu to open the

Policy Task Management window.

2. In the left pane, select PreConfig Task→Config Script Task to view the
existing configuration script task.

3. Right-click a test task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu, or
select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to
execute the configuration script tasks.

11.7 Automatic Inspection

The UNM2000 supports the PON inspection management. You can set inspection
templates so as to inspect the OLT, MDU and EMS environments and output the
inspection results as charts. You can also export detailed inspection report.

11.7.1 Description of Inspection Items

This section introduces the meanings of inspection items in the automatic inspection
function provided by the UNM2000.

Description of OLT Inspection Items

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

When the card is not

present, check whether
OLT When the card is present,
the card is well Problem Level (Warning
Device it passes the check;
Check Card Status connected and try to re- by default): Warning,
Hardware otherwise, it fails the
insert the card. If it is still General or Severe
Status check.
not present, change the
slot or card.

530 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the card
temperature is lower
than the normal
value, check
whether the device
fan works normally.
If the card
temperature is too u Problem Level
low, insulation (Severe by default):
measures should be Warning, General or
If the card temperature is
taken. Severe
within the preset value
Check Card u If the card u Lower temperature
range, it passes the
Temperature temperature is threshold (15℃ by
check; otherwise, it fails
higher than the default)
the check.
normal value, check u Upper temperature
whether the device threshold (40℃ by
fan works normally. default)
If the card
temperature is too
high, the air-
conditioner should
be turned on to
reduce the indoor
temperature.

When the core switch

card's usage is higher
u Problem Level
If the core switch card's than the threshold, check
(Severe by default):
CPU usage is within the whether special
Warning, General or
Check the CPU preset value range, it operations are
Severe
Utilization of MCU passes the check; performed, whether the
u CPU usage
otherwise, it fails the protocol is normal and
threshold (70% by
check. whether any abnormal
default): 0-100
protocol package exists
in the network.
u Problem Level
If the core switch card's If the core switch card's
(Severe by default):
memory usage is within memory usage is higher
Warning, General or
Check the Memory the preset value range, it than the threshold, check
Severe
Utilization of MCU passes the check; whether the configuration
u CPU usage
otherwise, it fails the is normal and delete the
threshold (90% by
check. extra configuration.
default): 0-100

Version: A 531
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

Fan failure: First check

whether the power cable
If there are fan alarms, it of the fan is well
Problem Level (Severe
Equipment Fan fails the check; connected. If there is too
by default): Warning,
Check otherwise, it passes the much dust on the fan,
General or Severe
check. clean the dust. If the
failure still exists, replace
the fan.
u Problem Level
If the number of resetting (Severe by default):
times of the core switch If the number of resetting Warning, General or
card is within the preset times is too large, check Severe
value range over the the running status of the u Specified time
Check MCU Reset
specified time range, it card software and range: start time /
passes the check; contact the technical end time
otherwise, it fails the engineer. u Threshold of
check. resetting times (2 by
default)

u Problem Level
u If the environment (General by default):
If the environment humidity is too low, Warning, General or
humidity is within the take measures to Severe
Check
preset value range, it raise the humidity. u Lower humidity
Environmental
passes the check; u If the environment threshold (40% by
Humidity
otherwise, it fails the humidity is too high, default): 0-100.
check. take measures to u Upper humidity
reduce the humidity. threshold (65% by
default): 0-100.

u If the environment
temperature is too u Problem Level
low, take measures (Severe by default):
If the environment to raise the Warning, General or
temperature is within the temperature. Severe
Check the
preset value range, it u If the environment u Lower temperature
Environmental
passes the check; temperature is too threshold (15℃ by
Temperature
otherwise, it fails the high, the air- default)
check. conditioner should u Upper temperature
be turned on to threshold (25℃ by
reduce the indoor default)
temperature.

532 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u Problem Level
If the ONU out-of-service (Severe by default):
If the out-of-service time
Checking ONU time is within the value Warning, General or
exceeds the threshold,
with Long-term range, it passes the Severe
clear the corresponding
Exiting Service check; otherwise, it fails u Out-of-service
ONU to avoid junk data.
the check. duration threshold
(90 days by default)

u Problem Level
If the NE software version If the NE software
(Warning by default):
is in the list of allowed version is not in the list of
NE Software Warning, General or
versions, it passes the allowed versions, update
Version Check Severe
check; otherwise, it fails the device version to an
u List of allowed
the check. allowed one in the list.
versions
If the card software u Problem Level
If the card software
version is in the list of (Warning by default):
version is not in the list of
Check Card allowed versions, it Warning, General or
allowed versions, update
Software Version passes the check; Severe
the card version to an
otherwise, it fails the u List of allowed
allowed one in the list.
check. versions
u If the management
If the management status status is abnormal,
of the PON port check the protection
OLT
protection group is group configuration
Device Check PON Port Problem Level (General
abnormal or the of the PON port.
Software Protection Group by default): Warning,
operation status is u If the operation
Status Status General or Severe
abnormal, it fails the status is abnormal,
check; otherwise, it check the PON
passes the check. protection group
configuration.

u If the Telnet firewall

is not enabled,
enable the Telnet
If access control is firewall.
enabled for Telnet, SSH u If the SSH firewall is Problem Level (General
Check Firewall
and SNMP, it passes the not enabled, enable by default): Warning,
Open Status
check; otherwise, it fails the SSH firewall. General or Severe
the check. u If the SNMP firewall
is not enabled,
enable the SNMP
firewall.

Version: A 533
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u Problem level
If the patch version is in If the patch version is not
(Severe by default):
the list of allowed in the list of allowed
Warning, General or
Patch Legality versions, it passes the versions, update the
Severe
check; otherwise, it fails patch version to an
u List of allowed
the check. allowed one in the list.
versions
If the ONU software If the ONU software u Problem level
version is in the list of version is not in the list of (Warning by default):
Check ONU allowed versions, it allowed versions, update Warning, General or
Software Version passes the check; the ONU software Severe
otherwise, it fails the version to an allowed u List of allowed
check. one in the list. versions
If the ONU hardware If the ONU hardware u Problem level
version is in the list of version is not in the list of (Severe by default):
ONU Hardware allowed versions, the allowed versions, update Warning, General or
Version Check check succeeds; the ONU hardware Severe
otherwise, the check version to an allowed u List of allowed
fails. one in the list. versions
If there are system
interruption alarms,
If there are system check the network status
Problem Level (Warning
Check NE interruption alarms, it fails to eliminate network
by default): Warning,
Monitoring the check; otherwise, it problems. If the network
General or Severe
OLT passes the check. is normal, check whether
Device it is caused by device
Service failures.
Status u Problem Level
If one of the focused If one of the focused (General by default):
alarms exists, it fails the alarms exists, eliminate Warning, General or
NE Alarm Check
check; otherwise, it the failure according to Severe
passes the check. the alarm content. u List of focused
alarms

534 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u Problem Level
(Severe by default):
If the number of fiber cut
Warning, General or
alarms of the same ONU If the number of fiber cut
Severe
Check Broken over a specified time alarms is out of the
u Cycle
Fiber Alarm of period is in the preset range, view whether
u Number of fiber-cut
High Frequency value range, it passes the there are rogue ONUs
alarms
check; otherwise, it fails under the PON port.
u Specified time
the check.
range: start time /
end time
u If there is port
interruption, check
whether the
connection of the
optical fiber at the
OLT side is normal.
u If the optical path is
anomalous, check
the optical path.
u If there are alarms
If there are link generated,
u Problem Level
interruption, signal
Check Port deterioration (link 4 check the (Severe by default):
optical path. Warning, General or
Working Status of attenuation is too high) or
Severe
10GE and GE other port alarms, it fails 4 check whether u List of focused
the check; otherwise, it the connection alarms
passes the check. of the optical
fiber at the OLT
side is normal.
Unplug and
plug fibers if
necessary.

4 If the alarm still

exists, replace
the fiber or OLT
optical module.

Version: A 535
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the MAC address

u Problem Level
aging time is too
If the MAC address aging (Severe by default):
short, set it to the
Check MAC time is equal to the Warning, General or
threshold.
Address Aging threshold, it passes the Severe
u If the MAC address
Time check; otherwise, it fails u MAC aging time
aging time is too
the check. threshold (300s by
long, set it to the
default)
threshold.
Check the CRCs
received by the PON port If the CRC is increased
three times in a row at continuously, check
interval of one minute whether the optical fiber
Problem Level (General
Check PON Port and compare the CRCs is damaged and check
by default): Warning,
Error Packet to see whether the CRC whether the Tx optical
General or Severe
value is increased every powers of the devices at
time. If yes, it fails the the two ends of the fiber
check; otherwise, it are abnormal.
passes the check.

Compare the
performance value with
Check the Uplink that over last 15 minutes. If the BER is abnormal, Problem Level (General
Optical Path's If they are the same, it check whether the link is by default): Warning,
Error Code passes the check; faulty. General or Severe
otherwise, it fails the
check.
u Problem Level
If the uplink port
(General by default):
bandwidth usage is within If the bandwidth usage is
Check Uplink Warning, General or
the preset value range, it too large, capacity
Bandwidth Severe
passes the check; expansion is
Utilization u Bandwidth usage
otherwise, it fails the recommended.
threshold (60% by
check.
default): 0-100

If all the performance

Check Card classification switches of
If the performance Problem Level (General
Performance the card are turned on, it
classification switch is by default): Warning,
Classification passes the check;
turned off, turn it on. General or Severe
Switch otherwise, it fails the
check.

536 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

If dual-uplink protections
If no dual-uplink Problem level (General
Check Dual-Uplink are configured, the check
protection is configured, by default): Warning,
Protection Status succeeds; otherwise, the
configure one. General or Severe
check fails.
u If the standby card is
abnormal, check the
connection of the
If both the active card
standby card and
and the standby card are Problem Level (Severe
Check MCU the network.
present, it passes the by default): Warning,
Double Match u If the active card is
check; otherwise, it fails General or Severe
abnormal, check the
the check.
connection of the
active card and the
network.
u If the active power
card is not present,
If the dual-power
insert or replace the
configuration is normal, it Problem Level (Severe
power card.
Check Dual Power passes the check; by default): Warning,
u If the standby power
otherwise, it fails the General or Severe
card is not present,
OLT check.
insert or replace the
Device
power card.
Configura-
tion u If the TRAP server
address is abnormal,
modify it to a valid
TRAP server
If the TRAP server is not address. u Problem Level
in the list of allowed u If the number of (General by default):
severs, the number of TRAP servers Warning, General or
Check NE TRAP TRAP servers exceeds exceeds the upper Severe
Server the preset value, or the limit, modify the u List of valid TRAP
Configuration TRAP server address is server quantity and servers
not configured, it fails the make sure it does u TRAP server
check; otherwise, it not exceed the limit. quantity limit (10 by
passes the check. u If the TRAP server default)
address is not
configured, set it to
a valid TRAP server
address.

Version: A 537
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the SNMP read

If the SNMP read / write community name is
community name is in the illegal, modify it to a u Problem Level
Check NE SNMP
list of illegal community legal name. (Severe by default):
Reading and Wring
names, it fails the check; u If the SNMP write u List of illegal SNMP
Group Name
otherwise, it passes the community name is communities
check. illegal, modify it to a
legal name.

u If the saving period

is too short, modify
the period. u Problem Level
If the configuration saving u If the saving (General by default):
Check OLT period and frequency are frequency is too high Warning, General or
Configuration within the preset value or too low, modify Severe
Data's Automatic range, it passes the the frequency. u Period (6 hours by
Saving check; otherwise, it fails u If automatic saving default)
the check. is not configured, u Frequency (1 times/
configure it as period by default)
automatic saving
every day.

u Problem Level
If the difference between (Severe by default):
the device time and the Warning, General or
If the time difference
Check NE Time local time is within the Severe
exceeds the threshold,
Setting value range, it passes the u Difference between
calibrate the device time.
check; otherwise, it fails device time and
the check. local time (15
OLT
minutes by default)
Device
u If the NTP protocol
Network
is not enabled,
Configura-
If the NTP protocol is enable it.
tion
enabled and the NTP u If the NTP server is
Problem Level (Severe
server address is legal, it not configured,
Check Clock by default): Warning,
passes the check; configure it.
General or Severe
otherwise, it fails the u If the NTP server
check. address is illegal,
configure a legal
NTP server.

538 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the VLAN
configuration of
If there are multiple uplink
uplink port causes
ports joining the same
the ring network,
Check Uplink port VLAN in UNTAG mode or Problem Level (Warning
modify the VLAN
ring network loopback detection is not by default): Warning,
configuration of the
hidden danger enabled, it fails the General or Severe
uplink port.
check; otherwise, it
u If the loopback
passes the check.
detection is not
enabled, enable it.

u If the broadcast
packet suppression
is not enabled,
If the packet suppression enable it.
Check Broadcast
settings of the uplink port u If the multicast
of Unknown Problem Level (Warning
meet the expectation, it packet suppression
Unicast or by default): Warning,
passes the check; is not enabled,
Unknown Multicast General or Severe
otherwise, it fails the enable it.
Suppression
check. u If the unknown
packet suppression
is not enabled,
enable it.
If the MAC anti-spoofing
settings meet the Problem Level (Warning
Check Anti-MAC If the MAC anti-spoofing
expectation, it passes the by default): Warning,
Address Spoofing is not enabled, enable it.
check; otherwise, it fails General or Severe
the check.
u Problem Level
If the NE IP address is
Check the Match If the IP address is not in (Warning by default):
within the preset value
between IP the preset value range, Warning, General or
range, it passes the
Address and modify it to a value in the Severe
check; otherwise, it fails
Planning Address allowed range. u Start IP address
OLT the check.
u End IP address
Device
u Problem Level
Network
If switching occurs (Warning by default):
Status
between the active and If the switching occurs, Warning, General or
Card Protection
standby cards, it fails the check the switching card Severe
Switching Check
check; otherwise, it to eliminate the failure. u Specified time
passes the check. range: start time /
end time

Version: A 539
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u Problem Level
If switching occurs in the (Warning by default):
Check the If switching occurs in the
PON port protection Warning, General or
Aggregation Port port, check the switching
group, it fails the check; Severe
Protection port to eliminate the
otherwise, it passes the u Specified time
Reversal failure.
check. range: start time /
end time
u Problem Level
(Warning by default):
Warning, General or
Severe
u Warning Lower Limit
on Rx Optical Power
(-30 dBm by default)
u Warning Upper Limit
on Rx Optical Power
Observe the quality of
(-3 dBm by default)
the optical fiber and
u Alarm Lower Limit
optical path for a period
on Rx Optical Power
of time. Use the optical
( -32 dBm by default)
If the Tx / Rx optical power meter dedicated
u Alarm Upper Limit
power is within the preset for PON and test optical
Check the Work on Rx Optical Power
value range, it passes the fiber to check whether
Light Power (-1 dBm by default)
check; otherwise, it fails the OLT/CBAT or
u Warning Lower Limit
the check. ONU/CNU optical
on Tx Optical Power
module works normally. If
(-2 dBm by default)
not, replace the optical
u Warning Upper Limit
module or contact the
on Tx Optical Power
technical engineer.
(7 dBm by default)
u Alarm Lower Limit
on Tx Optical Power
(-4 dBm by default)
u Alarm Upper Limit
on Tx Optical Power
(9 dBm by default)
u Sensitivity (2 dBm
by default)

540 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

If the optical module type

If the optical module is
and the port type are
present, and the optical
inconsistent, make sure
Check Optical module type and port Problem Level (Warning
the EPON optical module
Module Type type are inconsistent, it by default): Warning,
is inserted in the EPON
Matching fails the check; General or Severe
port and the GPON
otherwise, it passes the
optical module in the
check.
GPON port.

Description of OLT Statistical Items

Statistics Item Parameter Settings

Information Statistics of Pluggable Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General or

Optical Module Severe
Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General or
Check The Failed Status Card
Severe
PON Port CRC Error Packet Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General or
Statistics Severe
u Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General
Count The Failure Port Optical or Severe
OLT Device and Module Information u Failure Alarm1 (All selected by default): Select All,
Health Statistics Single Alarm, Multiple Alarm and Empty

u Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General

Count The Unplugged Module or Severe
Information u Port Type (PON port / uplink port): PON port, uplink
port, PON port / uplink port and empty

Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General or

Fan Information Statistics
Severe
GPON/EPON Mixed Insertion Problem Level (Warning by default): Warning, General or
Statistics Severe
Note 1: Failure alarms include alarms on signal degradation and sending failures of the local optical module, and
threshold-crossing temperature, voltage, bias current and Tx optical power of the optical module. "Select All"
means selecting all alarms; "a single alarm" indicates only one alarm selected; "multiple alarms" indicates
more than two alarms selected; "empty" means no alarms selected.

Version: A 541
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description of MDU Inspection Items

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the TRAP server

address is abnormal,
modify it to a valid
TRAP server
If the TRAP server is not address. u Problem Level
in the list of allowed u If the number of (General by default):
severs, the number of TRAP servers Warning, General or
Check NE TRAP TRAP servers exceeds exceeds the upper Severe
Server the preset value, or the limit, modify the u List of valid TRAP
Configuration TRAP server address is server quantity and servers
not configured, it fails the make sure it does u TRAP server
check; otherwise, it not exceed the limit. quantity limit (10 by
passes the check. u If the TRAP server default)
address is not
configured, set it to
MDU a valid TRAP server
Equip- address.
ment
u If the SNMP read
Status
If the SNMP read / write community name is u Problem Level
community name is in the illegal, modify it to a (Severe by default):
Check NE SNMP
list of illegal community legal name. Warning, General or
Reading and Wring
names, it fails the check; u If the SNMP write Severe
Group Name
otherwise, it passes the community name is u List of illegal SNMP
check. illegal, modify it to a communities
legal name.

u Problem Level
If the difference between (Severe by default):
the device time and the Warning, General or
If the time difference
Check NE Time local time is within the Severe
exceeds the threshold,
Setting value range, it passes the u Difference between
calibrate the device time.
check; otherwise, it fails device time and
the check. local time (15
minutes by default)

542 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the environment
temperature is too u Problem Level
low, take measures (Severe by default):
If the environment to raise the Warning, General or
temperature is within the temperature. Severe
Check the
preset value range, it u If the environment u Lower humidity
Environmental
passes the check; temperature is too threshold (15℃ by
Temperature
otherwise, it fails the high, the air- default)
check. conditioner should u Upper humidity
be turned on to threshold (25℃ by
reduce the indoor default)
temperature.

When the core switch

card's usage is higher
u Problem Level
If the core switch card's than the threshold, check
(Severe by default):
CPU usage is within the whether special
Warning, General or
Check the CPU preset value range, it operations are
Severe
Utilization of MCU passes the check; performed, whether the
u CPU usage
otherwise, it fails the protocol is normal and
threshold (70% by
check. whether any abnormal
default): 0-100
protocol package exists
in the network.
u Problem Level
If the core switch card's If the core switch card's
(Severe by default):
memory usage is within memory usage is higher
Warning, General or
Check the Memory the preset value range, it than the threshold, check
Severe
Utilization of MCU passes the check; whether the configuration
u Memory usage
otherwise, it fails the is normal and delete the
threshold (90% by
check. extra configuration.
default): 0-100

Fan failure: First check

whether the power cable
If there are fan alarms, it of the fan is well
Problem Level (Severe
Equipment Fan fails the check; connected. If there is too
by default): Warning,
Check otherwise, it passes the much dust on the fan,
General or Severe
check. clean the dust. If the
failure still exists, replace
the fan.

Version: A 543
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u Problem Level
If one of the focused If one of the focused (General by default):
alarms exists, it fails the alarms exists, eliminate Warning, General or
NE Alarm Check
check; otherwise, it the failure according to Severe
passes the check. the alarm content. u List of focused
alarms
u Problem Level
If the NE IP address is
Check the Match If the IP address is not in (Warning by default):
within the preset value
between IP the preset value range, Warning, General or
range, it passes the
Address and modify it to a value in the Severe
check; otherwise, it fails
Planning Address allowed range. u Start IP address
the check.
u End IP address
u Problem Level
If the NE software version If the NE software
(Warning by default):
is in the list of allowed version is not in the list of
NE Software Warning, General or
versions, it passes the allowed versions, update
Version Check Severe
MDU check; otherwise, it fails the device version to an
u List of allowed
Equip- the check. allowed one in the list.
versions
ment
u Problem Level
Software If the NE software version If the card software
(Warning by default):
Status is in the list of allowed version is not in the list of
Check Card Warning, General or
versions, it passes the allowed versions, update
Software Version Severe
check; otherwise, it fails the card version to an
u List of allowed
the check. allowed one in the list.
versions

544 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Description of EMS Inspection Items

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

u If the CPU usage is too

high, check whether
irrelevant programs are
installed and redundant
u Problem Level (General
files are saved on the
by default): Warning,
If the CPU usage, EMS server.
General or Severe
memory usage, and u If the memory usage is
u CPU usage threshold
Check Network hard disk usage of the too high, check whether
(70% by default): 0-100
Management EMS server are within irrelevant programs are
u Memory usage
Server the preset value installed and redundant
threshold (70% by
Utilization range, it passes the files are saved on the
default): 0-100
check; otherwise, it EMS server.
u Hard disk usage
fails the check. u If the hard disk usage is
threshold (80% by
too high, check whether
default): 0-100
Check irrelevant programs are
Network installed and redundant
Manage- files are saved on the
ment EMS server.
Server u If there is abnormal
Software restart or too many
and If all the processes in resources are occupied,
Hardware the list of started contact the technical
processes are engineer. u Problem Level (Severe
normally started, the u If the CPU usage is too by default): Warning,
process ID and initial high due to abnormal General or Severe
Check Network
process ID are restart of processes or u List of processes that
Management
consistent (no high occupation of must be started
Software
abnormal restart), and resources, contact the u CPU usage threshold
Process
the CPU usage and technical engineer. (70% by default): 0-100
Information
memory usage are u If the memory usage is u Memory usage
within the preset value too high due to threshold (70% by
range, it passes the abnormal restart of default): 0-100
check; otherwise, it processes or high
fails the check. occupation of resources,
contact the technical
engineer.

Version: A 545
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Description
Inspection Item
Inspection Rule Processing Suggestion Parameter Settings

If the total
consumption of all
Check Network
license control items If the consumption exceeds Problem Level (Warning by
Management
does not exceed the the limit, apply for a new default): Warning, General or
License
limit, it passes the license. Severe
Information
check; otherwise, it
fails the check.
If the data space u Problem Level (General
u If the data space usage
usage and log space by default): Warning,
is too high, contact the
Check Network usage are within the General or Severe
technical engineer.
Management preset value range, it u Data space usage limit
u If the log space usage
Database passes the check; (70% by default): 0-100
is too high, contact the
otherwise, it fails the u Log space usage limit
technical engineer.
check. (70% by default): 0-100

11.7.2 General Operation Flow

Figure 11-1 shows the flow of basic operations in the automatic inspection system.

Figure 11-1 Inspection Flow

546 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Table 11-3 Process Description

Function Description

u Enable performance collection and alarm reporting.

Preparations
u Check the software / hardware version of the device.
Adding an Inspection Select the inspection item and set the -parameters, which will be
Profile used when creating inspection tasks.

Creating an inspection Select the objects to be checked and items to be inspected to create
task an inspection task.

Viewing the inspection

View the score of the inspection task and output the report.
result

11.7.3 Managing Inspection Profiles

This section introduces how to create, modify, delete and view inspection templates.

11.7.3.1 Viewing Inspection Templates

The following introduces how to view the inspection templates.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection to open the Auto Inspection tab.

2. On the Auto Inspection tab, click the Auto Inspection Template sub-tab.

3. In the left browse tree, click an inspection template to view the inspection item
information and configuration parameters.

11.7.3.2 Adding an Inspection Profile

This section introduces how to create inspection templates. The following uses the
OLT Inspection Template as an example.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Version: A 547
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection from the main menu to open the Auto
Inspection tab.

2. On the Automatic Inspection tab, click Auto Inspection Template.

3. Click OLT Inspection Task in the left pane and select New OLT Inspection
Template in the right pane.

4. In the displayed New OLT Inspection Template dialog box, set Template
Name and Template Remark.

Note:

Template Name is required.

5. On the Auto Inspection Template tab, double-click the template created at the
previous step.

6. Set Inspection Information and Parameter Configuration according to

Description of Inspection Items.

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Template Name
from other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

7. Click Save.

11.7.3.3 Modifying an Inspection Profile

This section introduces how to modify inspection templates. The following uses the
OLT Inspection Template as an example.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

548 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection from the main menu to open the Auto
Inspection tab.

2. On the Automatic Inspection tab, click Auto Inspection Template.

3. Click the desired template under OLT Inspection Task in the left pane.

4. Modify Inspection Information and Parameter Configuration according to

Description of Inspection Items.

5. Modify the template name: Click Modify Name to open the Modify Inspection
Template Name dialog box and set the template name.

6. Click Save All.

11.7.3.4 Deleting an Inspection Template

This section introduces how to delete inspection templates.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection to open the Auto Inspection tab.

2. On the Auto Inspection tab, click the Auto Inspection Template sub-tab.

3. In the left browse tree, right-click the desired inspection template and select
Delete.

4. In the displayed Delete Confirm alert box, click Yes.

11.7.4 Managing Inspection Tasks

11.7.4.1 Viewing Inspection Tasks

This section introduces how to view inspection tasks.

Version: A 549
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection from the main menu to open the Auto
Inspection tab.

2. Click OLT Inspection Task, MDU Inspection Task or EMS Inspection Task in
the left pane to view the existing inspection tasks.

3. Click a task in the left pane to view the inspection result, execution result and
original result of the task.

4. Double-click a task in the right pane to view the attributes of the task (including
basic information, object source and extended information).

Other Operations

In the right pane, right-click a task entry and select Enable, Disable, Execute Now,
Delete, or Attribute from the shortcut menu to perform the corresponding operation.

11.7.4.2 Creating Inspection Tasks

The following introduces how to create inspection tasks.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection to open the Auto Inspection tab.

2. Right-click OLT Inspection Task, MDU Inspection Task or EMS Inspection

Task in the left pane or right-click in the right pane and select Create to open
the corresponding dialog box.

3. Set the parameters in the Basic information, Object source, and Extend
information tabs as required, and click OK. The new task appears in the task
list.

550 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Note:

Click Copy from other tasks to copy all settings except Task Name from
other templates. This improves the setting efficiency.

11.7.4.3 Executing Inspection Tasks

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection to open the Auto Inspection tab.

2. Click OLT Inspection Task, MDU Inspection Task or EMS Inspection Task in
the left pane to view the existing inspection tasks.

3. Right-click an inspection task and select Execute Now from the shortcut menu,
or select the task and click Execute Now at the lower right corner of the tab to
execute the inspection task.

11.7.5 Managing Inspection Results

Prerequisite

You have the authority of Operator Group or higher authority.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Auto Inspection from the main menu to open the Auto
Inspection tab.

2. Select OLT Inspection Task, MDU Inspection Task or EMS Inspection Task
in the left pane to view the existing inspection tasks.

3. Right-click an inspection task and select View.

4. View the task execution result and original result on the Task Management tab
and view the inspection details through charts on the Inspection Result tab.

Version: A 551
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Related Operation

u On the Inspection Result tab,

4 Click Incremental Check to perform incremental inspection on the

inspection items that fail the check or with command exceptions.

4 Click Export Report to output the execution result of the inspection task.

552 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

u On the Task Management tab,

4 Click Export Report to output the execution result of the inspection task.

4 Select an entry in Execution Result, and click Delete to delete the

selected execution result.

11.8 PON Traffic Analysis

The UNM2000 integrates the PON Traffic Tool. For specific operations, see "PON
Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Background Information

u The PON traffic analysis supports the independent mode and convergence
mode, which provide the basically consistent functions.

4 Independent mode: Logs into the traffic analysis tool via the browser.

4 Convergence mode: Accesses the traffic analysis tool via the Advanced
menu of the UNM2000.

u The PON Traffic Tool, with visualized data analysis, intelligent warning
management, precise capacity analysis, helps you comprehensively
understand the service traffic and bandwidth usage of the PON network, gather
statistics on and analyze traffic growth trend and resource use efficiency of the
PON network and effectively gives early warnings on capacity expansion, and
balances and optimizes network resources so as to prevent network
congestion and guarantee the transfer quality of various services.

Version: A 553
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Supported Functions

Function Description

u Views the key indicator data of the network, such as the

ONU low optical power report, uplink port optical power
anomaly statistics, ONU low optical power trend chart and
Overview total traffic of the network.
u For specific operations, see Section Viewing the
Homepage Chart in "PON Network Traffic and Quality
Analysis System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Topology map u Provides the topology of the entire network, where

threshold-crossing NEs are highlighted and the
corresponding information is provided. In this way, network
operators can directly view the traffic status of the entire
network.
u Dynamically displays traffic distribution of each area in a
Map
GIS map big-screen GIS map. You can zoom in or out a focused area
to display its multi-level traffic information. In this way, traffic
status is visualized.
u For specific operations, see Section Viewing the Traffic
Map in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System
V2R11 Operation Guide".

554 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Function Description

Table u Collects statistics on the rate, bandwidth usage, packet loss,

Trend chart and bit error information of OLT uplink ports, OLT PON
Port analysis ports, ONU PON ports, and links of NEs in the entire
network, and exports these reports for the operation and
Area analysis
maintenance personnel to analyze the operation status of
TopN ranking
the network.
u Gathers statistics of and analyzes the bandwidth usage and
flow rate trend of the desired NE port over a specified time
period. This function helps you understand the bandwidth
usage and traffic change trend, and analyze the traffic
growth point.
u Collects statistics on the peak downlink bandwidth usage of
OLT uplink ports, and OLT PON ports of NEs in the entire
network, and exports these reports for the operation and
maintenance personnel to analyze the operation status of
the network.
u Enables you to gather statistics of and analyze the total
Traffic traffic of the PON network, bandwidth usage of the PON
Analysis port, traffic of the uplinks and uplink threshold-crossing
ratios of an area over a specified time period. This function
Adding /
helps you understand the network resources, bandwidth
Removing
usage and traffic change trend, and analyze the traffic
Tokens
growth point.
u Ranks the peak bandwidth usages of the OLT uplink port,
OLT PON port and ONU PON port of a specified NE over a
specified time period and lists the objects whose peak
bandwidth usages are in top 10, 50 or 100.
u Supports custom token removing / adding rules. Monitors
performance indicators in the entire network, adds tokens to
threshold-crossing objects, and sends threshold-crossing
alarms via the Socket interface to a third-party. If an object
with a threshold-crossing token resumes normal operations,
you can remove its token.
u For specific operations, see Section Traffic Analysis in
"PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11
Operation Guide".

u Gathers statistics of online ratio of physical resources, and

resource information in the entire network, and outputs
analysis reports.
Resource Analysis
u For specific operations, see Section Network Resource
Analysis in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Version: A 555
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Function Description

Table u Collects statistics on the following parameters of NEs in the

Trend entire network: Rx and Tx optical power, temperature, bias
Analysis on current, and voltage of OLT uplink ports; Tx optical power,
anomaly temperature, bias current, voltage, and Rx ONU optical
power of OLT PON ports; Rx and Tx optical power, uplink /
downlink optical attenuation, temperature, bias current, and
voltage of ONU PON ports. The module supports exporting
these reports for the operation and maintenance personnel
to analyze the health status of the device.
u Gathers statistics of optical power change trend of the OLT
uplink ports, OLT PON ports, and ONU PON ports in the
specified area, and exports these reports for the operation
Optical
and maintenance personnel to analyze the health status of
Power
the device.
Analysis
ONU low u Gathers statistics of Rx weak optical power information of
optical power the OLT uplink ports, OLT PON ports, and ONU PON ports
in the specified area, and exports these reports for the
operation and maintenance personnel to analyze the health
status of the device.
u Gathers statistics of the ONU objects with weak optical
power in the entire network, analyzes the causes for ONU
weak optical power, collects the ONU weak optical power
information for each cause and generates a report.
u For specific operations, see Section Optical Power
Analysis in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Threshold- u Provides the latest 15-min performance threshold-crossing

crossing warning / alarm data.
Perfor-
current alarm u Supports viewing the performance threshold crossing data
mance
in the specified time period and exporting the
threshold-
Threshold- corresponding reports.
crossing
crossing u For specific operations, see Section Threshold-Crossing
alarm
history alarms Alarm Analysis in "PON Network Traffic and Quality
Analysis System V2R11 Operation Guide".

u Views the OLT device health, card health, ONU health and
anomalies of the OLT core switch card, and outputs reports.
Device health status u For specific operations, see Section Device Health
Analysis in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

556 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Function Description

Automatic task u Supports customizing reports. It collects statistics on OLT

15-minute uplink ports, OLT PON ports, and ONU PON ports for NEs
original data in the entire network, and generates traffic analysis reports,
report optical power reports, health reports, and resource reports
for the operation and maintenance personnel to analyze the
network operation status.
Automatic u Generates the 15-minute original performance data report
Report and exports it to the specified FTP server. If the uploading
Report fails, it provides the uploading failure records.
archiving date u Saves the reports by generation time and archives them
based on period time.
u For specific operations, see Section Automatic Report
Management in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

Threshold
u Sets thresholds for traffic, optical power and health status.
settings
u Sets the FTP server to save the exported automated
FTP server reports.
settings u Sets the mailbox to send and receive the exported
Settings Mailbox automated reports.
settings u Sets the system display parameters to display the map.
u For specific operations, see Section System Settings in
System
"PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis System V2R11
Display
Operation Guide".
Settings

Monitoring u Manages second-level traffic monitoring tasks.

tasks u Views second-level traffic reports.
Second-
Reports u Views second-level traffic trend charts.
level traffic
u For specific operations, see Section Second-Level Traffic
monitoring
Trend chart Monitoring in "PON Network Traffic and Quality Analysis
System V2R11 Operation Guide".

11.9 Failure Isolation

The UNM2000 supports the intelligent fault assistant location function to quickly
locate the faulty point, improving the fault isolation efficiency.

Version: A 557
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Background Information

The UNM2000 supports isolating the failures by the sequence of OLT Status→PON
Port Status→ODN Status→ONU Status. It gives the processing suggestions
based on the failure location and supports exporting failure isolation reports.

11.9.1 Managing Failure Detection Templates

11.9.1.1 Viewing Failure Detection Templates

Background Information

u The system includes four default templates: voice service fault detection, IPTV
program interruption, WiFi service fault detection and no Internet access.

u The default templates of the system cannot be deleted or modified.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on
the right of Select Detection Template to view the existing fault detection
templates.

11.9.1.2 Creating Failure Detection Templates

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

558 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on
the right of Select Detection Template to open the Custom Template dialog
box.

5. Click Create to open the Create Fault Detection Template dialog box and set
the template name, type and remark.

6. Click OK after setting.

Note:

u Click Create and continue to create templates in the Create Fault

Detection Template dialog box.

u Click Select Template, and you can copy all settings except
Template Name from other task. This can improve the setting
efficiency.

11.9.1.3 Modifying Failure Detection Templates

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on
the right of Select Detection Template to open the Custom Template dialog
box.

Version: A 559
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5. Select a non-default template and click Modify to open the Create Fault
Detection Template dialog box and then set the template name, type and
remark.

6. Click OK after setting.

11.9.1.4 Deleting Failure Detection Templates

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the Custom button on
the right of Select Detection Template to open the Custom Template dialog
box.

5. Select a non-default template and click Delete.

11.9.2 Performing Fault Detection

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Operator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Double-click an NE in the main topology to open the NE manager.

2. Click to open the ONU List tab.

3. Right-click an ONU and select Fault Intelligent Assistant Location from the
shortcut menu.

560 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. On the Fault Intelligent Assistant Location tab, click the drop-down list of
Select Detection Template to select the detection template.

5. Click Execute.

Related Operation

u After completing the failure detection, view the detection result on the
Detection result tab.

Figure 11-2 Intelligent Fault Assistant Location

u Click Export to export the detection result export of failure intelligent assistant
location.

11.10 Managing Device Users

The following introduces how to create, modify and delete the device users, and
how to assign the authority to the users.

Version: A 561
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

11.10.1 Adding Device Users

You can create the UNM2000 device users and bind them with NEs.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to

display the Console User Management tab.

2. Click to open the Add Console User dialog box.

3. Set the relevant parameters in the Add Console User dialog box according to
Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 Device User Settings

Parameter Description

Required. Sets the user account, which must comply with the account
User Name policies. For the settings of the account policies, see Setting the Account
Policy.

Required. Sets the user password, which must comply with the password
Password policies. For the settings of the password policies, see Setting the Password
Policy.

Confirm
(Required) Enters the password again.
Password
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device
Binded NE List
user by selecting / deselecting the check box.

562 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

4. After the settings are completed, click OK.

Subsequent Operation

Click an NE in the left pane and view the device user information of the NE in the
right pane.

11.10.2 Modifying Device Users' Passwords

You can modify the passwords of device users on a regular basis to enhance the
account security.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to

display the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Select a device user entry in the right pane and click to display the Modify
Console User Password dialog box.

4. Set the relevant parameters in the Modify Console User Password dialog box
according to Table 11-5.

Table 11-5 Device User Settings

Parameter Description

User Name Indicates the name of the user whose password is to be modified.

Old Password Indicates the old password of the device user.

Required. Sets the new password of the user, which must comply with the
New Password password policies. For the settings of the password policies, see Setting the
Password Policy.

Confirm
Required. Enters the password again.
Password
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device
Binded NE List
user by selecting / deselecting the check box.

Version: A 563
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

5. After the settings are completed, click OK.

11.10.3 Deleting Device Users

You can delete the specified device user or change the NE bound with the device
user.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to

display the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Select a device user entry in the right pane and click , or right-click a device
user entry and select Delete Console User from the shortcut menu to open the
Delete Console User dialog box.

4. Set the relevant parameters in the Delete Console User dialog box according
to Table 11-6.

Table 11-6 Device User Settings

Parameter Description

User Name Indicates the name of the user to be deleted.

Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device
Binded NE List
user by selecting / deselecting the check box.

564 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

5. After completing the settings, click OK.

11.10.4 Enabling / Disabling Device Users

You can enable / disable the specified device user or change the NE bound with the
device user.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to

display the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Select a device user entry in the right pane and click , or right-click a device
user entry and select Enable/Disable Console User from the shortcut menu to
open the Enable/Disable Console User dialog box.

4. Set the relevant parameters in the Enable/Disable Console User dialog box
according to Table 11-7.

Version: A 565
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 11-7 Device User Settings

Parameter Description

User Name Indicates the name of the user to be deleted.

Enable Console
Sets whether to enable this user by selecting / deselecting the check box.
User
Click Show Batch Operation and set the NE bound with the new device
Binded NE List
user by selecting / deselecting the check box.

5. After completing the settings, click OK.

11.10.5 Reading the Device User Information

The following introduces how to read the user information of the specified device.

Prerequisite

You are an EMS user with the Security Administrator Group authority or higher.

Procedure

1. Select Maintenance→Console User Management from the main menu to

display the Console User Management tab.

2. Select an NE from the left pane.

3. Right-click the device in the left pane and select Read Selected Console User
information from the shortcut menu, or select a device user entry in the right
pane and click .

Operation Result

In the message pane at the lower part of the Console User Management tab, view
whether the device user information is read successfully.

566 Version: A
 11 Managing the Operation Maintenance

Version: A 567
12 Application Scenarios

The following introduces the common application scenarios of the UNM2000.

Alarm Management

Performance Management

Guaranteeing Device Configuration

568 Version: A
 12 Application Scenarios

12.1 Alarm Management

Alarm management module performs real-time monitoring on the faults and

abnormalities generated during the equipment operation and provides detailed
information and analysis of the alarm, so as to help users to isolate the faults and
handle them quickly.

Background Information

The UNM2000 classifies the alarms into the current alarms and the historical alarms
according to the alarm statuses.

u Current alarm: The alarm data saved in the current alarm database of the
UNM2000.

The alarm frequently generated by the same object will be displayed as one
entry in the current alarm list, and the frequency column shows the generation
times of the alarm. You can view the alarm log to query all the alarm records.

u Alarm history: the current alarms that have been confirmed and cleared will be
added into the alarm history after a preset period.

The alarm history will be saved into the alarm history database from the current
alarm database. See Setting the Definition of the Alarm History regarding how
to set the delay time for transferring the current alarms to the alarm history.

Alarm Operation Description

The UNM2000 provides abundant alarm management functions. The user can refer
to Table 12-1 and choose the corresponding function to monitor and handle the
alarms.

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description

Operation Description Related Function

Sets the alarm parameters,
including alarm sound, alarm For setting the alarm parameters, see Setting Alarm
Preset alarm automatic synchronization policy Related Parameters.
parameters and alarm history definition.

Sets the maintenance status of the For managing the project status of alarms, see Managing
managed object. the Alarm Project Status.

Version: A 569
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function

For viewing the current alarms, see Viewing Current
Alarms.
For viewing the alarm history, see Viewing Alarm History.

Monitors the alarms to obtain the For viewing reported alarms, see Viewing Reported Alarms.
alarm information. For viewing alarm logs, see Viewing Alarm Logs.

For viewing statistics of alarm logs, see Viewing Alarm Log

Statistics.
For viewing alarm statistics, see Viewing Alarm Statistics.

To obtain accurate alarm

information, synchronize the
alarms to make the alarms For synchronizing alarms, see Synchronizing Alarms.
displayed in the UNM2000
Monitor alarms
consistent with device alarms.
Customizes the alarm names or For customizing alarm names, see Re-Defining Alarm
levels according to the Names and Customizing Alarm Names.
maintenance requirements for
For customizing alarm levels, see Customizing Alarm
convenient management and
Levels.
efficient alarm monitoring.

To make sure the related staff are For managing remote alarm notification, see Setting
notified timely upon occurrence of Remote Notification of Alarms.
failures, you need to set the alarm For enabling / disabling alarm alert sound, see Setting the
notification mode in advance, Audible Alarms.
including the alarm sound, alarm
For setting the alarm reporting rule, see Setting Alarm
reporting rules and remote
Reporting Rules.
notification rules.
For collecting statistics of device faults, see Gathering
Statistics of Device Failures.
Collects failure information by For viewing the alarm details, see Viewing Alarm Details.
Collect failure
viewing alarm details, locating
information and For locating the alarms, see Locating Alarms.
alarms and viewing alarm-related
analyze the For viewing related alarms, see Viewing Related Alarms.
operations and then analyzes the
failure reason
failure reason. For outputting alarm information, see Exporting the Alarm
Information.
View root / derivative alarms.
Eliminates the failures that trigger
Eliminate
the alarms according to the related For viewing the alarm details, see Viewing Alarm Details.
failures
manuals and alarm details.

570 Version: A
 12 Application Scenarios

Table 12-1 Alarm Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function

After a failure is eliminated, the
corresponding alarms will be
For clearing the alarms manually, see Clearing Alarms
cleared automatically. If the alarms
Manually.
cannot be cleared automatically,
you can remove them manually.

When the device is maintained, For filtering alarms, see Shielding Alarms.
Handle alarms
tested or commissioned, there will
be a relatively great number of
reported alarms. For the For managing alarm shield rules, see Managing Alarm
unimportant alarms, you can set Shielding Rules.
the alarm shield to shield the
alarms matching the conditions.

When an alarm is confirmed, this

Confirm alarms For confirming alarms, see Confirming Alarms.
alarm is processed.

Confirms and clears alarms at the

Confirm and For confirming and clearing alarms, see Confirming and
same time, and saves the alarm to
clear alarms Clearing Alarms.
the alarm database.
For editing the alarm maintenance experience, see Editing
Record alarm When the failure is processed, you
Alarm Maintenance Experience.
maintenance can record the alarm maintenance
For managing the alarm maintenance experience, see
experience experience to the alarm database.
Managing Maintenance Experience.

Save alarm Saves the alarm history to improve For managing history data saving, see Managing the Alarm
history the NE running efficiency. / Event Data.

12.2 Performance Management

The following introduces performance management function, helping you effectively

understand the service running status in a specified period of time.

Background Information

The performance data include the current performance data, real-time performance
data and performance history data.

u Current performance: Indicates the current 15-minute performance and the

performance of the latest sixteen 15-minute time intervals. The current
performance data are not saved in the database.

Version: A 571
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u Real-time Performance: Indicates the performance data collected and

displayed in real time. The collection period can be 10 seconds or 30 seconds;
the collection interval can be 15 minutes, 30 minutes, one hour, or 24 hours.
The performance data will not saved in the database.

u Performance history: Indicates the performance data collected according to the

performance collection task and saved into the database.

Performance Operation Description

The UNM2000 provides abundant performance management functions. You can

refer to Table 12-2 and choose the corresponding performance function to
effectively monitor the running status of the NE service.

Table 12-2 Performance Operation Description

Operation Description Related Function

As there are many performance
indexes with great amount of
performance data, the UNM2000
Enable the NE
disables the performance Enables the NE performance classification switch. See
performance
classification switch of the device Configuring the Performance Classification Switch in a
classification
by default. Therefore, you need to Batch Manner
switch
enable the performance
classification switch before
querying the NE performance data.

Collect performance data or

monitor performance quality For managing performance collection tasks, see Managing
through the performance collection Performance Collection Tasks.
task.
By managing performance
indicator sets, you can quickly set For managing performance indicator set, see Managing
Manage
the collection indicator of the Performance Indicator Sets.
performance
performance collection task.
collection
You can monitor the performance
data by setting the performance
threshold. If the performance data For managing performance threshold set, see Managing
exceeds the preset threshold Performance Threshold Sets.
value, the threshold crossing alarm
will be generated.

Monitoring
Obtain performance data by For viewing the current performance, see Viewing Current
Performance
monitoring performance. Performance.
Data

572 Version: A
 12 Application Scenarios

Table 12-2 Performance Operation Description (Continued)

Operation Description Related Function

For viewing the real-time performance, see Viewing Real-
Time Performance.
For viewing the performance history, see Viewing
Performance History.

For viewing the performance history trend, see Viewing the

Performance History Trend.

For viewing the performance comparison, see Viewing the

Performance Comparison.

Save Save the performance history data

For managing history data saving, see Setting the PAS
performance to improve the NE running
Saving.
history data efficiency.

12.3 Guaranteeing Device Configuration

To avoid that unexpected events, such as device failure, communication interruption

between the UNM2000 and the device and power failure, influence the service
recovery, the UNM2000 provides some functions for guaranteeing the device
configuration.

Backing Up Configuration

u When you need to compare whether the device configuration is the same as
that in the UNM2000 database, you can configure the synchronization
operation to view whether each configuration is the same. If not, you can
manually synchronize the device configuration to the UNM2000 database or
synchronize the configuration in the UNM2000 database to the device. For
specific operations, see Configuration Synchronization.

u To avoid device failures, you can set the execution period as needed so that the
device configuration will be automatically uploaded to the UNM2000 database
on a regular basis. This is convenient for restoring the configuration after the
device failure is eliminated. For specific operations, see Managing
Configuration Upload Tasks.

Version: A 573
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

u To avoid that the device and the UNM2000 server become faulty at the same
time, you can set the execution period so that the device configuration will be
automatically exported and saved to another FTP server on a regular basis.
This ensures that the device configuration will not be lost. For specific
operations, see Managing Configuration Export Tasks.

u You can also back up data by the network management tool. For specific
operations, see Importing / Exporting the Configuration File.

Backing Up Software

To avoid upgrade failure of device software, you can set the execution period as
needed so that the device configuration will be automatically exported and saved to
another FTP server on a regular basis. This is convenient for quickly restoring the
device software. For specific operations, see Managing Software Backup Tasks.

574 Version: A
 Appendix A Abbreviations

BML Business Management Layer

BMS Business Management System

Common Object Request Broker

CORBA
Architecture
CPU Central Processing Unit

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCN Data Communication Network
DDN Digital Data Network

EML Element Management Layer

EMS Element Management System

EPON Ethernet Passive Optical Network

GPON Gigabit-Capable Passive Optical Network

FTP File Transfer Protocol

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GNE Gate Network Element

GUI Graphic User Interface

IP Internet Protocol
International Telecommunication Union-
ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Sector
NE Network Element
NEL Network Element Level
NML Network Management Layer

NMS Network Management System

OLT Optical Line Terminal

ONT Optical Network Terminal

ONU Optical Network Unit

RMS Resources Management System

SML Service Management Layer

SMS Service Management System

TCP Transfer Control Protocol

TL1 Transaction Language 1

TMN Telecommunications Management Network

Version: A 575
UNM2000 Network Convergence Management System V2R11 Operation Guide

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UPS Uninterrupted Power System

576 Version: A
 Product Documentation Customer Satisfaction Survey
Thank you for reading and using the product documentation provided by FiberHome. Please take a moment to
complete this survey. Your answers will help us to improve the documentation and better suit your needs. Your
responses will be confidential and given serious consideration. The personal information requested is used for
no other purposes than to respond to your feedback.

Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Company

To help us better understand your needs, please focus your answers on a single documentation or a complete
documentation set.

Documentation Name
Code and Version

Usage of the product documentation:

1. How often do you use the documentation?
□ Frequently □ Rarely □ Never □ Other (please specify)
2. When do you use the documentation?
□ in starting up a project □ in installing the product □ in daily maintenance □ in trouble
shooting □ Other (please specify)
3. What is the percentage of the operations on the product for which you can get instruction from the
documentation?
□ 100% □ 80% □ 50% □ 0% □ Other (please specify)
4. Are you satisfied with the promptness with which we update the documentation?
□ Satisfied □ Unsatisfied (your advice)
5. Which documentation form do you prefer?
□ Print edition □ Electronic edition □ Other (please specify)
Quality of the product documentation:
1. Is the information organized and presented clearly?
□ Very □ Somewhat □ Not at all (your advice)
2. How do you like the language style of the documentation?
□ Good □ Normal □ Poor (please specify)
3. Are any contents in the documentation inconsistent with the product?
4. Is the information complete in the documentation?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
5. Are the product working principles and the relevant technologies covered in the documentation sufficient for
you to get known and use the product?
□ Yes
□ No (Please specify)
6. Can you successfully implement a task following the operation steps given in the documentation?
□ Yes (Please give an example)
□ No (Please specify the reason)
7. Which parts of the documentation are you satisfied with?

8. Which parts of the documentation are you unsatisfied with?Why?

9. What is your opinion on the Figures in the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)

□ Practical □ Unpractical (your advice)

10. What is your opinion on the layout of the documentation?

□ Beautiful □ Unbeautiful (your advice)
11. Thinking of the documentations you have ever read offered by other companies, how would you compare
our documentation to them?
Product documentations from other companies:

Satisfied (please specify)

Unsatisfied (please specify)

12. Additional comments about our documentation or suggestions on how we can improve:

Thank you for your assistance. Please fax or send the completed survey to us at the contact information
included in the documentation. If you have any questions or concerns about this survey please email at
[email protected]